#1: CALIFORNIA TO PAY BILLS—With I.O.U.’s!!! (Guests reside in Eastern Time.):California is so broke that Gov. Arnold Schwarzenegger will be paying their bills with I. O. U.’s! This is only the second time the state has done so since the Great Depression. A panel of expert guests are available for you to interview on your Talk Show. (See article below.)

PANELIST #1: Bob Chapman is editor of the International Forecaster newsletter. Bob is quite qualified to comment on what is happening in California, having lived in California for 36 years. Not only is Bob very familiar with politics in the state, he wrote extensively, warning of California’s impending plight back in 1993 with near prophetic accuracy.

Said Bob Chapman, “California has been living in financial ‘la la land’ since the 1960s and now the bill has to be paid. 40% of the people who live in the LA county don’t pay taxes, 10 million illegal aliens live in the state and do not pay taxes. How can a state function under such circumstances and carry the welfare load it has attempted to carry all these years?”

PANELIST #2: SCOTT WHEELER, Executive Director of National Republican Trust asks, Are California's I.O.U. as good as their post-dated checks?” Scott also believes it might even be unconstitutional to issue IOUs to a bank as cash.

Scott stated, “Nobody is getting this California revolt. California is a microcosm of what is occurring nationally. There is an ongoing insurgency of people who are tired of politics as usual. California needs an independence day of their own—and a new constitution! Their current state is remarkably similar to the state of the American Colonies when they declared their independence over 233 years ago.”

Wheeler, who recently spoke at a Philadelphia Tea Party (view speech at: http://nationalrepublicantrust.com/video.html), is a media savvy former television producer and investigative journalist who focused on domestic and international security issues for years. Mr. Wheeler has produced seventeen television documentaries and consulted on more than a dozen others. For the past eight years Mr. Wheeler has been on the forefront of the most crucial issues facing national security - from the war zones in Yugoslavia, to the drug fields of South America and following the trails of international arms smugglers to Canada, Europe and the Middle East. Mr. Wheeler is a veteran of the U.S. Army infantry.

Dr. Peter Lietner, Treasurer of National Republican Trust, is an alternate guest when Scott is busy on Capitol Hill. Dr. Leitner formerly worked in the Office of the Secretary of Defense starting with Casper Weinberger up until his retirement under current secretary Robert Gates. Peter was also a founding professor at the National Center for Biodefense at George Mason University in Fairfax, Va. Dr. Leitner brings 31 years of experience as a high-ranking federal official in a number of national security positions, particularly in the field of technology controls, nonproliferation, biodefense and counterterrorism. He has testified before the U.S. Congress numerous times and holds a doctorate from the University of Southern California and four master's degrees.

PANELIST #3: BOB RINEAR, editor of Financial Intelligence Report. Bob’s entrepreneurial roots stem from his early years in the jewelry industry. Once immersed in the intricacies of the equity markets, it didn't take Mr. Rinear long to realize that he had a knack for predicting the ebb and flow of stock and options markets. Over time Bob developed his personally successful methods of calculating stock and treasury movements into a workable platform that others could follow. As an outgrowth of this system of astute observation grew his newsletter, the "Financial Intelligence Report” and the his current company, "InvestYourself," that specializes in helping investors of every experience level gain investment knowledge of real estate, stocks, bonds, commodities and general finances.

THE NEW YORK TIMES/ July 3, 2009

Short on Cash, California to Start Paying With I.O.U.’s
By JENNIFER STEINHAUER

LOS ANGELES — Its budget gap growing and its political process for addressing the gap unhinged, California will begin Thursday to pay vendors and taxpayers with i.o.u.’s, only the second time the state has adopted the emergency payment method since the Great Depression.

By Thursday afternoon, state officials said, 28,742 warrants worth $53.3 million will be printed and readied for distribution. If the state’s fiscal crisis – which has left California unable to pay all of its bills – continues without a budget settlement, it would issue as much as $3.36 billion for the month of July.

The bulk of the warrants – which will offer recipients an interest rate of 3.75 percent -- will be issued to Californians waiting for their income tax refunds, though some will be issued to local governments as well as to vendors doing business with the state. Federal and state laws prohibit paying state employees, schools, or Medicaid recipients with the warrants.

The issuance of i.o.u.’s comes after state lawmakers and Gov. Arnold Schwarzenegger failed to agree on how to close a state budget hole — now roughly $27 billion — by the end of the fiscal year on Wednesday. The state is essentially too short on cash to pay its bills, and will continue to issue warrants — with potential long-term serious damage to the state’s credit rating — until the budget impasse is resolved.

In the meantime, Mr. Schwarzenegger, a Republican, has ordered state workers to take a third furlough day each month, beginning next Friday, to help stave off a further cash crisis in the state. On Wednesday, he proclaimed a fiscal emergency and called for a special session to continue the budget debate. A union representing engineers immediately filed a lawsuit protesting the third furlough day. “Telling people to stay home a third day a month slows economic recovery,” Mark Sheahan, of the Professional Engineers in California, said in a statement announcing the lawsuit.

Vendors and state residents who receive warrants may take them to a bank or credit union that accepts them for cash, or hold on to them until their maturity date — which will probably be sometime in October — and get their cash plus the accrued interest.

On Thursday, a small handful of banks – including Bank of America, Wells Fargo and Chase -- indicated that they would accept the warrants, but only through the middle of the month. The state’s trade association offered less-than-overwhelming optimism that more banks would step up, citing the technical difficulties in managing the IOUs coupled with fear of getting paid out in early October, when the warrants are set to mature.

“In evaluating potential registered warrant acceptance, banks have been advised by regulatory authorities to consider such issues as credit quality, capital requirements and concentration limits,” the president of the California Bankers Association, Rod Brown, said in a prepared statement. “Given the poor credit rating of California – the worst in the nation – banks may be hesitant to extend credit to the state.”

Democrats in the State Legislature tried unsuccessfully to stave off the need for the warrants through piece-meal budget cutting earlier in the week that was blocked by Republican lawmakers. The Democrats, who are in the majority in both houses of the legislature, are at bitter war with Governor Schwarzenegger, who has said he will sign no budget legislation that does not close the entire budget gap and include several significant policy changes that will have an impact on future budgets.

The governor’s failure to sign off on legislation earlier in the week that would have reduced payments to schools and thereby pushed off the need for IOUs was met with rage by State Senator Darrell Steinberg, the president pro tem, who called it “without question the most irresponsible act I’ve seen in my 15 years of public service.”

The governor held his first of two planned news conference in Southern California here Thursday to denounce the lawmakers, whom he has already taken to task in every possible media — television, video and Twitter feed — for mulling, in one instance, changes to a law concerning the tail of cows while the budget stalemate continued. He also promoted several policy initiatives, including some that are sure to run afoul of public employee unions, which have historically been aligned with Democrats.

“I presented my proposal and asked the legislature to make the tough decisions that are necessary and to make the real tough and deep cuts,” Mr. Schwarzenegger said during his news conference in Los Angeles. He added: “Instead of negotiating and coming to a budget agreement, they decided to debate and to debate and to have hearings and more debates and more hearings and finger-pointing and assigning blame. At the end of the day, they haven’t accomplished anything.”

Copyright 2009 The New York Times Company

#2: WAS THE OBAMA HEALTH CARE TOWN HALL MEETING STAGED? (Scott Wheeler or Peter Lietner in DC, NY or remote, 100,000 cume minimum for Scott):Was the Health Care Town Hall Meeting real or Memorex? Helen Thomas suggests it was not real.

So does Scott Wheeler, executive director of the National Republican Trust, the third largest conservative political PAC in the US, just behind the NRA. Scott is available to be your Talk Show interview guest on this topic.

“Barack Obama,” said Scott, “is like the traveling faith healer who brings his own shills to sell his snake oil. He substituted campaigning for governing.”

Scott is a media savvy former television producer and investigative journalist who focused on domestic and international security issues for years. Mr. Wheeler has produced seventeen television documentaries and consulted on more than a dozen others. For the past eight years Mr. Wheeler has been on the forefront of the most crucial issues facing national security - from the war zones in Yugoslavia, to the drug fields of South America and following the trails of international arms smugglers to Canada, Europe and the Middle East. Mr. Wheeler is a veteran of the U.S. Army infantry. Peter Lietner of National Republican Trust is also available as an interview guest.

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

White House Disputes Criticism that Health Care Town Hall Meeting Is Staged

FOX NEWS-- Before President Obama could even field the first Internet question for a town hall forum in Virginia on Wednesday, the White House was forced to defend the event against criticism that questions would be staged.

"I think will be a representative sample of the issues in this debate that we're dealing with," White House spokesman Robert Gibbs explained in response to concern that the event would be tightly controlled.

Over the weekend, the White House Web site solicited Americans to submit questions for the town hall via social networking sites like Facebook, Twitter and YouTube. According to the site, hundreds of entries were received.

Gibbs acknowledged that members of the White House's New Media office would be "shuffling through questions." And a White House Web site entry dated July 1st reads: "Today's the day where the president will get to answer some of the best submissions."

Gibbs tried to deflect further questions on why the event was being so tightly controlled -- unlike the town hall meetings Obama participated in on the campaign trail.

"How about you ask me that question tomorrow based on what questions were asked rather than pre-selecting your question based on something that may or may not come through," he said.

Asked if dissenting views would be expressed, Gibbs said, "I think that's a very safe bet." But some reporters complained that the event was the latest attempt by the White House to control the media. "I'm amazed at you people who call for openness and transparency," said veteran White House reporter Helen Thomas.

"And you haven't heard the questions," Gibbs shot back.

"It doesn't matter. It's the process," CBS' Chip Reid argued. "Even if there's a tough question, it's a question coming from somebody who was invited or who was screened or the question was screened."

The exchange came one week after the White House drew fire for providing first-rate treatment to a Huffington Post blogger, who asked the president a question on behalf of Iranians who submitted queries to the site. The White House escorted Nico Pitney from the lower press area to the front of the main briefing room so he could be the second questioner called on during the midday press conference.

The town hall event was not the only question about transparency during Wednesday's briefing. Gibbs was also asked whether the administration was trying to minimize media attention by delaying until the July 4 holiday weekend the release of an internal CIA report on the agency's secret detention and interrogation program during the Bush administration.

"My understanding is that it's doubtful that it will be released this week," Gibb said about the 2004 report that was expected to be made public two weeks ago.

Asked whether the delay was part of an effort to make the report more transparent, Gibbs said it was a combination of transparency and legal issues.

Obama's town hall meeting in Annandale was designed to be a conversation with the public about the administration's proposed health care reforms. The town hall format is something the president has consistently relied on, both during the campaign last year and through the first few months of his presidency. ©2009 Fox News Network LLC

#3: BOYS BEHAVING BADLY ON BUSES (Robert Peters resides in New York/Eastern Time.):Boys behaving badly on buses seems to be a growing problem with no end in sight.

After being sexually harassed by boys on a bus, a little girl came home and asked, “What’s a whore, Mommy?”

Explaining this new bus plague is Robert Peters, President of Morality In Media of New York. During your Talk Show interview with Robert he explains how this rampant escalation of harassment is attributed to the easy access illicit material on the Internet that becomes a mental way of life and thought for millions of boys are subjected to many hours of aroused viewing that doesn’t turn off by simply boarding a bus.

Bob also discusses the work of Dr. Lynn Ponton, a professor of psychiatry at the University of California at San Francisco. In her book, “The Sex Lives of Teenagers” (Dutton 2002), Dr. Ponton says that the abusive treatment of women portrayed on most graphic web sites can become sexual triggers for teenagers who become addicted to cyber sex. For them, she says, sexual arousal is impossible without that violent trigger. Other researchers and clinicians have come to similar conclusions.

Bob talks about recent editorials such as one that appeared in the April 1 edition of The Pocono Record (Northeast Pennsylvania) that read, “Parents said their children reported that boys taunted their daughters with information about sex they had read on the Internet or gleaned from their parents' video collection. The boys allegedly threatened to hold the girls down and have sex with them. One young boy reportedly dropped his pants and underwear and said he wanted to take the girl home and ‘hump’ her.”

These boys adopted the philosophy of ‘violence-is-sexy’ that Dr. Ponton warned against. And where did they find it? Probably from the Internet and/or videos that originated from Big P_rn in California’s San Fernando Valley, and from Big P_rn’s byproducts, which are the p_rn-like imagery and language spilling over into our pop culture today.

Said Peters, “For these boys, violence and sex go together. The p_rn culture is taking us all to a dangerous new place. The need to do something about that is urgent. What we’re up against is a criminal enterprise that uses sophisticated technology to violate federal and state obscenity laws. This problem goes way beyond what parents can do alone.”

ABOUT ROBERT PETERS…

Robert Peter is President of Morality in Media. He has been a guest on many television programs including three times on Larry King. He has been a diligent warrior in the fight against indecency for over two decades.

Headquartered in New York City, Morality In Media (MIM) works through constitutional means to curb traffic in illegal obscenity. MIM operates the www.obscenitycrimes.org website, where citizens can report possible violations of federal Internet obscenity laws.

Established in New York City in 1962 to combat p_rnography, Morality In Media works to inform citizens and public officials about the harms of p_rnography and about what they can do through law to protect their communities and children. MIM also works to maintain standards of decency on TV and in other media. Contributions are tax-exempt.

Morality In Media works through constitutional means to curb traffic in illegal obscenity. It operates the www.obscenitycrimes.org website, where citizens can report possible violations of federal Internet obscenity laws.

#4: JOBS LOST IN JUNE: 467,000! Far Higher than 365,000 Forecasted (Craig Smith resides in Pacific Time for 30,000 cume or higher; Bob Chapman and David Bradshaw available for any size station):A whopping 467,000 jobs were lost in June, far exceeding the projected loss of 365,000, putting the current unemployment rate at a staggering 9.5%, edging nearer to the dreaded double digit levels associated with an outright Depression.

Economists and other ‘experts’ had erroneously believed that the slowdown in job losses in May (to ‘only’ 322,000) proved that the market was bottoming out and the economy was ready to spring back to life. Newsflash: Experts were wrong again!

So, why hasn’t Obama’s $787 billion stimulus done anything to help save jobs? Kind of makes you wonder how much more taxpayer money he will offer in his next ‘urgent’ stimulus needed to bailout past failed bailouts.

Available to be your Talk Show guest on the seemingly endless suicidal cycle of bailouts are two financial/jobs experts:

GUEST #1: Craig R. Smith, CEO of Swiss America Corporation, who said, “After two stimulus packages, $168 Billion-Bush and $787billion-Obama, we are still hemorrhaging jobs at a rate of over 450,000 a month-- over six million since the start of this recession and no end is in sight. It is time to cut taxes, reduce the size of government and allow free markets to do what they do best: create jobs and prosperity. Government can create nothing but wasteful spending and red tape.”

ABOUT CRAIG SMITH…

Craig R. Smith is the Chairman and founder of www.OilSolution.org and author of Black Gold Stranglehold, the book written in 2005 that predicted today’s high oil prices. As an oil and economic analyst, Craig instantly engages audiences with his common-sense perspective on national and global economic trends. Over the past two decades he has been interviewed on over 1,500 radio and TV programs including: FOX News, CNN, CNBC, ABC, NBC, CBS, PBS, CBN, TBN, Time, The Wall Street Journal, The New York Times, and Newsweek. NOTE: David Bradshaw also conducts interviews when Craig is unavailable.

GUEST #2: Bob Chapman, editor of International Forecaster, shares with your audience:

“What government doesn’t tell you is that since 1980 they have continued to change the method of reporting many of their statistics, unemployment included. They use a formula to their best advantage, called the birth/death ratio, which totally distorts the figures released by government. Thus, for years unemployment has been much worse than announced by government.”

ABOUT ROBERT J. CHAPMAN:

Bob Chapman is 73 years old. He was born in Boston, MA and attended Northeastern University majoring in business management. He spent three years in the U. S. Army Counterintelligence, mostly in Europe. He speaks German and French and is conversant in Spanish. He lived in Europe for six years, off and on, three years in Africa, one year in Canada and another year in the Bahamas. Mr. Chapman became a stockbroker in 1960 and retired in 1988. For 18 of those years he owned his own brokerage firm. He was probably the largest gold and silver stockbroker in the world during that period. When he retired he had over 6,000 clients. From 1962 through 1976 he specialized in South African gold shares. He and his family lived in Salisbury, Rhodesia (now Harare, Zimbabwe) and Johannesburg, South Africa from 1970 to 1973. During that time he did a great deal of further study into the South African mining industry.


THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

THE NEW YORK TIMES/ July 2, 2009

Job Losses Rise in June as Unemployment Reaches 9.5%
By JACK HEALY

The pace of job losses quickened in June after slowing just a month earlier, casting a shadow over the Obama administration’s attempts to stanch months of declines in the labor market.

The American economy shed 467,000 jobs last month, and the unemployment rate rose to 9.5 percent from 9.4 percent, the Labor Department reported on Thursday. Job losses were widespread among the construction, manufacturing and business and professional services sectors.

The losses were sharply higher than economists’ expectations of 365,000 lost jobs.

Economists said a decline of 322,000 jobs in May had raised expectations that the market was bottoming out as the economy struggled to right itself, but the numbers on Friday dashed some of those hopes.

The figures also raised questions about whether the Obama administration, which has already passed a $787 billion stimulus plan, needed to step in again to shore up the American worker.

“The stimulus has probably stabilized income, but it has not moved the economy forward,” said John E. Silvia, chief economist at Wachovia Corporation. “It’s a finger in the dike. But in terms of getting the economy going, there’s no evidence of that yet.”

The latest figures highlight a somber new reality for workers, economists said. The numbers were released a day early because of the Fourth of July holiday.

As the recession enters its 20th month, private wages and salaries are falling, working hours are dwindling and more people are without work. In essence, economists say, months of deep, broad job losses are effectively making unemployment a way of life for millions.

The number of people who have been unemployed for more than 27 weeks has more than tripled since the recession began, to 4.4 million. The median time people go without a job has increased to more than four months, from slightly more than two months at the outset of the recession in December 2007.

“We have never seen a duration of that magnitude,” Lynn Reaser, vice president for the National Association for Business Economics, said. “There are a lot of ramifications. A lot of these people become discouraged, and they drop out of the work force. It affects their spending, their whole psychological frame of mind.”

In the Brownsville section of Brooklyn, Jeffrey Jones, 40, is feeling the weight of eight months without work. He has not found anything since losing his job as a cook at a senior center in October, and he worries about paying rent and caring for his four children. His blood pressure is up, he said, and some nights he stays up and watches television to distract himself from the worries that keep him from sleeping.

“I know I’m not supposed to be letting it stress me out,” he said. “The way I’m going now, I won’t be able to make it too much longer. I can’t go this long without doing something for my family.”

While the economy is no longer losing jobs at a pace of 600,000 each month, businesses are still cutting positions and imposing pay cuts and hiring freezes as the economy continues to contract. Job losses in May were revised to 322,000 from an earlier estimate of 345,000.

Consumers are saving 6.9 percent of their disposable income, and spending remains sluggish.

Even the White House has lowered its expectations for the job market, and now says that unemployment will hit 10 percent. Many economists say that job losses and unemployment will continue rising even after the economy begins growing again.

“I don’t see any job growth outside of health, education and government spending through the end of the year,” Mr. Silvia of Wachovia said. Some 6.5 million jobs have now been lost since the recession began, and the number of unemployed people has grown to 14.7 million.

As more people hunt futilely for jobs or give up their searches altogether, they burn through their savings, fall behind on bills and mortgages, and eventually add to the strains on already strapped aid programs, from government unemployment insurance to private food pantries.

“There are going to be massive, massive numbers of people who are out of work for long periods of time,” said Andrew Stettner, deputy director for the National Employment Law Project. “It’s one of the most important aspects of where the economy is right now.”

Although the number of people filing for unemployment insurance has leveled off recently, more workers are falling back on safety nets intended for the most troubled workers. More than 2.7 million people received emergency or extended unemployment benefits in the first week of June — the most recent period for which data was available — compared with 2 million at the beginning of the year.

On Thursday, the Labor Department also reported that the number of newly laid-off workers filing for unemployment insurance dropped last week. Initial jobless benefit claims fell by 16,000 to a seasonally adjusted 614,000.

As months pass without a job offer, people cut back where they can, turning off the cable, canceling vacations and shift their shopping habits to lower priced retailers. Some people give up looking for jobs and join the 800,000 discouraged workers.

Others, like Domminique Werdlow, 37, of Houston, keep sending out résumés and sifting through online job boards. Since she lost her job as a customer-service trainer at Waste Management in January, Ms. Werdlow said her car has been repossessed and that she now lives unemployment check to unemployment check.

“It’s not getting any better,” she said. “I really try to stay positive. If I really start looking at it, I’d be very depressed.”

Copyright 2009 The New York Times Company

#5: NORTH KOREA FIRES MISSILE (Maj. General Jerry Curry resides in DC/Eastern Time.):CONTACT: To schedule an interview, call: Special Guests, Amy Reiss or Lynne Campbell at: 630-848-0750. Television inquiries: Jerry McGlothlin, 212-699-2518.
NOTE: Due to the General’s tight schedule, TV or National Radio only. Thank you.

July 2, 2009-- North Korea just launched a missile test, according to a news report just issued by Fox News. (See article below)

The launch, reportedly at approximately 6:00 pm Korean Time (5:00 am ET) on July 2, 2009, was just 38 days after their last underground nuclear test, and just two weeks since their infamous threat to fire long range missiles toward Hawaii this July 4 weekend. (See original Daily Mail/London June 18 article below.)

The US military took the initial threat seriously and dispatched the USS John McCain naval destroyer to intercept a North Korean ship, the Kang Nam, suspected of carrying nuclear materials or other weaponry, in violation of U.N. Resolution 1874. As a result, that ship turned around, just prior to this new missile test launch.

With the finger on North Korea's volatile nuclear arsenal shifting from an erratic dictator who is partially recovered from a stroke, to someone who is half the age of President Obama, here’s the big question:

Is this nuclear bluster simply the birth pangs of a dictatorship transition from Kim Jong Il to his 26-year-old son, Kim Jong-un? Or is this a real threat? According to the Washington Post, Kim Jr is a youth with a reputation as a heavy drinker. If this is true, to what degree could the well being of Hawaiian citizens hang in the balance of a hangover?

Perhaps they can take comfort in knowing that experts say the missile only has a 4000 mile range, a tad bid shy of reaching Hawaii, 4500 miles away from the North Korean launch pad.

Ah, not so fast. Wasn’t it these same experts who didn’t even know our Pakistan (or was it India?) had a nuclear bomb until after their test detonation? So, how do we know these ‘experts’ are accurate in their math. After all, if their margin of error is only off 10%, that’s enough to reach Hawaii. Or if the North Koreans have recently tweaked their missile unbeknownst to US, their new improved model might just make it.

US Major General Jerry Curry (ret.) is your expert to discuss this potential powder keg in North Korea. Jerry enlisted in the US Army in 1951 at age 17, when the US was fighting, what foolishly is called the "Forgotten War."

What many people have forgotten is that it was a DEMOCRAT President who called on the United Nations to deploy armies to thwart North Korea's invasion of South Korea at a time when the world was already war weary from World War 2.

General Curry's career ascended from Korea through Viet Nam to being Special Assistant to President Reagan’s Defense Secretary Caspar Weinberger, whose final book, "The Next War" predicted a scenario in which North Korea would resume aggression against South Korea, providing a diversion which would invite China to move against US ally, Taiwan.

General Curry opposed General Colin Powell's endorsement of candidate Barack Obama, questioning his capacity to lead as Commander-in-Chief.

Curry contends we know that "The Truman Doctrine" and "The Bush Doctrine" claimed a simple truth: That the US would commit its military force to combat any armed aggression against the US and its international interests, but "The Obama Doctrine" appears to be: "Let's Talk it Over,” with North Korea, a charter member of the "Axis of Evil.”

A few weeks ago North Korea said it would no longer recognize the armistice which halted combat in the Korean War, effectively declaring itself at war again with South Korea, exacerbated by its six missile launches and nuclear tests in violation of its obligations under the six nation talks.

What does this all mean to US? And what might we expect to see come of the new transition of power? And what action might the Obama administration take to intercept the Korean ship that might be carrying nuclear or other weapons?

Jerry Curry stated, “Russia and China say they will veto any effort by the UN Security council to authorize any country to stop and board any North Korean vessel suspected to be carrying unauthorized military weapons cargo, unless the ship first agrees to be boarded. In short, the threat to stop, board and search for weapons is toothless. My prediction is the North Koreans will ignore us and all our posturing.”


ABOUT MAJOR GENERAL JERRY CURRY…

Major Gen. Jerry R. Curry (US Army Ret.) Ph.D. is a decorated combat veteran, Army Aviator, Paratrooper and Ranger who has served his country both in the military and as a Presidential appointee in three administrations. He served as Deputy Assistant Secretary of Defense in the Carter Administration, as Press Secretary to Secretary of Defense Caspar Weinberger in the Reagan Administration, and as Administrator of NHTSA for President George H. W. Bush.

A munitions expert, General Curry was the top ranking officer overseeing all equipment at the Military Proving Ground at Aberdeen, Maryland.

But Jerry Curry was not born with a silver spoon in his mouth. Far from it, Jerry was a steel mill worker from the small town of Liberty, Pennsylvania who enlisted in the Army as a young private and rose to the rank of major general, a feat almost unheard of.

His recent book, From Private to General – An African American Soldier Rises Through the Ranks (Believe Books, 2007), is a gritty true-life story of an African American soldier determined to succeed in a white-dominated military culture, facing the barriers of racism and elitism without compromising his values or becoming a victim. He rose through the ranks by distinguishing himself in intense challenges of combat and in military command assignments and by surviving the political infighting that is endemic in the military.

Curry shares fresh insights on America’s role in Vietnam, achieving racial harmony, challenges in the military, leadership principles and America’s role in the world today. His insights into politics and military strategy are particularly relevant to the current situation in Iraq and the lessons in leadership that he presents are of timeless benefit. His descriptions of combat in Vietnam are particularly fascinating.

Gen. Curry on CNN:

http://www.special-guests.com/guests/data/video/Curry Jerry CNN inteview 07-25-08.mov

MAJ. GENERAL JERRY CURRY’S AREAS OF EXPERTISE:
Korea
Vietnam
Military issues
National Security
Racism in politics and the military
The role of America in the world today
Terrorism – the very real threat to America
Leadership in the military and political arenas

SUGGESTED INTERVIEW QUESTIONS FOR MILITARY/POLITICAL EXPERT MAJ. GENERAL JERRY CURRY:

1) How serious is the nuclear threat from North Korea? Same question regarding Iran & Pakistan?

2) What do we know about the new 26-year-old No. Korean dictator, Kim Jong-un?

3) Is it true the North Korean nuclear missiles can reach Alaska, and soon Calif.?

4) Since we haven’t had a serious terror attack on American soil since 2001, just how serious is the terrorist threat to American today? (General Curry has experienced terrorism first hand as a target for assassination during his distinguished military career.)

5) What should we expect from our leadership on Capitol Hill and the White House in protecting America from terrorism?

6) How ready are we to deal with a massive terror attack?

7) How much like Vietnam is the current Afghanistan/Pakistan conflict? Will America ever be able to ‘win’ this current quagmire?

8) What is the role of politicians and what is the role of the military leadership in bringing the Iraq, Afghanistan and Korean wars to a conclusion?

9) What looming threats do we face as a nation?

10) Tell us a little bit about your book, “From Private to General”?

11) How may our listeners get a copy of your book?

12) Is there anything else I missed that you would like to address?

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLES MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

FOX NEWS

Official: N. Korea Fires 2 Short-Range Missiles
Thursday , July 02, 2009

BREAKING NEWS — North Korea test-fired two short-range missiles Thursday, South Korea's Defense Ministry said, a move that aggravates the already high tensions following Pyongyang's recent nuclear test and U.N. sanctions imposed as punishment.

The missiles were fired from the eastern coastal city of Wonsan on Thursday afternoon, a ministry official said on condition of anonymity citing department policy. He did not say what types of missiles were launched, but Yonhap news agency said they were ground-to-ship missiles.

"One was fired at 5:20 p.m. and the other at 6:00 p.m. from Sinsang-ni" near the eastern coastal city of Wonsan, South Korean defense ministry spokesman Won Tae-jae said.

North Korea had earlier issued a no-sail zone in waters off its east coast through July 10 for military drills. That designation has been viewed as a prelude to such missile tests.

The new launches are expected to exacerbate the tensions running high since Pyongyang's May 25 underground nuclear test and a series of missile firings. The U.N. Security Council adopted a tough sanctions resolution last month to punish the communist regime.

"We had expected that they will fire short-range missiles at any time," South Korea's Foreign Minister Yu Myung-hwan told The Associated Press at a reception held at the US ambassador's residence to mark the US Independence Day, which falls this weekend. "It's not a good sign because they are demonstrating their military power."

The United States is seeking Chinese support to enforce the U.N. sanctions. Philip Goldberg, who is in charge of coordinating the implementation of sanctions against the North, was to meet with Chinese officials in Beijing on Thursday, the U.S. Embassy said.

Earlier in the day, Seoul's JoongAng Ilbo newspaper reported that the North could fire a barrage of missiles in coming days, including ballistic Scud or Rodong rockets that the North is banned from testing under U.N. resolutions.

The North has also threatened to test-fire an intercontinental ballistic missile. Last month, a Japanese newspaper reported that the North could test-fire a long-range missile toward Hawaii as early as around July 4. The U.S. has increased defenses around Hawaii.

But Seoul's YTN television news network said Thursday there are no signs of an imminent long-range missile launch.

The reported missile moves came after a North Korean ship — suspected of possibly carrying illicit weapons — changed course and was heading back the way it came after remaining under U.S. surveillance for more than a week.

The North Korean ship is the first vessel monitored under the new U.N. sanctions that seek to clamp down on Pyongyang's trading of banned arms and weapons-related material by requiring U.N. member states to request inspections of ships suspected of carrying prohibited cargo.

The North has said it would consider the interception of its ships a declaration of war.

Separately, North and South Korea ended their latest talks over a troubled joint industrial project, apparently without progress, and failed to set a date for the next round of talks, the Unification Ministry said.

Ministry spokesman Chun Hae-sung told reporters that the two sides met for a little over one hour in the morning in the North Korean border city of Kaesong. He offered no details.

The two sides have been at odds over the fate of a South Korean worker who has been detained in the North since March for allegedly denouncing its political system. The North has rejected Seoul's repeated calls for the worker's freedom. It has also demanded that South Korean companies sharply increase wages for North Korean workers and fees paid for the use of the land.

As relations with South Korea have deteriorated, the North has halted all key joint projects except for the South Korean-run complex at Kaesong, a prominent symbol of past attempts at reconciliation.

The Associated Press contributed to this report.


AN EARLIER ARTICLE THAT ALSO MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

THE DAILY MAIL/ LONDON, June 18, 2009

Japan warns that North Korea may fire missile at U.S. on Independence Day
By Mail Foreign Service

North Korea may launch a long-range ballistic missile towards Hawaii on American Independence Day, according to Japanese intelligence officials.

The missile, believed to be a Taepodong-2 with a range of up to 4,000 miles, would be launched in early July from the Dongchang-ni site on the north-western coast of the secretive country.

Intelligence analysts do not believe the device would be capable of hitting Hawaii's main islands, which are 4,500 miles from North Korea.

Details of the launch came from the Japan's best-selling newspaper, Yomiuri Shimbun.
Both Japanese intelligence and U.S. reconnaissance satellites have collated information pointing to the launch, according to the report.

This is North Korea's Taepodong-2 missile which has a range of 4,000 miles. Intelligence analysts do not believe it would be capable of hitting Hawaii which is 4,500 miles away

It is understood the communist state is likely to fire the missile between July 4 and 8. A launch on July 4 would coincide with Independence Day in the States.It would also be the 15th anniversary of North Korean president Kim Il-Sung's death.

The Japanese newspaper also noted that North Korea had fired its first Taepodong-2 missile on July 4, 2006.

Officials had initially believed that North Korea might attempt to launch a similar device towards either Japan's Okinawa island, Guam or Hawaii.

But the ministry concluded launches toward Okinawa or Guam were 'extremely unlikely' because the first-stage booster could drop into waters off China, agitating Beijing, or hit western Japanese territory.

If the missile were fired in the direction of Hawaii, the booster could drop in the Sea of Japan.

News of the launch would put 'enormous military pressure on the United States,' the Yomiuri said, citing the ministry report.



A spokesman for the Japanese Defense Ministry declined to comment on the report.
South Korea's Defense Ministry and the National Intelligence Service - the country's main spy agency - said they could not confirm it.

Tension on the divided Korean peninsula has risen markedly since the North, led by Kim Jong-il, conducted two nuclear tests this year in defiance of repeated international warnings.

The first rocket, fired in April, was widely seen as a disguised long-range missile test. A second launch came on May 25.

U.S. satellite intelligence has shown that a missile launch pad had been erected at Dongchang-ri on North Korea's north-west coast.

General James Cartwright, vice chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, said it would take at least three to five years for North Korea to pose a real threat to the U.S. west coast.
The UN Security Council last week authorised member states to inspect North Korean sea, air and land cargo, requiring them to seize and destroy goods shipped that violate the sanctions against arms export.

On Saturday, in response to this declaration Pyongyang said it would bolster its nuclear programs and threatened war.

Growing tensions come as arms-watchdog the International Crisis Group (ICG) claimed North Korea has several thousand tonnes of chemical weapons it could mount on missiles.

The report from the non-government organisation said they believed the North's army have about 2,500 to 5,000 tonnes of chemical weapons which include mustard gas, sarin and other deadly nerve agents.

ICG also also warned South Korea may become a target.

'If there is an escalation of conflict and if military hostilities break out, there is a risk that they could be used. In conventional terms, North Korea is weak and they feel they might have to resort to using those,' said Daniel Pinkston, the ICG's representative in Seoul.

The North has been working on chemical weapons for decades and can deliver them through long-range artillery directed on Seoul which is home to about half of South Korea's 49 million people and via missiles that could hit all of the country.

© 2009 Associated Newspapers Ltd

#6: PUBLIC SCHOOLS CUT SUMMER SCHOOL: Sparking Boom in Homeschooling:Facing mounting deficits, a growing number of states have eliminated their Summer School programs.

The result? A boom in homeschooling.

Home education has been growing consistently over the past three decades as more and more parents gotten disgusted with public schools foisting morally obscene sexual and other teachings upon their children, while their academic performance continues in a veritable state of free fall compared to other developing nations like India.

Last year Brevard County Schools in Florida has a robust summer school program with classes in dozens of schools teaching children math and foreign language at no charge to parents. But this year’s Florida budget shortfalls have, as the New York Times writes, has ‘eviscerated or eliminated summer school this year…sending students surfing TV channels at home or loitering at a mall.” (See article below).

The article went on to say: “Thousands of school districts have made cuts. Los Angeles cut $34 million last month by canceling summer school for all elementary and middle school children except the disabled. That left 150,000 students without summer classes, and parents scrambling for child care.”

Conducting Talk Show interviews on this topic are Mike McHugh and Calvin Lindstrom of Christian Liberty Academy, one of the leading institutions in the modern homeschooling movement today. During your interview, your guest (s) will soberly contrast and compare the three education options for families today: 1) public school, 2) private school, 3) home school.


THE HOMESCHOOL EXPANSION:
What’s Behind Its Growing Popularity?

Once perceived as a small, rather obscure clique on the education landscape, home school parents are beginning to see their numbers increase. As a matter of fact, they’ve nearly doubled in less than ten years, according to the federal government.

So what’s behind the growing popularity? And, if this trend continues, how might it affect the future of our workforce and our education system?

Senior staff member of Christian Liberty Academy, Mike McHugh, and Christian Liberty Pastor Calvin Lindstrom, are leaders in the modern home school movement, and they’re available for interviews to discuss this intriguing topic that is becoming more than a blip on the pop culture radar screen.

Their organization, the Christian Liberty Academy, based in Arlington Heights, Illinois, has been active nationally as an advisor, advocate and materials supplier to home school parents since 1972.

McHugh and Lindstrom know and understand why the prospect of homeschooling is resonating with more parents, and they’ve seen firsthand the success that a true “private” institution like homeschooling can yield—including students who have achieved everything from winning national spelling bee contests, to special honors at major colleges.

Your guests can also provide insight regarding parental rights in education, why government education is incompatible with a truly free society, and how homeschooling is changing in the twenty-first century.

ABOUT MIKE MCHUGH…

Michael McHugh has worked in the field of Christian home education for nearly thirty years with the Christian Liberty Academy home school program based in Arlington Heights, Illinois.

During his time on staff, Mr. McHugh has written several textbooks, as well as articles that seek to encourage families who are home schooling.

Over the years, Mike has also had the honor to speak frequently before home school groups throughout the U.S. and abroad.

As a home school father, Mike lives in the Chicago area with his wife and seven children. His family began its home school journey in 1988.


ABOUT PASTOR CALVIN LINDSTROM…

Calvin Lindstrom has been on staff with the Church of Christian Liberty and Academy, located in Arlington Heights, IL, for over ten years. During this period of time, Mr. Lindstrom has served as a teacher and guidance counselor.

As an ordained minister and graduate of the University of Illinois, Calvin has recently taken on a new calling as pastor of the Church of Christian Liberty.

One of Pastor Calvin’s chief passions is to encourage parents to provide their children with a comprehensive Christian education.

Rev. Lindstrom lives in the Chicago area with his wife and young son. Both Calvin and his wife attended Christian schools, or were home schooled, prior to college.

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

THE NEW YORK TIMES/ July 2, 2009

Facing Deficits, Some States Cut Summer School
By SAM DILLON

COCOA, Fla. — A year ago, the Brevard County Schools ran a robust summer program here, with dozens of schools bustling with teachers and some 14,000 children practicing multiplication, reading Harry Potter and studying Spanish verbs, all at no cost to parents.

But this year Florida’s budget crisis has gutted summer school. Brevard classrooms are shuttered, and students like 11-year-old Uvenka Jean-Baptiste, whose mother works in a nursing home, are spending their summer days at home, surfing television channels or loitering at a mall.

Nearly every school system in Florida has eviscerated or eliminated summer school this year, and officials are reporting sweeping cuts in states from North Carolina and Delaware to California and Washington. The cuts have come as states across the country are struggling to approve budgets, and California’s governor, Arnold Schwarzenegger, declared a fiscal state of emergency on Wednesday.

“We’re seeing a disturbing trend of districts making huge cuts to summer school; they’re just devastating these programs,” said Ron Fairchild, executive director of the National Center for Summer Learning at Johns Hopkins University. “It’s having a disproportionate impact on low-income families.”

The federal stimulus law is channeling $100 billion to public education, and Education Secretary Arne Duncan has repeatedly urged states and districts to spend part of the money to keep schools open this summer.

But thousands of districts have ignored Mr. Duncan’s urgings. In Florida and California, for example, government revenues have fallen so precipitously that, even after receiving federal stimulus dollars, local officials have been forced to make deep cuts to school budgets. Officials in many other states, considering summer school a frill, despite research showing it can narrow the achievement gap between poor and affluent children, have spent their stimulus money elsewhere.

An Education Department spokeswoman, Sandra Abrevaya, said the agency did not yet know how many of the nation’s 15,000 school districts had cut summer school this year.

Large districts still offering robust summer programs include Boston, Buffalo, Chicago, Detroit, Minneapolis and Seattle, according to the Council of the Great City Schools, which represents large districts.

New York City has made modest cuts to its summer program, which last year served 120,000 children, said William Havemann, a spokesman for the city’s Department of Education. This year, classes will be offered in 369 schools, down from 562 in 2008, Mr. Havemann said, and the city expects fewer children to enroll, too, although all children who need extra work for promotion to their next grade are eligible.

Some systems have spent federal stimulus money to invigorate summer school. These include Montgomery County, Md., and Cincinnati, where officials have used $1.5 million of the city’s stimulus dollars to offer full-day summer school at its 13 lowest-performing elementary schools, nearly doubling enrollment to 1,700 students.

Mornings are devoted to math and reading, and afternoons to camp-like activities including environmental science and gardening, ballroom dancing and yoga, said Janet Walsh, a Cincinnati schools spokeswoman. Twelve other Cincinnati schools are offering half-day summer programs, Ms. Walsh said.

But thousands of districts have made cuts. In Los Angeles, where school officials are still working to remove hundreds of millions of dollars from a $5.5 billion annual budget, they cut $34 million last month by canceling summer school for all elementary and middle school children except the disabled. That left 150,000 students without summer classes, and parents scrambling for child care.

Hundreds of other California districts, including San Diego, Long Beach and Sacramento, have also trimmed or eliminated summer school. An online survey in late April by the California State PTA found that about 40 percent of responding school districts had reduced summer programs and about 20 percent had eliminated them entirely.

The North Carolina School Boards Association did a similar survey of the state’s 115 districts. Three-quarters of those that responded said they would eliminate summer school or reduce its scope, said Leanne Winner, a director at the association. “Things have gotten worse since we did the survey,” Ms. Winner said.

Wayne Blanton, executive director of the Florida School Boards Association, said, “Nearly all districts in Florida have cut summer school down, and about half have eliminated it altogether.”

In Rutherford County, Tenn., school authorities cited not only money troubles but also swine flu in explaining why they cut elementary summer school after the district lost some state financing.

All the cuts nationwide have put into jeopardy an institution that has turned summertimes past into nostalgic memories for millions of Americans.

“I remember as a child growing up, summer school was enriching and fun,” said Tamara Sortman of Sacramento, where cuts have left her three children with no summer school option. “I took guitar one summer, creative writing another. I remember an arts class where we did tie-dying. I had a single working mom, and summer school kept me out of trouble.”

Kenneth Gold, an education professor at the College of Staten Island who wrote a history of summer learning, said that in the 19th century, many American schools offered their regular classes in summer and winter, with recesses scheduled for spring and fall to allow planting and harvesting. By 1910, however, that cycle had been largely displaced by the September-to-June, 180-day calendar common today, in which summer school is an optional addendum.

Since the 1970s, however, the value of rigorous summer school has gained increasing recognition because of research by a Johns Hopkins professor, Karl Alexander, and other sociologists showing that the academic achievement gap widens during summer vacations.

Low-income students who hold summer jobs or are idle, the research has demonstrated, forget more math and reading skills over the summer than their affluent classmates, who often receive intellectual stimulation in the summer from canoe trips, language camps or ballet lessons.

Richard DiPatri, schools superintendent here in Brevard County, leaned on those findings in recent years as he made free summer school classes available to all students, both for remedial work and for languages and other electives.

“We built it up, but last year here in Florida, our funding just went over the cliff,” Mr. DiPatri said.

Adrimel Marlasca, 12, who just finished sixth grade, said that in previous years, she had enjoyed summer classes at Discovery Elementary in Palm Bay, Fla.. But this summer, she is marooned at home.

The other day, Adrimel was up at midmorning, ate some cereal, then watched a show on the Disney channel. She played with her pet cockatiel and her dog, Princess, ate lunch and watched some more television. Later, she went shopping with her mother, picked up her room and read a mystery book for 45 minutes.

After dinner, her mother used flashcards to drill her in multiplication for a few minutes.

“I like the math because it’s challenging, but sometimes it’s like, ‘Oh my gosh, I can’t answer this,’ and you get nerve-racked,” Adrimel said.

“We’re working with her at home, but its not the same,” said her father, Jose Marlasca. “She ends up watching TV. The best scenario would be to have her at school.”

Copyright 2009 The New York Times Company

#7: NEW GALLUP POLL: AMERICANS SAY DEMOCRAT PARTY IS “TOO LIBERAL” (Scott Wheeler and Peter Lietner reside in Eastern Time.):A new Gallup Poll concluded that there is a statistically significant increase since last year in the percentage of Americans who describe the Democrat Party's views as being "too liberal," from 39% to 46%. This is the largest percentage saying so since November 1994, after the party's losses in that year's midterm elections.

Wow, you think? With Mr. Change-agent Obama and Ms. Extremely Unpopular Pelosi at the helm, it’s no wonder Independent voters are shifting their opinions so quickly. Available to be your interview guest on these new findings and trends is Scott Wheeler, executive director of the National Republican Trust, the third largest conservative political PAC in the US, just behind the NRA. Peter Lietner of National Republican Trust is also available as a guest.

GALLUP POLL RESULTS:

According to the Gallup Organization: “Most major demographic and attitudinal subgroups show at least a slight uptick since 2008 in perceptions that the Democratic Party is too liberal. The increasing perception of the Democrats as too far left comes as President Obama and the Democrats in Congress have expanded the government's role in the economy to address the economic problems facing the country. Additionally, the government is working toward major healthcare reform legislation and strengthening environmental regulations.”

ABOUT SCOTT WHEELER…

Scott Wheeler is a former television producer and investigative journalist. As a writer he has focused on domestic and international security issues. Mr. Wheeler has produced seventeen television documentaries and consulted on more than a dozen others. For the past eight years Mr. Wheeler has been on the forefront of the most crucial issues facing national security - from the war zones in Yugoslavia, to the drug fields of South America and following the trails of international arms smugglers to Canada, Europe and the Middle East. Mr. Wheeler is a veteran of the U.S. Army infantry.

#8: CONSUMER CONFIDENCE DROPS UNEXPECTEDLY: New Report Shows Surprise Slide in June (Craig Smith and David Bradshaw resides in Pacific Time; Craig available for 30,000 cume or higher. David available for all size interviews..):U.S. consumer confidence took an unexpectedly steep slide in June according to figures just released by the Conference Board’s consumer confidence index, falling from 54.8 in May to 49.3 in June). Economists polled by Reuters had expected a healthier reading of 55.0 for the month. Instead, the report concluded that Americans felt gloomier about their current situation and less optimistic about what the coming months might bring.

Billionaire investor George Soros added to the gloom, saying at a breakfast hosted by the Wall Street Journal, "As markets revive, fear of inflation will drive up interest rates, which will choke off recovery," a breakfast hosted by the Wall Street Journal.” According to Reuters (see article below), Kevin Kruszenski, head of listed trading at Keybanc Capital Markets in Cleveland, said the confidence data "kind of took the wind out of things a little bit."

Available as your Talk Show interview guest is Swiss America CEO Craig Smith who explains that even during down markets, not everything goes down. During your interview, Craig gives a reality check to your audience, listing and comparing the actual performance of just about every sort of investment ranging from real estate to stocks, bonds, and precious metals, showing that it is possible to not just survive but also to thrive even during tough economic times. He also gives suggestions for economic and political policies to be implemented to turn around the economy.

ABOUT CRAIG SMITH…

Craig R. Smith is the Chairman and founder of www.OilSolution.org and author of Black Gold Stranglehold, the book written in 2005 that predicted today’s high oil prices. As an oil and economic analyst, Craig instantly engages audiences with his common-sense perspective on national and global economic trends. Over the past two decades he has been interviewed on over 1,500 radio and TV programs including: FOX News, CNN, CNBC, ABC, NBC, CBS, PBS, CBN, TBN, Time, The Wall Street Journal, The New York Times, and Newsweek.

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

REUTERS

Gloomy U.S. consumers clip housing recovery hopes

June 30, 2009
By Emily Kaiser

WASHINGTON (Reuters) - U.S. consumer confidence took an unexpectedly steep slide in June, figures released on Tuesday showed, suggesting the 18-month-long recession had yet to loosen its grip on the economy.

A separate report on April house prices in major cities offered some encouraging signs that the worst of the housing slump may be over, but that was not enough to lift investors' spirits. Another crop of economic data showed business activity in New York City and the Midwest remained weak, while retail chains slogged through a rough June.

Billionaire investor George Soros added to the cautionary tone, saying that rising borrowing costs posed a threat to any eventual economic recovery.

"As markets revive, fear of inflation will drive up interest rates, which will choke off recovery," he said at a breakfast hosted by the Wall Street Journal.

Major stock market indexes fell after the Conference Board's consumer confidence index showed households felt gloomier about their current situation and less optimistic about what the coming months might bring.

Kevin Kruszenski, head of listed trading at Keybanc Capital Markets in Cleveland, said the confidence data "kind of took the wind out of things a little bit."

Investors had been in a somewhat better mood since an early March trough as economic data suggested the pace of the recession was slackening. But with no clear sign that growth is about to resume, sentiment has begun to fade in recent weeks.

The consumer confidence index fell to 49.3 in June from 54.8 in May. Economists polled by Reuters had expected a healthier reading of 55.0 for the month.

Standard & Poor's/Case Shiller home price indexes showed prices of single-family homes declined in April from the prior month, but the pace of the slide moderated.

The 20-city price index dipped 0.6 percent from the previous month, which was far less dire than the 1.8 percent decline that economists polled by Reuters had predicted.

There were a few more glimmers of hope as 13 of the 20 metropolitan areas tracked showed some improvement. The laggards included Las Vegas, Phoenix and Miami, which were among the cities that saw the biggest run-up in house prices in the middle part of this decade.

"While one month's data cannot determine if a turnaround has begun, it seems that some stabilization may be appearing in some of the regions," said David Blitzer, chairman of the index committee at S&P. "We are entering the seasonally strong period in the housing market, so it will take some time to determine if a recovery is really here."

Bill Schultz, chief investment officer at McQueen, Ball & Associates in Bethlehem, Pennsylvania, said less-bad news was certainly a relief to investors, but noted their patience may soon start to wear thin.

"To get the markets moving to the next level you're going to have to see prices stop falling and begin to rise here at some point in the not-so-distant future," he said.

MANUFACTURING, RETAIL STRUGGLE

In New York, the National Association of Purchasing Management-New York's monthly measure of business activity showed conditions worsened in June, although the purchasing and supply managers surveyed felt a bit better about the six-month outlook.

The index of current business conditions tumbled to 44.8 in June from 61.3 in May, while the six-month outlook index rose to 58.3 from 56.1 a month earlier.

A similar report on activity in the U.S. Midwest in June showed some improvement from May, but still pointed to a weak economy.

Readings on the health of retailers were mixed. A report from the International Council of Shopping Centers and Goldman Sachs showed that chain store sales rose modestly last week from a year earlier, but a separate report from Redbook Research showed a sharp decline.

Still, both groups expected a weak monthly performance from the major retail chains as consumers cut spending.

Analysts have had an even tougher time than usual trying to track retail sales because Wal-Mart Stores Inc (NYSE:WMT - News), the nation's biggest retailer, has stopped providing a monthly report on its sales.

(Additional reporting by Lynn Adler, Chris Reese and Mary Angela Rowe in New York; Editing by Dan Grebler)

(C) 2009 Reuters

-----------------

The Conference Board Consumer Confidence Index™ Retreats
June 30, 2009

The Conference Board Consumer Confidence Index™, which had improved considerably in May, retreated in June. The Index now stands at 49.3 (1985=100), down from 54.8 in May. The Present Situation Index decreased to 24.8 from 29.7. The Expectations Index declined to 65.5 from 71.5 in May.

The Consumer Confidence SurveyTM is based on a representative sample of 5,000 U.S. households. The monthly survey is conducted for The Conference Board by TNS. TNS is the world’s largest custom research company. The cutoff date for June’s preliminary results was June 23rd.

Says Lynn Franco, Director of The Conference Board Consumer Research Center: "After back-to-back months of strong gains, Consumer Confidence retreated in June. The decline in the Present Situation Index, caused by a less favorable assessment of business conditions and employment, continues to imply that economic conditions, while not as weak as earlier this year, are nonetheless weak. Looking ahead, Expectations continue to suggest less negative conditions in the months ahead, as opposed to strong growth."
Consumers' appraisal of present-day conditions was less favorable in June. Those claiming business conditions are "good" decreased to 8.0 percent from 8.8 percent, while those saying conditions are "bad" increased to 45.6 percent from 44.5 percent. Consumers’ assessment of the labor market was also less favorable. Those stating jobs are "hard to get" increased to 44.8 percent from 43.9 percent. Those saying jobs are "plentiful" decreased to 4.5 percent from 5.8 percent.

Consumers' short-term outlook also waned in June. Consumers anticipating an improvement in business conditions over the next six months decreased to 21.2 percent from 22.5 percent, while those expecting conditions will worsen increased to 20.2 percent from 18.0 percent in May.

The job outlook was also more pessimistic. Those anticipating more jobs in the months ahead decreased to 17.4 percent from 19.3 percent, while those anticipating fewer jobs increased to 27.3 percent from 25.6 percent. The proportion of consumers expecting an increase in their incomes declined to 9.8 percent from 10.8 percent.

The next release is scheduled for Tuesday, July 28, at 10:00 AM ET.

©2009 The Conference Board Inc.

#9: NO JOKE: AL FRANKEN WINS! MN Sup. Ct. Rules Senate Seat to the Comedian (Scott Wheeler and Peter Lietner reside in DC in Eastern Time.):Why is this comedian smiling? Actually, it’s no joke: It’s U. S. Senator Al Franken!

At least that's according to the Minnesota Supreme Court that just declared the comedian the winner in the longstanding dispute with former Senator Norm Coleman.

Discussing the new balance of the U. S. Senate is Scott Wheeler, executive director of the National Republican Trust, the third largest conservative political PAC in the US, just behind the NRA.

During your interview, Scott touches briefly on the 32-page unanimous decision by the state’s highest court, but then focuses on his plan on how conservatives can and must quickly reverse the momentum of the rogue liberal change agents currently holding the U. S. government hostage.

Wheeler’s strategy involves strategically breaking the ’60 vote lock’ the Democrats will have once Minnesota Governor Tim Pawlenty certifies the ballot. Without breaking up that voting bloc, it is a filibuster-proof super majority set on serious mischief.

ABOUT SCOTT WHEELER…

Scott Wheeler is a former television producer and investigative journalist. As a writer he has focused on domestic and international security issues. Mr. Wheeler has produced seventeen television documentaries and consulted on more than a dozen others. For the past eight years Mr. Wheeler has been on the forefront of the most crucial issues facing national security - from the war zones in Yugoslavia, to the drug fields of South America and following the trails of international arms smugglers to Canada, Europe and the Middle East. Mr. Wheeler is a veteran of the U.S. Army infantry.

Peter Lietner of National Republican Trust is also available as a guest.

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

THE NEW YORK TIMES/ June 30, 2009, 2:27 pm
THE CAUCUS
The Politics and Government Blog of The Times

Court Rules Franken Has Won Senate Seat
By Kate Phillips

The Minnesota Supreme Court has just issued its long-awaited judgment in the Senate race, declaring that Democrat Al Franken is the winner.

The 32-page unanimous decision by the state’s highest court was released after a seven-months long battle over the seat formerly held by Norm Coleman. On every ground, the judicial panel rejected Mr. Coleman’s claims of trial errors or constitutional violations, and decided that Mr. Franken’s election should be certified by the state as valid.

Gov. Tim Pawlenty had indicated as late as Monday that he was willing to certify Mr. Franken as the winner once the state’s highest court decided the recount and Mr. Coleman’s battle. On CNN on Sunday, Mr. Pawlenty said: “I’m prepared to sign it as soon as they give the green light.”

Asked what he would do if Mr. Coleman decided to appeal to the federal courts, as had been mentioned before this ruling, Mr. Pawlenty added: “A federal court could stay or put a limit on or stop the effect of the state court ruling. If they chose, if they do that, I would certainly follow their direction. But if that doesn’t happen promptly or drags out for any period of time, then we need to move ahead with signing this, particularly if I’m ordered to do that by the state court.”

Some legal experts already are pointing out that the Minnesota Supreme Court did not issue a directive ordering Governor Pawlenty to sign the certificate. And there is, according to legal experts, a rehearing period of 10 days, under the Minnesota judges’ ruling.

If Mr. Coleman concedes, Mr. Franken will become the Democrats’ much coveted 60th vote. That is the number required to avert filibusters, and with both Senators Edward M. Kennedy and Robert C. Byrd absent due to illness, the Democrats have sometimes scrambled to make sure they had lined up enough votes.

Spokesmen for both Mr. Coleman and Mr. Franken issued statements announcing news conferences later this afternoon.

In reaction, Senator Bob Menendez, the chairman of the National Democratic Senatorial Committee, said this in his statement:

“As we’ve seen over the past 238 days, no matter how many times Norm Coleman goes to court, the result of the election never changes: Al Franken earned more votes than Norm Coleman. Al Franken was elected to the Senate and he ought to be able to get to work for the people of Minnesota. We’ve always said that Norm Coleman deserved his day in court, and he got eight months. Now we expect Governor Pawlenty to do the right thing, follow the law, and sign the election certificate. From health care to the Supreme Court to getting our economy moving again, the challenges facing us are complex and we need Al Franken in the Senate. In this historic and urgent moment in our history, Minnesotans have gone long enough without full representation. Al Franken will be an critical voice on the issues before us and it’s time to let him get to work.”

Just this morning, MSNBC’s First Read listed several factoids that have accumulated during this fight:

$51.1 million has been raised between Coleman and Franken for the entire campaign
– $50.3 million has been spent between the two candidates
– $11 million (at least) has been spent on the recount
– 2,424,946 votes were cast
– 312 votes separate the candidates (Franken leads)
– 239 days since Election Day 2008
– 34 weeks since Election Day 2008
– 7 months, 27 days since Election Day 2008
– 4 seasons seen since Election Day 2008 election.

©2009 The New York Times Company

#10: MADOFF GETS 150 YEARS IN PRISON: But have we learned anything? (David Armstrong resides in Eastern Time with limited availability.):Bernard Madoff has just been given 150 years in prison for the biggest Ponsi scheme in history. But have we learned anything?

In the old days an epic swindle like this might have been the work of Al Capone or some other underworld kingpin, but this historic rip-off was conceived and executed none other than the former chairman of the Nasdaq stock exchange!

According to The Washington Times (see article below), Madoff’ luxurious lifestyle included three homes, each worth $7 million or more, yet when it came to tipping, he’d leave a token $15 tip on a $250 sushi bill!

During sentencing after testimony was given from victims ranging from high profile figures like Steven Spielberg to many ordinary people, Maddoff simply said to Judge Chin, “I don’t ask for forgiveness.”

Available to be your Talk Show guest on the topic of Maddoff’s sentencing and the need for America to shun greed and embrace the old-fashioned ethic of honesty and hard work, is David Armstrong, CEO of Armstrong International, a multi-national corporation that runs on one simple principle: The Golden Rule.

David challenges your audience with the question: “Can you be successful at running your personal life, business or even running a country without losing your soul?” In his new book, Hanging by a Thread, David shares real life examples of people and companies that are successful by simply following “The Golden Rule” of: “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.”

Does David’s philosophy work? Yes! Armstrong International is currently enjoying record sales and profits, even during this depressed economy, by practicing what he preaches about applying the golden rule in decision making within his company.

ABOUT DAVID ARMSTRONG…

David M. Armstrong heads up Armstrong International, a family company that is over one century old. But more than that, he is a storyteller.

Mr. Armstrong has evolved corporate storytelling into a whole new style of management—a style praised by Tom Peters as the leadership answer for tormented managers who need their people to champion initiative.

David Armstrong’s stock in trade is anecdotes—stories about urgency, bravery, wisdom, core values, change management, innovation and having fun in the workplace. Where does he find stories? In the same places he suggests you look for yours—in the eyes and on the faces of the customers, partners and employees who come through your doors every day.

“Every company has a rich heritage of stories,” says David. “I’m just putting my company’s treasure to work.” While it may be true that every company has stories, not every CEO has the vision to search them out and retell them with powerful and memorable morals. That’s what this site is all about—helping you to dig into, discover and use the stories that surround you.

Today Armstrong International is a safe haven in a business world grown confusing and complex. Doing business with Armstrong International is refreshingly simple and pleasant. In fact, today’s dream has become the vision of business as a series of enjoyable experiences.


ABOUT HANGING BY A THREAD

Can you be successful at business or even running a country without losing your soul? David Armstrong thinks you can! In his new book, Hanging By A Thread, David shares real life examples of people and companies that are successful by simply following “The Golden Rule” of: “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.”

In Hanging By A Thread, you will learn about Armstrong International, which is a successful, profitable company that follows the golden rule in all of its decisions for over a century, and in the process, is flourishing in an otherwise turbulent economy.


FOREWORD TO ARMSTRONG’S BOOK BY PAT WILLIAMS:

In a world that is laden with headlines citing various business executives for unethical behavior, David Armstrong has chosen to take a vastly different path when it comes to integrity – heading up a global corporate culture that is defined by following the Golden Rule.

In fact, the company motto at Armstrong International is simply put into this historical phrase – “Do unto others as you have them do unto you.”

In this powerful book, you will learn how David Armstrong has led a successful company through his many key examples that smack of integrity -- through his every-day ethical leadership style that includes the telling of vital stories which showcase the very premise of what his company stands for.

David Armstrong directs a corporate culture that is indeed unique. How about company core values that place faith in God first; family, second; and your job last? Yes, believe it or not, this is promoted and posted virtually everywhere within the organization.

This is what makes David Armstrong and the company that he leads so unique. It’s not your typical company and David Armstrong is no typical CEO – particularly, when so many corporate scandals fill the headlines today. It’s all quite refreshing to see.

In some of my previous writings, I have cited that “Integrity is King.” How true that phrase is and most fitting as it relates to David Armstrong. A person of integrity is honest and upright. His soul is not divided or compartmentalized. As the Bible tells us, “He who walks with integrity walks securely, but he who perverts his ways will become known” (Prov. 10:9, NKJV).

This book is all about integrity in the workplace and how David Armstrong exemplifies this as a leader. Armstrong does not abandon his values or principles under pressure.

Times of adversity and temptation are precisely when values and principles matter most. David Armstrong keeps his promises and fulfills his obligations. And, it’s also safe to say that Armstrong is a man who maintains his honor even when it is costly to do so.

So, if you wish to learn more about how to be a successful leader without selling your soul to do so, read on … and, be prepared to gain a very valuable lesson in just how to lead a successful company through the eyes of David Armstrong.


The following article may be helpful with show prep:

THE WASHINGTON TIMES/ June 30, 2009

Madoff sentenced to term of 150 years
David M. Dickson and Betsy Pisik

NEW YORK | With Bernard Madoff under sentence to spend what likely will be the rest of his life in prison for perpetrating the largest Wall Street Ponzi scheme in history, the focus shifts to his victims' efforts to salvage whatever they can from the wreckage of the criminal enterprise.

Madoff, the 71-year-old former Nasdaq chairman, was sentenced Monday to 150 years in federal prison.

Of the many victims who flocked to the courthouse one, Judith Willing, dressed for her day in court in a gauzy white blouse and matching straw hat, told reporters that she and her husband had lost $2.5 million, "a huge amount to us."

She said they had used the money for charity, helping grandchildren through school and "the usual things."

After U.S. District Judge Denny Chin imposed the sentence, the courtroom erupted in applause.

Madoff's $65 billion fraudulent scheme wiped out the assets of thousands of investors around the world.

Madoff sat quietly in the ornate federal courtroom, and he barely reacted to his punishment.

He also sat impassively as nine court-selected victims read out bitter statements about their evaporated retirement accounts and slashed philanthropy budgets.

"Life has been a living hell," said Carla Hirshhorn. "It feels like the nightmare we can't wake from."

Madoff "discarded me like roadkill," Miriam Siegman told the court, adding that she is digging through trash bins and using food stamps.

His victims included movie mogul Steven Spielberg, many Palm Beach, Fla., millionaires and countless numbers of small investors whose lifetime retirement savings were funneled into his operations through so-called "feeder funds."

Irving Picard, the court-appointed lawyer who is untangling Madoff's businesses, told the court Monday that Madoff hasn't provided "any meaningful cooperation" since he was arrested.

"I don't ask for any forgiveness," Madoff told Judge Chin before sentencing.

"Here the message must be sent that Mr. Madoff's crimes were extraordinarily evil," Judge Chin said before imposing the sentence. The judge cited the "staggering toll" of Madoff's crimes.

Prosecutors had requested the maximum 150-year prison term suggested by federal guidelines. Madoff's attorney, Ira Sorkin, had sought a term of 12 years.

Madoff pleaded guilty in March to 11 criminal counts, including securities fraud, investment adviser fraud, multiple counts of money laundering, wire fraud, false filings and false statements. He has been held in a federal prison since his guilty plea.

Just weeks before Madoff admitted the massive fraud late last year, his customers were told they had as much as $65 billion in their collective investment accounts. In fact, the government has said, those accounts "held only a small fraction of that balance."

To date, only a small portion of that money has been recovered. Insurance will cover some of the losses. However, the Securities Investor Protection Corp., a government-chartered, brokerage-financed insurance agency, provides only $500,000 in maximum, upfront compensation to eligible victims.

Mr. Picard, the trustee, is seeking to "claw back" more than $10 billion from investors who withdrew large amounts of money in recent years. Some investors have already sued over the methodology that Mr. Picard plans to use to compensate victims. Experts expect the litigation and recovery battles to last more than a decade and perhaps as long as the scheme itself.

So far, prosecutors have said they have identified more than 1,300 investors who have lost more than $13 billion since 1995 from Madoff's Ponzi scheme. That total doesn't include the feeder accounts. The total losses are expected to rise significantly. So far, only $1.2 billion has been recovered.

For years, Madoff had the reputation of a money manager with the Midas touch. Regardless of the performance of the economy or the stock market, his clients could count on double-digit annual returns.

The investigators looking into Madoff's operations say the scheme dates at least to the early 1980s. In March, Madoff said the scheme began during the 1990s.

Since at least 1995, Madoff never made any of the investments he claimed, investigators said. Instead, in a classic Ponzi operation, Madoff acknowledged using the inflow from longtime customers and new investors to finance the withdrawals of others.

Countless millions of dollars were used to finance Madoff's luxurious lifestyle, which included an $7.5 million estate in Palm Beach, a $7.5 million Manhattan apartment, a $7 million home in Montauk, N.Y., a $2.2 million boat and $1 million memberships at high-end country clubs. Madoff's $100,000-plus American Express statement for January 2008, less than a year before his scheme imploded, included $2,879 in charges at a Mexican restaurant, $8,400 for a single night at a Santa Monica hotel and $441 at a gourmet bagel shop. Madoff spent more than $250 at sushi bar and left a $15 tip.

On Friday, Madoff's wife, Ruth, agreed to a settlement with the Justice Department. She will relinquish all assets jointly held with her husband. She will be left with $2.5 million.

Madoff told the court he lives "in a tormented state now, knowing all the pain and suffering I've created." The U.S. Bureau of Prisons will now decide where Madoff will live - apparently, for the rest of his life.

©2009 The Washington Times LLC

#11: NERVOUS ENERGY: House Passes Controversial Cap & Trade Bill :Brace for impact, America. The U.S. House of Representatives just passed the highly controversial energy bill that features the liberals’ green Goliath Cap & Trade policy. Now, it moves on to the Senate with the potential to affect virtually every business and household across the country in dramatic ways.

So, should folks in your audience be contacting their Senators to put a stop to this bill? And if so, what exactly should they be raging about?

Special Guests brings you a panel of experts—similar in their opposition to the House vote, but diverse in their vantage points—who can clear the air and offer informed arguments about the negative impact Cap & Trade legislation will have on everyone.

Bob Rinear, founder of InvestYourself and publisher of the Financial Intelligence Report, brings a sharp economist’s view—one that sees this pie-in-the-sky attempt to reduce U.S. dependence on foreign oil and shift the culture toward more renewable energy through the imposition of taxes on utilities and corporations, as a colossal mistake.

On your show, he can explain precisely how this idealistic plan will realistically undercut our recovering economy, as the rapidly escalating cost of doing business will fall on the backs of working families.

And what about renewable energy? John Spisak, President of SolaRover, is a forerunner in the industry. From his perspective, he has no doubt that Cap & Trade will all but extinguish the hope for mainstream renewable resources.

As a guest on your show, John can provide unrivaled insight on just how this new bill is likely to make development projects in wind, solar and other alternative energies even more expensive and more unattainable for the American business owner and consumer.

Finally, Rob Roselli is a civil engineer with an environmental studies concentration, who can offer a hard look at the science behind the policy. When critics of this bill and its controversial Cap & Trade plan call it a flawed concept, Roselli’s indictment of the “global warming,” now “climate change,” fear machine leads even harsher critics to call it nothing more than a tax scam designed to fund more liberal programs without raising income taxes.

Each of these gentlemen is available for interviews individually, or together as a dynamic group. Call Special Guests today to schedule an interview right now, while this topic is heating up again in Washington and across the nation.

ABOUT ROBERT (BOB) RINEAR:

InvestYourself was founded in October 1997 by Robert Rinear (reh-NEAR), who owned several successful business ventures primarily in the jewelry industry. In fact, his introduction to the financial world began as the result of his experience timing the price of tangible assets, including gemstones, gold and silver, all on a daily basis—a talent critically needed to be successful in the jewelry industry.

As Bob Rinear saw the price of gold soaring in the late 1980s, he needed to find the causes of that move. What he found was intriguing. Political issues, global economics and even something as simple as the industrial output in Japan would move the price of tangible assets. He needed to learn more.

As he became more “in tune” with the global economic process, he noticed that one of his best customers traded stocks and options on a daily basis. With Mr. Rinear’s views on the overall economic situation and “Charley’s” ability in picking stocks, they found a winning combination. But it still wasn't complete.

Once introduced to the intricacies of the equity markets, it didn’t take Mr. Rinear long to realize that he had a knack for predicting the everyday flows of the stock and options markets. He began to attend trading seminars and training camps with the desire to learn how to make profitable trades on a daily basis.

One thing became abundantly clear—none of the classes gave him the total picture about how to accomplish his goal. Something was still missing in regards to how to make a living by trading stocks and options. Likewise, he realized that not all opportunities came in just stocks and options. Sometimes it was a quick move in precious metals or Treasury bonds. Other times it may have been a move in a currency.

Not to be defeated, Mr. Rinear slowly developed his own trading style that began to produce profits. After taking what he learned from the seminars and injecting his own methods of calculating stock movements, options movements, currency, real estate and Treasury movements, a successful concept emerged. He expanded this trading concept into a workable platform that anyone could follow. That was the beginning of his newsletter “Market Insight & Outlook” (now the Financial Intelligence Report). From those first few issues it became clear that the public would benefit from his years of research. He decided to offer it to the masses.

From that humble beginning a company called “InvestYourself” was created. Its main goal is to help investors of every experience level gain the investing knowledge necessary to win in a tough game that includes enabling investors to grow in their knowledge of real estate, stocks, bonds and finances in general.

ABOUT JOHN F. SPISAK:

John Spisak is President of SolaRover, a leading mobile solar power generation firm, and a resident of Lone Tree, Colorado. Mr. Spisak, 58, a science graduate of Purdue University has broad international business experience in the natural resources, new technologies and environmental industries.

Spisak has extensive experience in the national environmental policy arena having co-chaired a national organization for the reform of the Superfund Law working closely with both houses of Congress; discussing critical reform issues with former EPA Head Carol Browner; and having been invited to testify numerous times before various Senate and House Committees in the 1990’s.

Mr. Spisak served as one of only 13 CEOs on the United States Senate’s Western States Coalition for the reform of the US Superfund Law. In 36 years he has managed an international natural resources company, founded and ran a full-service environmental engineering and remediation company for the Southern Pacific Railroad and chaired a multi-company venture to design one of the largest US integrated waste disposal sites.

Spisak helped develop clean air technology that would capture and recycle volatile organic hydrocarbons.

Over his career, he has been an invited speaker and lecturer on governmental issues related to the environment and was one of the founding directors of the National Association of Environmental Management (NAEM). He holds a patent and has authored several environmental technology articles and was co-editor of a book on mineral industry alternative environmental technologies.

ABOUT ROB ROSELLI:

Rob earned a BS in Civil Engineering from Vanderbilt University, and an MS in Civil Engineering from New Jersey Institute of Technology. Rob is currently licensed as a professional engineer in three states and employed in the State of New York. As a writer and speaker, Rob is on a mission to apply light to darkness in its many forms.

#12: PRO-GUNNERS OPPOSE SOTOMAYER (Larry Pratt resides in Eastern Time.):Pro-Gun activists opposes the confirmation of Sonia Sotomayer to the U. S. Supreme Court.

Both the past President of the National Rifle Association (NRA) and the current Executive Director of Gun Owners of America (GOA), Larry Pratt, are calling upon Second Amendment activists to fight the Sotomayer nomination now, rather than take a ‘wait and see’ approach, as being espoused by the current leadership of the NRA.

Your Talk Show interview guest, Larry Pratt, Executive Director of Gun Owners of America, is not at all anti-Hispanic. He speaks fluent Spanish and is married to a Hispanic woman but he is adamantly against Sotomayer to being seated as the next U. S. Supreme Court Justice.

Said Pratt in a show of pro-gun unity, “Gun Owners of America applauds immediate past NRA President Sandy Froman, who stepped up to the plate last week with a call to arms for all NRA members to vigorously oppose the nomination of Judge Sotomayor to the Supreme Court. GOA has also been calling on our members to oppose this nomination since it is clear that Sotomayor is anti-Second Amendment and wants to legislate from the bench.”

Pratt contends that current NRA leadership is taking a dangerous "wait and see" approach to the Sotomayor nomination which may well allow her to wiggle through the confirmation process.

During your interview, Larry shares how Judge Sonia Sotomayor has a narrow view of the Second Amendment that contradicts the Court's landmark decision in District of Columbia v. Heller, and has twice stated that the Second Amendment is not a fundamental right, clearly an extreme anti-gun philosophy.

Pratt warned, “Last year, the Supreme Court held in Heller that the Second Amendment guarantees the right of individual Americans to keep and bear firearms. But that ruling was a fiercely-contested, 5-4 split decision. Justice Kennedy joined the four conservatives on the Court to make the majority, with the four liberal justices writing passionate dissents about how the Second Amendment does not apply to private citizens. Bluntly speaking, the Second Amendment survived by a single vote. Had one justice voted differently, the Second Amendment would have been erased from the Bill of Rights forever. Today in the Supreme Court, the right to bear arms hangs by a single vote.”

ABOUT YOUR EXPERT GUEST, LARRY PRATT…

Larry Pratt has been Executive Director of Gun Owners of America for 30 years. GOA is a national membership organization of 300,000 Americans dedicated to promoting their second amendment freedom to keep and bear arms.

GOA lobbies for the pro-gun position in Washington and is involved in firearm issues in the states. GOA’s work includes providing legal assistance to those involved in lawsuits with the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, the federal firearms law enforcement agency.

Pratt has appeared on numerous national radio and TV programs such as NBC’s Today Show, CBS’ Good Morning America, CNN’s Crossfire and Larry King Live, Fox’s Hannity & Colmes, MSNBC’s Phil Donahue and Dan Abrams show and many others.

Larry Pratt has debated Congressmen James Traficant, Jr. (D-OH), Charles Rangel (D-NY), Rep. Carolyn McCarthy (D-NY), Senator Frank Lautenberg (D-NJ), and Vice President Al Gore, among others.

Larry’s columns have appeared in newspapers across the country.

Pratt published a book, Armed People Victorious, in 1990 and was editor of a book, Safeguarding Liberty: The Constitution & Militias, 1995.

Pratt’s latest book is “On the Firing Line: Essays in the Defense of Liberty.”

Pratt has held elective office in the state legislature of Virginia, serving in the House of Delegates. Pratt directs a number of other public interest organizations and serves as the Vice-Chairman of the American Institute for Cancer Research.

#13: OBAMA SELLING THE “DEVIL”: 8 to 2 Opposition to Social Healthcare Says Americans Ain’t Buying (Ron Greiner resides in Eastern Time.):There he was, with one hour of primetime TV and ABC News squarely in his corner, and the most memorable quote President Barack Obama could utter about his new social savior of a healthcare plan was, “They (the American people) know they’re living with the Devil, but the Devil they know, they think may be better than the Devil they don’t.”

Either way, a current 8 to 2 public poll opposition to Obama’s plan is a steep hill to climb and one that will take a much more convincing sales pitch. “Only the village idiot would call his own plan the ‘Devil’,” says health insurance expert and founder of www.save101.com , Ron Greiner.

Whether the President’s remark was a poor execution of leveling with people or a plain slip of the tongue, Greiner says the choice of words was perfect because the plan’s details are exactly where that Devil lies.

“The truth is,” explains Greiner, “these Democratic reforms will cost trillions in taxes, plus make health insurance premiums skyrocket.” But what frustrates Greiner most of all is the Obama-led Democrats and lock-step media sources like ABC News that refuse to even discuss reforms put forth by the other side of the aisle.

In the shadow of one of the most crucial and, for 8 out of 10 members of your audience, frightening domestic policy issues occupying America right now, Greiner represents an invaluable voice from outside of Washington.

Call Special Guests today to schedule an interview and, along with an expert analysis of the Devilish details inside the Obama social healthcare plan, Greiner will also outline real, alternative solutions that can make healthcare more affordable, without destroying our current free-market medical system that offers the best care in the world.




ABOUT RON GREINER

Ron Greiner started in the insurance industry in 1987 as an agent for a large national insurance agency. In 1993 he started his own insurance agency in Omaha, Nebraska selling health and life insurance. His job functions included recruiting and training insurance agents. In 1994 and 1995 Greiner’s agency became the largest in the United States selling health insurance for Time Insurance Company, America’s oldest health insurance company. Consumers know Time Insurance Company as Assurant Health.

Medical Savings Accounts (MSAs) were signed into law in August of 1996 as a federal test for self-employed people. Greiner immediately saw the advantages of America’s first tax-free savings account and he enrolled the first MSA in the USA in October 1996. Congress renamed MSAs to Health Savings Accounts (HSA) and made them available to all Americans, under the age of 65, in 2004. For the last 12 years Greiner’s agency, Insurance Processing Corporation (IPC) has focused entirely on enrolling consumers into tax-free MSAs and HSAs and the accompanying low cost health insurance.

Greiner also had the first press release in America on Medicare’s new option - tax free MSAs. He has senior clients in Medicare’s MSA program since the first day the program was available, 1/1/2007. The MSA in Medicare has gotten very little attention from the Nation’s press. With this option Medicare pays for the senior’s health insurance then makes a deposit into the senior’s MSA at the bank, all tax-free.

Before entering the insurance industry Greiner was the Director of six Richard Simmons Anatomy Asylums in Denver, Colorado. These facilities had 300 employees and 30,000 members. He learned about weight loss and exercise as a student. Greiner went to Iowa State University on a wrestling scholarship.

Greiner and his agency are based in Tampa Bay, Florida. IPC services clients nationally with online enrollments at www.save101.com.


Ron Greiner’s response to the Obama/ABC News healthcare program:

Only the village idiot would call his plan the Devil. Obama’s ABC presentation was uninformed and boring. Obama is no Billy Mays. There was no hope in Obama’s remarks. The President is not a talented salesperson.

The President has a tough sell. Democratic reforms will cost trillions in taxes, plus make health insurance premiums skyrocket. President Obama stood firm and demanded that low cost portable individual health insurance, that healthy individuals can qualify for, be outlawed.

ABC picked the questions for the President and asked no questions about Republican reforms and tax free HSAs. At the core of all Republican health care reform plans, and the RNC’s agenda, is Health Savings Accounts (HSAs).

President Obama says a government plan will keep insurance companies “honest.” If the President wanted competition to the government SCHIP insurance for children he would offer more options to poor children. A SCHIP voucher for portable individual health insurance, with a tax-free HSA, would provide safer coverage for children, but also let America’s children save for future medical expenses.

SCHIP has terminated millions of children on their 19th birthday, regardless of their medical history. If a child develops MS, like my daughter, his or her SCHIP insurance is terminated. Simply put, Obama's government SCHIP insurance is dangerous for children.

SCHIP costs taxpayers about $1,800 per year per child. Portable and permanent HSA insurance is available for $600 a year in most states. The voucher would pay 100% of portable HSA insurance on a child plus deposit $1,200 annually in the child’s HSA at the bank. At the age of 19 the poor child will be able to keep their health insurance, plus many will have large HSA balances. An HSA balance would be the appropriate happy birthday to America’s poor children from taxpayers. A large HSA balance would give America’s children hope.

But the Democrats and media won’t talk about any of this.

#14: EPA STINKING UP THE AIR: Censors One of Its Own “Climate Control” Critics (John Spisak resides in Mountain Time.):What does an objective, credible government agency serving in the best interest of American citizens do when one of its own senior research analysts puts forth a critique of the agency’s current direction? . . . Shut him up, of course.

That’s exactly what the EPA did when one of its own employees of 38 years, Alan Carlin, submitted a report that dared to dispute the agency’s current position on “climate change.”

Discussing this topic is SolaRover CEO John Spisak, a national environmental policy and renewable energy expert. Spisak is a believer in the importance of evaluating and, when necessary, adjusting our impact on the earth and atmosphere but even he says something about this censorship stinks all the way up to the ozone layer.

John shares with your audience how the current EPA administrator has promised that real science would play a critical role within the agency and that Obama has pledged that his administration will be the most transparent administration in history.

Said Spisak, “The EPA rhetoric is not matching their actions. They are enabling the environmental movement to be a movement of high taxes and junk science. There are probably many legitimate scientists who also would like to give a dissenting view but are afraid to due to concerns about their careers, pensions, promotions and possible political retribution. They witnessed Alan Carlin’s removal from global warming studies, his report getting censored and the EPA forbidding him from sharing his views publicly. They got the message loud and clear.”

For a critical, yet fair, discussion on this topic, as well as the recent passage of the Cap & Trade energy bill by the House, schedule an interview with John Spisak today.

In the meantime, for more information on the story, visit:

http://www.wnd.com/index.php?fa=PAGE.view&pageId=102031

ABOUT JOHN F. SPISAK…

John Spisak is the President SolaRover, a leading mobile solar power generation company, and a resident of Lone Tree, Colorado.

Mr. Spisak, 58, a science graduate of Purdue University has broad international business experience in the natural resources, new technologies and environmental industries.

Spisak also has extensive experience in the national environmental policy arena having co-chaired a national organization for the reform of the Superfund Law working closely with both houses of Congress; discussing critical reform issues with former EPA Head Carol Browner; and having been invited to testify numerous times before various Senate and House Committees in the 1990’s.

Mr. Spisak served as one of only 13 CEOs on the United States Senate’s Western States Coalition for the reform of the US Superfund Law. Over the past 36 years, he has managed an international natural resources company, founded and ran a full-service environmental engineering and remediation company for the Southern Pacific Railroad and chaired a multi-company venture to permit and design one of the largest integrated waste disposal sites in the US.

Spisak helped develop clean air technology that would capture and recycle volatile organic hydrocarbons.

Over his career, he has been an invited speaker and lecturer on governmental issues related to the environment and was one of the founding directors of the National Association of Environmental Management (NAEM). He holds a patent and has authored several environmental technology articles and was co-editor of a book on mineral industry alternative environmental technologies.

#15: FORECAST UNFRIENDLY TO ENVIRONMENTALISTS: Global Warming Becoming Harder to Sell :It’s hurricane season in North America and the forecast doesn’t feed into the doomsday-scenario platform of the environmentalists. After another winter that was even colder and longer than the one before, meteorology experts have predicted a hurricane season that, at worst, will be about average.*

So, why is the environmentalist movement still a concern to civil engineer, Rob Roselli? Because in his study of the “climate change” argument and the pressure dynamics of the environmentalist lobby around the world, he sees the green faction doing more harm than good.

“Calling it global warming or climate change doesn’t make a difference,” says Roselli, who focused his engineering degree with a concentration in environmental studies. “The models of this theory, unlike those vetted under any other branch of science, have no proven, documented verification. In fact, scientific data contradicts the theory. And, yet, it’s influencing and driving domestic and foreign policy. If anything is indisputable, it’s the dangerous consequences of this.” Like what? Well . . .

Schedule an interview with Rob Roselli. As a guest on your show, he’ll lead your audience to wonder about the logic of environmentalism based on real, sometimes deadly, case histories—such as how the ozone-hole scare cost millions of lives in Africa, how the global-warming-inspired ethanol project has starved worldwide food supplies, and how the DDT ban has increased cases of malaria. Call Special Guests today.

* Sources include: http://www.g2weather.com/g2_weather/2009/03/accuweathers-initial-2009-hurricane-outlook.html and http://hurricane.atmos.colostate.edu/Forecasts/

ABOUT ROB ROSELLI:

Rob earned a BS in Civil Engineering from Vanderbilt University, and an MS in Civil Engineering from New Jersey Institute of Technology. Rob is currently licensed as a professional engineer in three states and employed in the State of New York. As a writer and speaker, Rob is on a mission to apply light to darkness in its many forms.

#16: SANFORD FIRST APOLOGIZES FOR HURTING GIRLFRIEND—THEN TO WIFE:Adultery: In biblical days it was the wayward woman who was stoned.

Today there appears to be little payment by man or woman for breaking their marriage vows.

During his rambling news conference, South Carolina Governor Mark Sanford confessed to committing adultery with a girlfriend from Argentina.

Yet the remarkable part of his seemingly contrite address was that he first apologized to his girlfriend for hurting her—before he got to the part of apologizing to his wife!

Hello, are we missing something here???

With Bill Clinton we had to guess what the meaning of the word ‘is’ was.

But with Governor Sanford there was no guessing needed. The whole world heard his pecking order of apologies. But did anyone notice or even care?

Conducting Talk Show interviews on this topic is moralist, ethicist, evangelist Bill Keller, founder of LivePrayer.com, a daily religious devotional with 2.4 million subscribers.

Evangelist Keller contends that the world has gotten somewhat numb to morals and thus to moral scandals. Even when someone apologizes to his girlfriend first before his wife, there is a collective yawn, rather than a secondary wave of outrage over the mistress getting the first apology!


ABOUT BILL KELLER…

Crowned the next big thing in mass media religion by the news media, Pastor Bill Keller has hosted the only live call-in faith and values-based program airing nationally on major secular television network affiliates for nearly six years. Live Prayer with Bill Keller is now seen exclusively on the internet, Monday through Friday from 11 PM to midnight EST on Liveprayer.com. The program is also simulcast on Tampa's 50,000-watt WWBA-820, and is being syndicated nationwide on other major secular radio stations.

Live Prayer deals head-on with issues ranging from divorce, homosexuality, abortion, sexual abuse, pornography, drug addiction, radical Islam, race relations, spousal abuse, false prophets, and various other issues from a conservative, biblical worldview. Unscripted and unedited, Live Prayer is a fresh and totally spontaneous approach to problem solving. Launched in 1999 by Keller, LivePrayer.com has become the most successful online faith outreach in history. Since its inception, LivePrayer.com has responded personally to more than 60 million online requests for prayer. Additionally, Keller's Live Prayer devotional is received daily by over 2.4 million email subscribers, making Keller's devotional one of the most read e-communications worldwide.

#17: WALPINGATE: WILL LIEBERMAN WILT? Initially Supportive Of White House Position, Senator Now Faces Pressure To Challenge It:As chairman of the Senate Homeland Security and Governmental Affairs committee, Senator Joe Lieberman has jurisdiction when it comes to an investigation into the White House’s firing of Inspector General Gerald Walpin. Last week, indications were that he might back away from exposing a scandal. Pressure, however, is mounting for hearings and investigations into the firing of Inspector General Gerald Walpin by Obama.

When the White House was asked to provide a detailed explanation regarding the decision to fire Walpin, Lieberman was one of three senators (Snowe and McCaskill the other two) who received a letter from the Obama administration saying that Walpin was “confused” and “disoriented” at a May 20th Board Meeting. Initially, Lieberman appeared to be sufficiently appeased. Since then, the chorus of Walpin defenders has grown louder and Lieberman may not find it so easy to get on with other business.

Founder and editor of The International Forecaster Bob Chapman is available for interviews to explain why a thorough investigation is needed despite Joe Lieberman’s apparent initial reticence to pursue it. On Thursday, June 18th, Lieberman was quoted by the Washington Times as saying, “There is now general agreement the administration has followed both the spirit and the letter of the law with respect to notice. Through two letters and oral briefings, the White House has communicated a number of concerns with Mr. Walpin’s conduct as Inspector General.”

Aside from overlooking the fact that Walpin was given a one hour ultimatum instead of the 30 day written notice guaranteed by the law, since Lieberman’s statement Walpin has seen defenders come out en masse to show their support. That support is centered not on the procedures the White House followed but with their reasons for termination.

Pointing to some voluminous support Walpin is receiving from unlikely sources, Chapman maintains that Lieberman is going to have more difficulty maintaining the stance he decided to take last Thursday. CNSNews has reported that a letter in support of Walpin was signed by 144 prominent lawyers as well as a former Democratic White House Counsel and a former Republican U.S. Attorney General, who all insist that Walpin is anything but “confused” and “disoriented”.

“In light of these new revelations, Senator Lieberman may find that backing away from calls for an investigation may not be as politically expedient as he might like to think,” Chapman said.

Chapman insists that the circumstances around which Walpin was terminated are far too suspicious to allow last Thursday’s statement by Lieberman, who is the chairman of the committee responsible for overseeing the Inspector General’s office to go unchallenged. “Anyone who looks at even the outer layers of this scandal knows there’s much more to it,” Chapman said. “Not the least of which is a former NBA basketball player who’s already made millions of dollars misusing taxpayer money. I sure hope Lieberman has changed his tune since last Thursday.”

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLES MAY BE HELPFUL IN SHOW PREP:
http://washingtontimes.com/news/2009/jun/24/lieberman-overlooks-walpingate/

http://www.cnsnews.com/public/content/article.aspx?RsrcID=50029



ABOUT ROBERT J. CHAPMAN:

Bob Chapman is founder and editor of The International Forecaster, a compendium of information on business, finance, economics and social and political issues worldwide. It directly reaches 10,000 investors and brokers every month, while portions of his publication are picked up by 60 other financial publications, resulting in an aggregate number of weekly readers in the range of 10 million investors. Bob spent three years in U.S. Army Counterintelligence, mostly in Europe. He speaks German and French and is conversant in Spanish. He lived in Europe for six years, off and on, three years in Africa, one year in Canada and another year in the Bahamas. Mr. Chapman became a stockbroker from 1960 to 1988. For 18 of those years he owned his own brokerage firm with over 6,000 clients.

#18: HEART BREAKER: Video Of Iranian Woman Shot In Heart Captures Hearts Around The World:As the Iranian people continue to protest oppression and persecution by taking to the streets, the tools of the digital age (small video cameras, twitter, etc) have become their most potent weapons. Stopping their use has become one of the government’s primary goals.

After getting out of a cab, a beautiful young woman named Neda, who was engaged to be married, was shot in the heart and quickly died in the street. Her last moments were caught on tape by a protestor and it is soon apparent after watching it why the Iranian government wants to crackdown on any images or descriptions of its actions getting out of Iran – such communication exposes the evil of the regime and does them great damage in the eyes of the world.

Jim Jacobson, founder of Christian Freedom International absolutely knows the power of imagery and shining light on oppressive regimes. He and his group also saw what happens when an oppressive government successfully shields the evil it perpetrates against its people, as was the case after the Myanmar cyclones in 2008. “Many people don’t realize,” says Jacobson, “that the death toll in Myanmar was as bad, if not worse, than the Tsunami of 2004. The difference was that countless videos of the Tsunami were in abundance while the oppressive Junta in Myanmar prevented the brutal truth from being shown.”

Jacobson has seen persecution all over the world and maintains that imagery like the video of Neda’s last moments is extremely powerful and can galvanize peace loving people all over the world. In some cases, such images become timeless, as was the case in Tiananmen Square, when one image of a man standing in front of a tank makes an entire time come rushing back.

Click here to view the very disturbing video of Neda’s death. **WARNING – EXTREMELY GRAPHIC** http://www.liveleak.com/view?i=0db_1245519048

ABOUT YOUR SPEAKER

Jim Jacobson
Before CFI, Mr. Jacobson served as a policy analyst in the Reagan White House, served as political appointee in the administration of George Herbert Walker Bush, and was a senior legislative assistant in the U.S. Senate. He was elected for a four-year term to the Warren County, Virginia, Board of Supervisors.

In his career he has testified before Congress, conducted briefings at the White House, State Department, and the United Nations. Jim has personally brought aid, smuggled Bibles, and provided advocacy to Christians in many countries in the past 10 years. He frequently travels into restricted countries—overtly and covertly—where Christians are severely persecuted for their faith, including active war zones.

Mr. Jacobson is a graduate of the University of Michigan. He and his wife Karen have four children and have been married for more than 20 years.

#19: 2ND AMENDMENT K-OH ATTEMPT: Obama/Reid Push Nominee Koa, supporter of World Gun Treaty:Is anyone really surprised anymore when Barack Obama tries to bend his administration a ‘progressively’ further to the left with every new department nomination? But even with that in mind, his latest choice for legal advisor to the State Department is startling many.

Your Talk Show interview guest, Larry Pratt, Executive Director of Gun Owners of America, is so concerned with the world-order views of Obama appointee Harold Hongju Koh that his organization recently sent an emergency mass e-mail alert urging every American to act fast and tell his or her Senator to vote Koh down.

That would, of course, include citizens in Nevada—as their man, Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid (D), is the one pushing for a rapid-response vote to confirm Koh.

Troubled by Koh’s contention that the world should join to form a uniform gun-control treaty, the GOA writes in its alert: “Koh’s [political] positions treat our Constitutional law as if it were a mere local ordinance on the greater world stage. This is of particular concern . . . at a time when the U.S. Congress is under pressure from President Obama to ratify an international gun-control treaty with countries in the western hemisphere,” a move that Pratt and others believe would lead to an even broader United Nations initiative to pass world gun restrictions.

To this point, Koh’s nomination has been delayed largely because of these 2nd Amendment concerns. But Reid is inspired by the Democrat and leftist headlock on the Executive branch, and both houses in the Legislature.

So, what is the likelihood of Koh’s confirmation? And how soon and how far can we expect him to push his agenda and influence both domestic and global gun policy?

Schedule a fascinating interview with expert Larry Pratt by calling Special Guests today.

ABOUT YOUR EXPERT GUEST, LARRY PRATT…

Larry Pratt has been Executive Director of Gun Owners of America for 30 years. GOA is a national membership organization of 300,000 Americans dedicated to promoting their second amendment freedom to keep and bear arms.

GOA lobbies for the pro-gun position in Washington and is involved in firearm issues in the states. GOA’s work includes providing legal assistance to those involved in lawsuits with the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, the federal firearms law enforcement agency.

Pratt has appeared on numerous national radio and TV programs such as NBC’s Today Show, CBS’ Good Morning America, CNN’s Crossfire and Larry King Live, Fox’s Hannity & Colmes, MSNBC’s Phil Donahue and Dan Abrams show and many others.

Larry Pratt has debated Congressmen James Traficant, Jr. (D-OH), Charles Rangel (D-NY), Rep. Carolyn McCarthy (D-NY), Senator Frank Lautenberg (D-NJ), and Vice President Al Gore, among others.

Larry’s columns have appeared in newspapers across the country.

Pratt published a book, Armed People Victorious, in 1990 and was editor of a book, Safeguarding Liberty: The Constitution & Militias, 1995.

Pratt’s latest book is “On the Firing Line: Essays in the Defense of Liberty.”

Pratt has held elective office in the state legislature of Virginia, serving in the House of Delegates. Pratt directs a number of other public interest organizations and serves as the Vice-Chairman of the American Institute for Cancer Research.

#20: WANTED: BACKBONE IN CONGRESS: How Will The White House Respond To Questions About Inspector General?:Iowa Republican Senator Charles Grassley has drawn a line in the sand with the Obama administration. The question is whether or not it will be a line of consequence if it is crossed.

In the wake of the firing of Inspector General Gerald Walpin, the Obama White House has fumbled in its responses as to why Walpin was fired. First, the president said he no longer had the “fullest confidence” in Walpin. Then Walpin was said to have appeared “confused” and “disoriented” at a Board meeting in May. In a meeting last week, White House counsel Norman Eisen failed to sufficiently convince Inspector General Advocate and Iowa Senator Chuck Grassley that position is valid.

Founder and editor of The International Forecaster Bob Chapman is available for interviews to discuss the next step in this showdown. That next step is Wednesday, June 24th - the deadline given to the White House by Grassley for responding to twelve questions the Senator wants answered in writing (questions listed below).

“Based on the communication coming out of the White House regarding Walpin,” says Chapman, “these are going to be tough questions to answer.”

The biggest question needing asked by those who see the firing of Inspector General Walpin as not permitted by the Inspectors General Reform Act, is ‘Will Grassley stand up and be the champion of the IG he is said to be?’ The IGRA says the IG does not serve at the pleasure of the president and any terminations must go through congress, with a 30 day notice and specific reasons in writing. Walpin was given one hour to resign or be fired on June 10th.

On Wednesday, June 17th, White House Counsel Norman Eisen failed to respond to questions from investigators on Grassley’s staff. As a result, Grassley asked the White House to respond, in writing, to twelve questions by Wednesday, June 24th. Here are those questions:

1) Did the [Corporation for National and Community Service] Board communicate its concerns about Mr. Walpin to the White House in writing?

2) Specifically, which CNCS Board members came forward with concerns about Mr. Walpin’s ability to serve as the Inspector General?

3) Was the communication about the Board’s concerns on or about May 20, 2009 the first instance of any communications with White House personnel regarding the possibility of removing Mr. Walpin?

4) Which witnesses were interviewed in the course of Mr. Eisen’s review?

5) How many witnesses were interviewed?

6) Were any employees of the Office of Inspector General, who may have had more frequent contact with Mr. Walpin than the Board members, interviewed?

7) Was Mr. Walpin asked directly during Mr. Eisen’s review about the events of May 20, 2009?

8) Was Mr. Walpin asked for his response to the allegations submitted to the Integrity Committee by Acting U.S. Attorney Lawrence Brown?

9) What efforts were made during Mr. Eisen’s review to obtain both sides of the story or to afford the Office of Inspector General an opportunity to be heard?

10) In addition to the claim that Mr. Walpin was “confused” and “disoriented,” the letter also says he exhibited “other behavior” that led to questions about his capacity. What other behavior was Mr. Eisen referencing?

11) If the initial and primary concern had to do with Mr. Walpin’s capacity to serve for potential health reasons, why was he only given one hour to decide whether to resign or be fired?

12) If Mr. Walpin’s telecommuting arrangements since the beginning of this year were a major concern, then why was Mr. Walpin not simply asked to stop telecommuting?

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL IN SHOW PREP:
http://www.washingtonexaminer.com/opinion/blogs/beltway-confidential/NEW-White-House-refuses-to-answer-Senates-questions-on-AmeriCorps-IG-firing-48285832.html



ABOUT ROBERT J. CHAPMAN:

Bob Chapman is founder and editor of The International Forecaster, a compendium of information on business, finance, economics and social and political issues worldwide. It directly reaches 10,000 investors and brokers every month, while portions of his publication are picked up by 60 other financial publications, resulting in an aggregate number of weekly readers in the range of 10 million investors. Bob spent three years in U.S. Army Counterintelligence, mostly in Europe. He speaks German and French and is conversant in Spanish. He lived in Europe for six years, off and on, three years in Africa, one year in Canada and another year in the Bahamas. Mr. Chapman became a stockbroker from 1960 to 1988. For 18 of those years he owned his own brokerage firm with over 6,000 clients.

#21: ARE US GENERALS NOW 'TERRORISTS'?:James Robinson is a retired U.S. Air National Guard brigadier general, now commercial pilot for a major airline. He’s been certified by the Transportation Security Administration to carry a weapon into the cockpit of his plane as part of the government’s defense program against in-flight terrorist hijacking.

And yet, when this veteran tries to board his plane these days, he gets stopped and forced to jump through a bureaucratic hoop or two because his name is on a new terrorist watch list. . . . Sound ridiculous? Alan Gottlieb, Chairman of the Citizens Committee for the Right to Keep and Bear Arms, can elaborate.

This terrorist “watch list,” as silly as it may be with all its mistaken identities and murky links to actual terrorist groups, is real. And gun-control Democrats in Congress, led by Frank Lautenberg (NJ), are proposing “extraordinary powers” be given to Attorney General Eric Holder to ban gun sales to the more than one million names on the list.

Problem is, if that means U.S. brigadier generals and, for that matter, anyone else who loves and defends this country can’t buy guns, then so be it.

Truth is, as far as Gottlieb is concerned, Lautenberg and other federal “gun grabbers” don’t care—because it’s another false license to ban guns.

As a guest on your show, Gottlieb can get after this story and all the “lies” being spun by gun-control politicians dating back to the Obama election campaign, such as:

• How closely is the President holding to his campaign promise to gun owners?
• Are American gun shows really the wellspring for armed crime in Mexico?
• Did the gun check system fail those who lost their lives during the Virginia Tech shootings?

Hear a compelling indictment of the gun-control advocates in all of these cases and more when you arrange to have Alan Gottlieb on your show.

ABOUT ALAN GOTTLIEB:

Dynamic and articulate are two accurate descriptions of Alan Gottlieb.

Alan is a Nuclear Engineering graduate of the University of Tennessee and has attended the Institute on Comparative Political & Economic Systems at Georgetown University.
He is recognized as a member of the working press, maintaining active membership in the Outdoor Writers Association of America. His articles have appeared in periodicals including USA Today, Seattle Times, Washington Post, Atlanta Journal-Constitution, San Francisco Examiner, Cincinnati Inquirer, Orlando Sentinel, and Chicago Tribune.

Alan is the Publisher of Gun Week and The Gottlieb-Tartaro Report. He is the Chairman of the Citizens Committee for the Right to Keep and Bear Arms, Founder of the Second Amendment Foundation, serves on the Board of Directors of the American Conservative Union, President of the Center for the Defense of Free Enterprise, President of the American Political Action Committee and President of NoInternetTax.org

His handiwork has received notice in the New York Times, Washington Post, Cleveland Plain Dealer, Time, People, Rolling Stone, National Review and Outside magazine.
Alan has received the prestigious Golden Eagle Award from the American Federation of Police, and was commended by the Kentucky House of Representatives for his “outstanding leadership in preserving our American heritage of freedom.” He is listed in Who’s Who in America, Who’s Who in the World and Who’s Who in American Politics.

Alan has appeared on over 3,700 TV and radio talk shows, including the McNeil-Lehrer News Hour, ABC’s 20/20, The Michael Reagan Show, PBS All Things Considered, CNN Crossfire, Fox TV’s Crier Report, NBC Today Show, The O’Reilly Factor, ESPN, Larry King Live, CNN Special Reports, Hannity & Combs, CNN All Politics, Fox News Channel and Good Morning America.

Alan is President of Merril Associates, a noted direct-response advertising agency specializing in direct mail, fund raising and public relations. He is also President of Merril Press, a non-fiction book publishing company.
Alan is also President of radio stations KBNP in Portland, Oregon, KITZ in Seattle, Washington, KGTK in Olympia, Washington, and KSBN in Spokane, Washington and former Chairman of the Talk America Radio Network and former President of the Universal Talk Network.

In addition, Alan is the author of seventeen books including Politically Correct Guns, Trashing the Economy and She Took a Village: The Unauthorized Biography of Hillary Clinton, Alan Gottlieb's Celebrity Address Book, Double Trouble: Daschle and Gephart Capitol Hill Bullies, and Gun Rights Affirmed, America Fights Back: Armed Self-defense in a Violent Age and These Dogs Don’t Hunt: The Democrats’ War on Guns.

Alan currently resides in Bellevue, Washington with his wife Julianne, his daughters Amy Jean, Sarah Merril, and Alexis Hope and son Andrew Michael.

SEE LIST OF MORE SPECIAL GUESTS: www.specialguests.com

#22: OBAMA POLLS NEGATIVE FIRST TIME EVER—2 DAYS IN A ROW!:Shocking numbers on Obama’s plunging popularity have just been released by Rasmussen Polls. On June 21, 2009, Obama dropped into negative territory for the first time ever, with 32% of Americans expressing strong approval and 34% expressing strong disapproval, according to the official Rasmussen ‘Obama Approval Index’ (strong approvals minus strong disapprovals). He picked up one point on June 22 but still polled negative.

This is particularly significant since Obama has plummeted from positive 30% to negative 2%. On January 22, 2009, two days after Obama was sworn in, the ‘Obama Approval Index’ approval rate was a whopping 30%.

According to Rasmussen, Obama’s general approval (not strongly for or against) have also dipped, with 53% of voters saying they at least somewhat approve of the President's performance so far, compared to 46% generally disapproving. So, although the most impassioned people polled give Obama a negative 2%, he still, at least for now, is in positive general approval territory, however, if that trend has been dropping and if another 4% crossed over, he’d also be negative overall approval.

Available to be your Talk Show interview guest on this topic are David Armstrong, President and CEO of Armstrong International, a century old family-owned privately held US company, and Robert Chapman, editor of The International Forecaster newsletter, offers clear reasons for the significant drop in popularity. According to Armstrong, the public listens to promises and monitors how they perceive those promises being delivered, after giving a reasonable ‘honeymoon’ period wherein they give the benefit of the doubt.

During your interview with David Armstrong he discusses that with an unprecedented number of Obama’s cabinet choices being surrounded by impossible-to-ignore ethics challenges, seemingly endless government bailouts and an ‘Obama fatigue factor’ beginning to set in. And no end in sight to Obama’s socializing of America—being financed by taxpayer’s wallets-- it has passed fatigue and entered into the realm of Obama burnout.

Bob Chapman shares several reasons for Obama’s popularity plunge with your listeners. Stated Bob, “Obama called for change and generally speaking there have been few changes. Foreign policy, except for his stance on the Middle East, has been a replica of the previous two administrations. He certainly has the distain of Jewish voters who are pro-Zionist. He has proceeded to bail out banks, Wall Street, insurance companies and selected other companies such as Chrysler and GM. The bankruptcies settlements smacked of cronyism. The public didn’t expect socialism and welfare for corporate America. They also did not expect the fallout of free trade and globalization to continue to cause joblessness at a continued furious pace. Then we have a program for health socialism that few like and which faces are very tough fight. It is probably already dead on arrival.”

Obama’s second to the lowest numbers came right after he spouted off in Cairo, Egypt his vows to defend and protect the ‘good’ name of Islam and Muslim Despots with nations devoid of basic human rights, while seemingly poking his thumb in the eye of American citizens. The general public had to collectively ask themselves if Obama was President of the United States or some self-styled King of the World.

Then after the US citizenry tried hard to give Obama the benefit of the doubt overseas, despite his bizarre un-American comments, he they went off and fired his Investigator General. Chapman stated, “We also have the illegal dismissal of Investigator General Gerald Walpin, who uncovered a $75 million scam under the AmeriCorps program at City University of New York, which was followed by exposure of Obama’s friend Sacramento Mayor Kevin Johnson, who stole almost $1 million. A terrible disgrace, which the media has refused to expose.”

And as if that was not enough, Chapman cites, “Mr. Obama’s new policy to make the privately owned Federal Reserve a financial regulator, when they were directly responsible for our credit crisis” as another reason many people can no longer buy into the ObamaChangeMachine.

But isn’t Obama’s health plan a ‘populist one? Surely, no one can be against ‘free’ healthcare, right? Not if it’s really a Euthanasia bill in disguise, opines Chapman, saying, “Obama allows ABC exclusive rights to film, what really is an infomercial on his healthcare plan, which we call the euthanasia bill, without any other coverage. These are the reasons months ago we (International Forecaster newsletter) predicted that by October he would have a 40% approval rating and he is fast on the way there.”
Bob Chapman’s latest Obama prediction? Chapman says, “Citizens now believe the president will raise taxes and try to implement a Value Added Tax, a VAT,” and concluding, “People do not want a voluntary civilian defense force or a selective service draft. Most people believe the stimulus package is a joke, an expensive one.

David Armstrong discusses how when virtually all of the promises of ‘change’ Obama made turned out to be changes toward big centralized, socialist government. He adds that when people are more than just a little bit let down when the see him flip-flopping on so many campaign promises, such as his solemn vow to post important bills on the Internet prior to voting on them—such as the trillion dollar taxpayer-funded bailout of rich bankers--even moderate and some liberal voters are left scratching their heads in puzzlement and/or disenchantment.

David Armstrong, author of the new book, Hanging By A Thread: The Erosion of the Golden Rule in America, has but a single company policy at Armstrong International: The Golden Rule: Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.

David’s suggestion to Obama? “Speak only the truth and practice the Golden Rule: Do unto taxpayers as you would have taxpayers do unto you.”

Yet amidst Obama’s current popularity ‘freefall,’ many in the mainstream news media continue to be Obama groupies by singing the praises of his alleged ‘popularity.’ At what point do his numbers have to fall before the major news organizations have to admit that Obama is no longer popular? One can only imagine how low his numbers might be if there wasn’t the 24/7 media reporting dribble about ‘The great one.’

The following is the Rasmussen Poll:

Date Presidential Approval Index Strongly Approve Strongly Disapprove Total Approve Total Disapprove
06/21/2009 -2 32% 34% 53% 46%
06/20/2009 1 34% 33% 54% 46%
06/19/2009 1 34% 33% 54% 45%
06/18/2009 2 35% 33% 55% 45%
06/17/2009 5 37% 32% 56% 43%
06/16/2009 4 36% 32% 56% 43%
06/15/2009 3 35% 32% 55% 44%
06/14/2009 2 34% 32% 54% 45%
06/13/2009 3 35% 32% 54% 46%
06/12/2009 4 36% 32% 54% 45%
06/11/2009 7 37% 30% 56% 43%
06/10/2009 9 38% 29% 57% 42%
06/09/2009 8 36% 28% 58% 41%
06/08/2009 7 36% 29% 56% 43%
06/07/2009 3 35% 32% 53% 46%
06/06/2009 1 34% 33% 53% 47%
06/05/2009 0 34% 34% 54% 46%
06/04/2009 2 33% 31% 55% 45%
06/03/2009 3 34% 31% 55% 44%
06/02/2009 5 33% 28% 58% 41%
06/01/2009 7 35% 28% 58% 41%
05/31/2009 10 36% 26% 58% 41%
05/30/2009 9 37% 28% 58% 41%
05/29/2009 10 37% 27% 59% 40%
05/28/2009 6 35% 29% 56% 43%
05/27/2009 5 34% 29% 56% 43%
05/26/2009 1 31% 30% 55% 44%
05/25/2009 3 33% 30% 56% 43%
05/24/2009 5 34% 29% 57% 42%
05/23/2009 6 36% 30% 57% 41%
05/22/2009 6 35% 29% 57% 41%
05/21/2009 7 36% 29% 56% 42%
05/20/2009 7 36% 29% 58% 41%
05/19/2009 8 36% 28% 58% 41%
05/18/2009 5 35% 30% 57% 42%
05/17/2009 4 34% 30% 56% 43%
05/16/2009 4 34% 30% 55% 44%
05/15/2009 7 36% 29% 57% 43%
05/14/2009 8 37% 29% 57% 42%
05/13/2009 7 36% 29% 57% 42%
05/12/2009 5 35% 30% 56% 43%
05/11/2009 No Polling--Mother's Day
05/10/2009 7 34% 27% 58% 41%
05/09/2009 7 34% 27% 58% 41%
05/08/2009 9 36% 27% 58% 41%
05/07/2009 8 38% 30% 57% 43%
05/06/2009 7 37% 30% 57% 43%
05/05/2009 6 36% 30% 56% 43%
05/04/2009 5 35% 30% 57% 43%
05/03/2009 3 35% 32% 56% 43%
05/02/2009 1 33% 32% 54% 45%
05/01/2009 2 34% 32% 54% 45%
04/30/2009 2 34% 32% 54% 45%
04/29/2009 4 35% 31% 55% 43%
04/28/2009 5 36% 31% 56% 43%
04/27/2009 5 35% 30% 55% 44%
04/26/2009 3 35% 32% 54% 45%
04/25/2009 5 36% 31% 56% 43%
04/24/2009 5 36% 31% 55% 44%
04/23/2009 6 37% 31% 55% 44%
04/22/2009 2 34% 32% 54% 46%
04/21/2009 2 34% 32% 54% 45%
04/20/2009 3 33% 30% 55% 45%
04/19/2009 6 35% 29% 55% 44%
04/18/2009 7 36% 29% 55% 44%
04/17/2009 3 35% 32% 55% 43%
04/16/2009 4 36% 32% 55% 43%
04/15/2009 2 35% 33% 55% 44%
04/14/2009 3 35% 32% 55% 44%
04/13/2009 2 34% 32% 55% 44%
04/12/2009 2 34% 32% 55% 44%
04/11/2009 5 34% 29% 55% 43%
04/10/2009 5 34% 29% 55% 44%
04/09/2009 5 34% 29% 55% 44%
04/08/2009 6 35% 29% 57% 42%
04/07/2009 8 37% 29% 58% 41%
04/06/2009 8 36% 28% 58% 41%
04/05/2009 6 36% 30% 56% 43%
04/04/2009 3 34% 31% 56% 43%
04/03/2009 3 35% 32% 56% 44%
04/02/2009 5 35% 30% 56% 44%
04/01/2009 8 37% 29% 57% 41%
03/31/2009 11 38% 27% 59% 39%
03/30/2009 8 38% 30% 58% 40%
03/29/2009 7 37% 30% 58% 41%
03/28/2009 4 35% 31% 56% 43%
03/27/2009 5 35% 30% 56% 43%
03/26/2009 5 35% 30% 56% 43%
03/25/2009 5 36% 31% 56% 43%
03/24/2009 4 36% 32% 56% 43%
03/23/2009 5 36% 31% 56% 42%
03/22/2009 4 35% 31% 56% 43%
03/21/2009 4 36% 32% 55% 44%
03/20/2009 4 35% 31% 55% 43%
03/19/2009 7 37% 30% 56% 43%
03/18/2009 7 37% 30% 57% 42%
03/17/2009 5 37% 32% 56% 43%
03/16/2009 4 36% 32% 56% 43%
03/15/2009 6 37% 31% 56% 43%
03/14/2009 8 37% 29% 57% 41%
03/13/2009 9 38% 29% 57% 42%
03/12/2009 9 37% 28% 58% 41%
03/11/2009 6 37% 31% 56% 43%
03/10/2009 6 38% 32% 56% 43%
03/09/2009 6 38% 32% 56% 43%
03/08/2009 8 39% 31% 56% 43%
03/07/2009 8 39% 31% 56% 43%
03/06/2009 15 42% 27% 58% 40%
03/05/2009 14 41% 27% 59% 40%
03/04/2009 16 42% 26% 60% 38%
03/03/2009 13 40% 27% 60% 39%
03/02/2009 10 39% 29% 58% 41%
03/01/2009 8 38% 30% 58% 40%
02/28/2009 10 39% 29% 59% 39%
02/27/2009 15 41% 26% 60% 40%
02/26/2009 16 41% 25% 60% 40%
02/25/2009 14 39% 25% 59% 40%
02/24/2009 14 39% 25% 60% 39%
02/23/2009 11 38% 27% 58% 40%
02/22/2009 11 38% 27% 58% 41%
02/21/2009 10 38% 28% 57% 41%
02/20/2009 12 38% 26% 59% 40%
02/19/2009 13 38% 25% 60% 39%
02/18/2009 14 38% 24% 61% 38%
02/17/2009 15 38% 23% 61% 37%
02/16/2009 10 36% 26% 60% 39%
02/15/2009 11 37% 26% 60% 39%
02/14/2009 13 39% 26% 60% 39%
02/13/2009 17 41% 24% 60% 38%
02/12/2009 19 43% 24% 61% 37%
02/11/2009 19 42% 23% 60% 38%
02/10/2009 15 39% 24% 60% 38%
02/09/2009 14 38% 24% 60% 38%
02/08/2009 11 36% 25% 59% 39%
02/07/2009 14 37% 23% 60% 38%
02/06/2009 17 38% 21% 61% 36%
02/05/2009 19 39% 20% 62% 36%
02/04/2009 18 39% 21% 62% 36%
02/03/2009 15 37% 22% 61% 36%
02/02/2009 17 41% 24% 60% 38%
02/01/2009 21 44% 23% 63% 34%
01/31/2009 23 45% 22% 63% 34%
01/30/2009 21 43% 22% 63% 36%
01/29/2009 22 42% 20% 62% 36%
01/28/2009 22 42% 20% 62% 36%
01/27/2009 23 42% 19% 62% 36%
01/26/2009 21 41% 20% 60% 37%
01/25/2009 22 42% 20% 60% 36%
01/24/2009 26 44% 18% 61% 33%
01/23/2009 29 45% 16% 62% 29%
01/22/2009 30 44% 14% 64% 29%


ABOUT DAVID ARMSTRONG…

David M. Armstrong heads up Armstrong International, a family company that is over one century old, specializing in providing industrial heating and air conditioning equipment to companies. But more than being a businessman, David is a storyteller.

Mr. Armstrong has evolved corporate storytelling into a whole new style of management—a style praised by Tom Peters as the leadership answer for tormented managers who need their people to champion initiative.

David Armstrong’s stock in trade is anecdotes—stories about urgency, bravery, wisdom, core values, change management, innovation and having fun in the workplace. Where does he find stories? In the same places he suggests you look for yours—in the eyes and on the faces of the customers, partners and employees who come through your doors every day.

“Every company has a rich heritage of stories,” says David. “I’m just putting my company’s treasure to work.” While it may be true that every company has stories, not every CEO has the vision to search them out and retell them with powerful and memorable morals. That’s what this site is all about—helping you to dig into, discover and use the stories that surround you.

Today Armstrong International is a safe haven in a business world grown confusing and complex. Doing business with Armstrong International is refreshingly simple and pleasant. In fact, today’s dream has become the vision of business as a series of enjoyable experiences.

David’s is the author of the new business ethics book, “Hanging by a Thread.”

ABOUT HANGING BY A THREAD

Can you be successful at business or even running a country without losing your soul? David Armstrong thinks you can! In his new book, Hanging By A Thread: The Erosion of the Golden Rule in America, David shares real life examples of people and companies that are successful by simply following “The Golden Rule” of: “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.”

In Hanging By A Thread, you will learn about Armstrong International, which is a successful, profitable company that follows the golden rule in all of its decisions for over a century, and in the process, is flourishing in an otherwise turbulent economy.

ABOUT ROBERT J. CHAPMAN:

Mr. Chapman is 73 years old. He was born in Boston, MA and attended Northeastern University majoring in business management. He spent three years in the U. S. Army Counterintelligence, mostly in Europe. He speaks German and French and is conversant in Spanish. He lived in Europe for six years, off and on, three years in Africa, one year in Canada and another year in the Bahamas. Mr. Chapman became a stockbroker in 1960 and retired in 1988. For 18 of those years he owned his own brokerage firm. He was probably the largest gold and silver stockbroker in the world during that period. When he retired he had over 6,000 clients. From 1962 through 1976 he specialized in South African gold shares. He and his family lived in Salisbury, Rhodesia (now Harare, Zimbabwe) and Johannesburg, South Africa from 1970 to 1973. During that time he did a great deal of further study into the South African mining industry.

#23: THE PRESIDENT’S EROSION OF INTEGRITY: Can America Survive Another Scandal? (David Armstrong resides in Eastern Time.) :Long before America needs consumer and investor confidence to energize the stock market, or Congressional term limits to keep our representatives in check, or a better healthcare system, or a more secure border . . . a very compelling argument could be made that we first need a leader.

Available for interviews to make that argument is David Armstrong, a renowned ethics commentator and CEO of Armstrong International, who contends that for this great nation to regain its greatness in the face of so much adversity right now, we need a President willing and able to lead by example.

Now, to Armstrong’s dismay, our elected “leader” has fired federal investigator, Gerald Walpin. Why is this so disconcerting? To Obama it contributed to his popularity dipping into negative territory for the first time on the Rasmussen Poll June 21.

To the rest of us, it reeks of scandal, considering Obama gave a vague reason for dismissal after Investigator General Gerald Walpin exposed Sacramento Mayor and Obama political ally Kevin Johnson for his misuse of federal funds during his time as the director of a nonprofit education group. Fired for DOING his job? Yup. But most disconcerting is because firing the independent watchdog is against the law—the same law Obama signed himself last year that prohibits the President from terminating anyone in Walpin’s position!

For a long look into this case as yet another example of the erosion of integrity in our country’s highest office, schedule an interview with David Armstrong. When your audience is asking if our leaders are failing us, or if we all just need to accept that the deception, double standards and diabolical deeds are part of politics, Armstrong offers proof through his own experience as a CEO that true success can only be achieved when those in command lead by example.

NOTE: Hosts are requested to mention the name of David Armstrong’s new book on the topic of business and personal ethics: “Hanging By A Thread: The Erosion of the Golden Rule in America.” Thank you.

ABOUT DAVID ARMSTRONG…

David M. Armstrong still believes in Camelot. An idealist and a nationally known ethicist, David is CEO of Armstrong International, a multinational corporation that runs on the honor system—with no time clocks and not even a cash register in their massive company cafeteria (employees drop cash in a big box and make their own change!).

But more than that, David is a consummate storyteller. More importantly, he has evolved corporate storytelling into a whole new style of management—a style praised by Tom Peters as the leadership answer for tormented managers who need their people to champion initiative.

David Armstrong’s stock in trade is anecdotes—stories about urgency, bravery, wisdom, core values, change management, innovation and having fun in the workplace. And when there is a breaking news story about ethics or the lack thereof, David is your ‘go to’ man to interview.

Your listeners won’t dare change their dial when listening to anecdotal stories David uses to drive home ethical points. And just where does he find stories? In the same places he suggests you look for yours—in the eyes and on the faces of the customers, partners and employees who come through your doors every day.

“Every company has a rich heritage of stories,” says David. “I’m just putting my company’s treasure to work.” While it may be true that every company has stories, not every CEO has the vision to search them out and retell them with powerful and memorable morals. That’s what this site is all about—helping you to dig into, discover and use the stories that surround you.

Today Armstrong International is a safe haven in a complex, oft confusing business world. Doing business with Armstrong is refreshingly simple and pleasant. In fact, today’s dream has become the vision of business as a series of enjoyable experiences.

ABOUT HANGING BY A THREAD…
Can you be successful at business or even running a country without losing your soul? David Armstrong thinks you can! In his new book, Hanging By A Thread: The Erosion of the Golden Rule in America. David shares real life examples of people and companies that are successful by simply following “The Golden Rule” of: “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.” In Hanging By A Thread, you will learn about Armstrong International, which is a successful, profitable company that follows the golden rule in all of its decisions for over a century, and in the process, is flourishing in an otherwise turbulent economy.

FOREWORD TO ARMSTRONG’S BOOK BY PAT WILLIAMS:

In a world that is laden with headlines citing various business executives for unethical behavior, David Armstrong has chosen to take a vastly different path when it comes to integrity – heading up a global corporate culture that is defined by following the Golden Rule.

In fact, the company motto at Armstrong International is simply put into this historical phrase – “Do unto others as you have them do unto you.”

In this powerful book, you will learn how David Armstrong has led a successful company through his many key examples that smack of integrity -- through his every-day ethical leadership style that includes the telling of vital stories which showcase the very premise of what his company stands for.

David Armstrong directs a corporate culture that is indeed unique. How about company core values that place faith in God first; family, second; and your job last? Yes, believe it or not, this is promoted and posted virtually everywhere within the organization.

This is what makes David Armstrong and the company that he leads so unique. It’s not your typical company and David Armstrong is no typical CEO – particularly, when so many corporate scandals fill the headlines today. It’s all quite refreshing to see.

In some of my previous writings, I have cited that “Integrity is King.” How true that phrase is and most fitting as it relates to David Armstrong. A person of integrity is honest and upright. His soul is not divided or compartmentalized. As the Bible tells us, “He who walks with integrity walks securely, but he who perverts his ways will become known” (Prov. 10:9, NKJV).

This book is all about integrity in the workplace and how David Armstrong exemplifies this as a leader. Armstrong does not abandon his values or principles under pressure.

Times of adversity and temptation are precisely when values and principles matter most. David Armstrong keeps his promises and fulfills his obligations. And, it’s also safe to say that Armstrong is a man who maintains his honor even when it is costly to do so.

So, if you wish to learn more about how to be a successful leader without selling your soul to do so, read on … and, be prepared to gain a very valuable lesson in just how to lead a successful company through the eyes of David Armstrong.

#24: EXPERT SHOWS CHRISTIANS HOW TO GET JOBS DURING TOUGH TIMES:Christian: Get a job!

Easier said than done. The Labor Department reports a record 6.66 million people are now collecting unemployment benefits. This marks nearly 20 straight weeks or record unemployment and a sign companies are still not doing much hiring.

As the economy continues to falter and unemployment pushes well over 12% in Michigan and nationally near the ‘depression’ level of 10%, people need a plan to overcome grave financial obstacles and the emotional costs of economic despair.

So, just how do you get hired when 200 people are all applying for a single job opening for the choir director? Or church secretary? Or even that pastor position?

PRESENTATION expert Tony Jeary’s advice? Simply, “STAND OUT” in the crowd of applicants!

During your interview with ‘Mr. Presentation™,’ Tony will give practical tips for making a positive unforgettable presentation of yourself to your perspective new boss. Here’s a single sample tip from each of Tony’s ‘Nine Fine’ categories to finesse that big job interview:

1) MENTAL ARSONEL:

Research the company or ministry’s website and specially note the priorities building your own "Mental Arsenal" and speak to those priorities during your interview presentation (a.k.a. interview).

2) TARGET POLLING:

"Target Poll" the receptionists and get insight you can use during your interview. You will likely be the only person who took the time to get the ‘inside skinny’ from the person who knows the ins and outs of the company better than anyone else. If the philosophy of the church is that the gift of tongues died with the Apostles, don’t audibly share that gift during your interview! Granted, that would only give ‘standing out in a crowd’ but not in the right way.

3) PLANNED SPONENATIETY:

Leverage "Planned Spontaneity". - be so prepared that you can be spontaneous and natural.

4) LEVERAGE YOUR 3 D OUTLINE™:
Maximize your what, your why and your how to insure your interview presentations result in a job or ministry God designed just for you. It would be a ‘lose, lose’ if you did not that that job custom created for you, and if the other person got you job and was robbed of some other job that was created just for them.

5) POWERFUL PAUSES

There is magic that comes from using the "powerful pause" after certain questions during a presentation / job interview. Remember that one ‘strategic pause’ can land that big job! Remember the biblical warning about sin abounding amidst many words. So take a ‘mircro prayer break’ (a.k.a. a pause)

6) 3 Ps

When working the phone to gain an in person interview, use what we teach top CEOs to use in their speeches: Open with the 3 Ps - purpose, process and payoff- these 3 keys can open the door to a whole new world of yes responses.

7) BUSINESS ENETERTAINMENT

Get people smiling and they will follow your lead. "Business Entertainment" is the special category of ideas on how to get people smiling and the job offers will follow- You will ‘Be the Job’ when you Present with ‘B.E’! Mega churches have learned that the whole church experience need not be boring—you too can be interesting, entertaining and spiritual, all at the same time!

8) KNOW YOUR TRUMPS

Remember "Objectives trump the Agenda" - so keep your purpose clear if you really want the job offer- presenting effectively matters - present with purpose. “All things work for the good for those who love God and for those who are called according to His PURPOSE! So, flow in your purpose—on purpose.

9) PERFECTION LOSES

Christians aren’t perfect, just perfected. And today interviewers—both in secular and religious organizations--want people to be real. Want to be your best in an interview? "Seek for Excellence, not Perfection.” Allow the One Who is perfect, lead You through His perfection. And remember not to make the perfect the enemy of the good (job). It’s a mindset that matters. Make up your mind to be yourself, the person God created you to be. Afterall, it’s your they are hiring! Be real. Be natural. Be chosen. Be that child of God he custom crafted you to be in that job custom made for you. Take it. It’s yours!

During your interview with Tony, he will not only give great job tips but he will also give practical, achievable presentation advise that can positively impact virtually every area in the lives of your audience.

Bottom line: Is it possible to get a job during down times? YES. If you properly prepare your presentation—and that presentation is YOU, the person created in the image of God for the very work He ordained us to do, be it by the sweat of our brow in a labor job, or by the mental sweat of a management job. Either way, your job is waiting for you, so Christian: take that job that is rightfully yours!

About Tony’s book…

Purpose-filled Presentations (Standard Publishing, 2009) is a dynamic new book that helps people overcome fear and present themselves in the most positive way possible whether applying for a job, meeting with friends over coffee or giving a speech to thousands of people in an arena.

We've all heard the statistics. The number one fear of most people is the fear of public speaking. It even comes in ahead of death itself. No matter how strong the desire to communicate a message to others, the proper technique is critical to achieving desired results.

Tony - Mr. Presentation™-- has personally coached the presidents of the largest companies in the world like Wal-Mart, Ford, Shell, New York Life, Samsung and Firestone. Now he brings those same presentation techniques and strategies to the church world.

Tony shares proven principles to help unlock dramatic personal and professional success every time you speak, whether from behind a podium, on the phone, or on a street corner. Whether you're a pastor, teacher, small group leader, greeter, staff member, or just interested in becoming better at personal evangelism, Tony's easy-to-follow tips will help you gain confidence, improve self-esteem, enhance credibility, and maximize response.

Chances are, if you're active in your church, at some point you'll have to talk to people. Your presentation may be informal-like greeting people at the door-or formal-like sharing your testimony before a congregation. But either way, it will make an impact. Master presenter Tony Jeary uses his expertise of coaching CEOs around the world to provide a unique, practical handbook for any teacher, preacher, leader, speaker-any Christian involved in ministry. Gain confidence, enhance your credibility, and maximize your response -prepare with purpose!


ABOUT YOUR SPEAKER, TONY JEARY…

Tony Jeary (known as Mr. Presentation™) is recognized as a leading authority on both strategy and presentation effectiveness. Tony impacts organizations from all over the globe via his private Strategic Acceleration Studio. He is the personal coach of many top CEOs from companies including Wal-Mart, Ford, Shell, Sam's Club and other Fortune 500 companies. He is a devoted husband and the father of two daughters. More info: www.PurposeFilledPresentations.com

#25: OBAMA RAMPS UP HEALTH CARE PUSH: Where is the Opposition News Coverage? Not ABC from the White House!:With Obama pulling out all the stops in ramping up his full court press on socializing healthcare, the question is: Where is the opposition news coverage???

ABC Television News relocating their broadcasting from the White House don’t look for opposition coverage there!

You certainly aren’t going to see liberal Democrats crying, “Media Foul” over the lack of opposition coverage.

So where WILL you see it?

You won’t. Unless YOU do something about it.

A panel of healthcare and financial experts are available to be YOUR Talk Show guests in the spirit of FREEDOM OF THE PRESS, to voice their collective opposition to nationalize, socialize, homogenized cradle-to-grave ObamaCare!

Our opposition healthcare panel says that Obama and the Democrats are headed to “completely destroy” the American healthcare system (See Newsmax article below.)

During your interview, each panelist explains just how bad the proposed healthcare ‘reform’ will be four our nation.

The group also shares findings from recent polls showing overwhelmingly that US citizens do NOT want to pay for the healthcare of illegal immigrants.

Four key excerpts from Rasmussen poll:

1) Eighty percent (80%) of U.S. voters oppose providing government health care coverage for illegal immigrants as part of the health care reform package that is working its way through Congress.

2) Only 11% disagree and think coverage for illegals is a good idea.

3) While most Americans support the idea of providing quality health care coverage for all Americans, they overwhelmingly oppose such a proposal if it also includes coverage for illegal immigrants. Only 20% favor a proposal for universal health care if illegal immigrants are included. Seventy percent (70%) are against such a proposal.

4) As is often the case, there’s a wide division between Mainstream America and the Political Class on this question.

Full Poll article:

http://www.rasmussenreports.com/public_content/business/healthcare/june_2009/americans_support_universal_health_coverage_but_not_if_it_covers_illegal_immigrants

What’s more, Obama shamelessly retorted to the AMA, “If we do not fix our health care system, America may go the way of G.M.” Actually, that’s the whole point. America neither wants nor needs a ‘General Motors-esque’ national bailout of heath care!

The AMA is greatly disappointed in Obama’s proposal to help pay for expanded health care coverage by cutting Medicare payments to hospitals. And The US Chamber of Commerce opposes any bill that includes 1) a new government insurance option, 2) a requirement that businesses provide health coverage to employees or pay a fine, 3) setting insurance benefits through the creation of a federal board.”

So, virtually no one—other than Obama, liberal Democrats and the liberal mainstream news media—wants socialized health care. So what are you going to do about it?

Please interview one, two, three, or all four expert guest panelists on this topic. Thank you for your gracious opposition news coverage one what may be the most important domestic policy matter of the decade.

Panelist #1: Bob Chapman

Panelist #2: Ron Greiner resides in Eastern Time.

Panelist #3: James Lansberry resides in Central Time.

Panelist #4: Bob Rinear resides in Eastern Time.

PANELIST #1: Bob Chapman:

Bob Chapman’s statement on ObamaCare: “President Obama has begun selling his healthcare program. He presents it as a reduced cost, guaranteed choice, quality plan for all. The reality is government programs will result in higher costs, no choices and inferior care. The legislative vehicle for this health care deception is planned to be in the budget reconciliation bill, which requires only 51 Senate votes for passage instead of the 60 needed to authorize new programs.

The Kennedy Plan promises that all Americans will have health care, employers will have to contribute to the costs. A government program will subsidize premiums for people up to 500% of the poverty level, that is $110,000 for a family of 4, and private insurers will have to pay out a specified percentage of their premium revenues in benefits. There is no provision for funding the program, so it looks like perpetual deficit spending to cover the costs.

Healthy people will be forced to pay more for their insurance in order to subsidize those not as healthy, those who have ruined their bodies and minds and the old.

Fines will be imposed if you do not provide health care for employees. That means the employers will not insure employees and pay the cheaper fine, or just go out of business.

That means 100 million people happy with their programs will have to take an inferior government plan. Then, of course, is the bureaucracy, which dictate treatment and who will live and who will die.

Part of the proposal includes a proposal to tax these health benefits with current employer-based health insurance.

We are promised cost savings by putting all Americans’ health records on a uniform computer system, which will be eventually mandatory for all countries. These totalitarian controls will be forced on all doctors and terminate all medical privacy.

Healthcare will be rationed letting bureaucrats decide who gets treated and how and who will be allowed to die. Seventy percent of medical lifetime costs occur in the last year of life. We already experienced this with a doctor and I asked him which side of his head he’d like his brains blown out of.

Part of the legislation would provide healthcare for illegal aliens, which 80% of American voters are opposed too.

It would be far more constructive to begin to fix the problems in Medicare and Social Security then try to create an expensive new system.

On the other side of the spectrum are those who want a single-payer-approach like those used in Europe. Congress has said they won’t even consider it, this in spite of the fact that any other plan will leave the big insurance companies in charge and keep hurting patients. Someone should tell these poor ignorant souls that both parties are promoting corporatist fascism.

The real deep-seated problem is that the health insurance companies and related industries are major campaign contributors to members of Congress on both sides of the aisle. Senator Grassley is a good example. Since 2005, he has collected $1.3 million in donations from industries related to the health insurance debate.

In a different perspective on healthcare the US will spend 15.4% of GDP both state and private. With that it gets 2.6 doctors per 1,000 people; 3.3 hospital beds and its people live to 78.2 years.

The question is how do we cut down medical costs? There has been some pressure to do so, but costs go relentlessly higher. Senators and congressmen receive hundreds of millions of dollars from the industry to continue their gravy train. Then there are the investors, bureaucrats and preexisting conditions.

Mr. Obama doesn’t have the answers and neither does the industry.” –Bob Chapman

ABOUT ROBERT J. CHAPMAN:

Mr. Chapman is 73 years old. He was born in Boston, MA and attended Northeastern University majoring in business management. He spent three years in the U. S. Army Counterintelligence, mostly in Europe. He speaks German and French and is conversant in Spanish. He lived in Europe for six years, off and on, three years in Africa, one year in Canada and another year in the Bahamas.

Mr. Chapman became a stockbroker in 1960 and retired in 1988. For 18 of those years he owned his own brokerage firm. He was probably the largest gold and silver stockbroker in the world during that period. When he retired he had over 6,000 clients.

From 1962 through 1976 he specialized in South African gold shares. He and his family lived in Salisbury, Rhodesia (now Harare, Zimbabwe) and Johannesburg, South Africa from 1970 to 1973. During that time he did a great deal of further study into the South African mining industry.

Mr. Chapman belonged to The Traders Association for 25 years. He did all his own trading. During his South African years some was done directly through Johannesburg, but 95% was done through London brokerage firms. Hence, he has extensive contacts, both in London and on the Continent.

Starting in 1967 Mr. Chapman began writing articles on business, finance, economics and politics having been printed and reprinted over the years in over 200 publications. He owned and wrote the Gary Allen Report, which had 30,000 subscribers.

He currently is owner and editor of The International Forecaster, a compendium of information on business, finance, economics and social and political issues worldwide, which reaches 10,000 investors and brokers monthly directly, and parts of his publication are picked up by 60 different websites weekly exposing his ideas to over 10 million investors a week.

In 1976, after the Soweto riots, Mr. Chapman began buying North American shares exclusively for his clients. Up to that point only a handful of American and Canadian issues interested him, due to the high dividends the South African shares had paid out over the years. Between 1976 and 1988 his business surged from 1,000 to 6,000 clients, so the bulk of his business ended up being Vancouver Stock Exchange issues. For this reason he is very conversant with the quality of management, geologists, properties and traders on today’s North American scene. He is well known.

From 1976 to present he has spoken and given workshops at over 200 business conferences worldwide, and has been on radio and TV thousands of times. Until his retirement he was always judged by the attendees to be one of the top three speakers and never once was lower than first in workshops due to his vast knowledge of the mining business and his grasp of worldwide financial markets and political scenes.

In June of 1991, at the request of business associates, and due to retirement boredom, he began writing the International Forecaster.

Over the past 40 years, Bob Chapman has immersed himself in the study of world politics and economics. His articles have run in more than 200 publications. His newsletter, "THE INTERNATIONAL FORECASTER,” has active subscribers all across world. Bob Chapman has conducted hundreds of workshops at business conferences and has been a featured guest on hundreds of radio and television programs.

Some of Bob Chapman’s uncanny predictions include:

* Called the top of the market in April 2000.
* Predicted 9/11 or an event like that, nine months early, within 33 days of it actually occurring.
* Predicted the invasion of both Afghanistan and Iraq two years before they happened.


PANELIST #2: RON GREINER: Founder of Insurance Processing Corporation

Consumer Healthcare expert Ron Greiner of www.save101.com says the bitter taste of Democrat healthcare pill that politicians like Ted Kennedy are attempting to shove down our throats is nothing more than an over-priced government HMO and hardly the best available alternative when solutions such as tax-free health savings accounts (HSAs) exist. Discusses the Republican antidote to ObamaCare: Health Savings Accounts (HSAs), a win–win for US citizens, corporations and government. Health Savings Accounts” (HSAs) were quietly introduced by the Republican Party years ago and they have been working, although most people don’t know they exist, no less that they are available in many parts of the nation already. HSAs are Ron’s ‘antidote’ for socialized medicine.

“At the core of the newly proposed (AHIP) mandate is that all Americans must buy health insurance. Unfortunately, the government will be doing the selling so there will be no managed competition among agents. And we all know how the consumer fares when there’s no competition. Worse yet, the ‘community rating’ concept means there will be no medical underwriting. So, the young and healthy will pay a lot more to spread the risk,” said Greiner.

ABOUT RON GREINER…

Ron Greiner started in the insurance industry in 1987 as an agent for a large national insurance agency. In 1993 he started his own insurance agency in Omaha, Nebraska selling health and life insurance. His job functions included recruiting and training insurance agents. In 1994 and 1995 Greiner’s agency became the largest in the United States selling health insurance for Time Insurance Company, America’s oldest health insurance company. Consumers know Time Insurance Company as Assurant Health.

Medical Savings Accounts (MSAs) were signed into law in August of 1996 as a federal test for self-employed people. Greiner immediately saw the advantages of America’s first tax-free savings account and he enrolled the first MSA in the USA in October 1996. Congress renamed MSAs to Health Savings Accounts (HSA) and made them available to all Americans, under the age of 65, in 2004. For the last 12 years Greiner’s agency, Insurance Processing Corporation (IPC) has focused entirely on enrolling consumers into tax-free MSAs and HSAs and the accompanying low cost health insurance.

Greiner also had the first press release in America on Medicare’s new option - tax free MSAs. He has senior clients in Medicare’s MSA program since the first day the program was available, 1/1/2007. The MSA in Medicare has gotten very little attention from the Nation’s press. With this option Medicare pays for the senior’s health insurance then makes a deposit into the senior’s MSA at the bank, all tax-free.

Before entering the insurance industry Greiner was the Director of six Richard Simmons Anatomy Asylums in Denver, Colorado. These facilities had 300 employees and 30,000 members. He learned about weight loss and exercise as a student. Greiner went to Iowa State University on a wrestling scholarship. Greiner and his agency are based in Tampa Bay, Florida. IPC services clients nationally with online enrollments at www.save101.com.

PANELIST #3: JAMES LANSBERRY:

Yes, there is a better way and James Lansberry, president of the Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, would be delighted to share with your audience a healthcare concept called “Shared Care,” that has been working successfully in the private sector for decades.

"The AMA objections to national healthcare is good news for those joining in opposition against an expansion of government and a further limiting of freedom in the health care industry. The AMA opposing a government competing ‘option’ will help the opposition to the plan, and be better for patients,” stated James Lansberry.

Shared Care is not health insurance but it provides medical care for thousands at a mere fraction of the cost of traditional health insurance and for pennies on the dollar compared to the grossly inefficient government healthcare plans. Essentially the way Shared Care works is that people of Faith and embracing traditional values, agree to live their lives in ‘low risk’ fashion, meaning not engaging in dangerous lifestyles of sexual promiscuity, etc., and to attend church at least twice a month. Remarkably when this criterion is met, the vector of healthcare expense plummets, allowing each member to help meet the needs of others, thus the phrase: Shared Care.

Stated Lansberry, “Health care and bioethical issues may be the most important public policy issues facing governments on both the federal and state levels. The decisions that are made in these arenas will have a profound effect on every family in the country. Often the politicians talk of the importance of issues like portability and affordability in health care. Health care sharing ministries offer a viable, vital, faith based health care solution that is both affordable and completely untied to employment. And how much more caring can health care get than real people helping one another?”

In addition to being the president of Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, James Lansberry is vice president of Samaritan Ministries International, a health care sharing ministry representing more than 13,400 households in all 50 states. Health care sharing ministries provide a unique way for followers of Jesus Christ to meet one another’s health care needs without using health insurance. Other people with affinity groups might consider grouping together in similar shared care concepts. Of course, groups widely known for actively engaging in ‘progressive’ lifestyles proven to be far more dangerous than in mainstream communities, would likely have larger ‘per person’ medical needs to share within their alternative community.

ABOUT JAMES LANSBERRY AND SAMARITAN MINISTRIES…

James Lansberry, president of the Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, is a Peoria-based expert available to comment on a variety of issues related to health care, including alternatives to traditional health insurance, the economics of health care, health care public policy, health care and tax policy, and the health care industry in general.

Lansberry also is vice president of Peoria-based Samaritan Ministries International. He is a frequent radio guest and an occasional preacher/speaker at churches and conferences. His articles have been published in Heritage Forum, the Journal of Modern Ministry, and Every Thought Captive. He has been interviewed by the CBS Evening News, U.S. News and World Report and the Washington Post.

The Alliance, with offices at 2400 W. Altorfer Drive, Peoria, was formed in 2007 to track and address public policy developments that could affect member ministries, which include Samaritan and Medi-Share. The two ministries provide health care cost-sharing arrangements among persons of similar and sincerely held beliefs.

Additional information on the Web: www.healthcaresharing.org or at: www.samaritanministries.org

PANELIST #4: BOB RINEAR:

Bob Rinear Statement on ObamaCare: “Since when did America go from giving a helping hand, to giving hand outs? Most of the people we poll on a daily basis realize that the word "illegal" means not legal. Yet because of our crooked politicians looking for votes, they stomp on what true Americans want, and grant healthcare and drivers licenses to illegals. Is there any wonder why the Southern California hospital situation is dire? Of course not, the illegals us the emergency rooms and cannot be turned away. Our Healthcare system is already on the ropes, and Americans are dead set against spending their tax money on people that snuck into the country illegally. But since all our current administration cares about is votes, they pander to everyone despite the costs and the desire of their constituents.” --Bob Rinear

ABOUT BOB… Robert Rinear’s entrepreneurial roots stem from his early years in the jewelry industry. Once immersed in the intricacies of the equity markets, it didn't take Mr. Rinear long to realize that he had a knack for predicting the ebb and flow of stock and options markets. Over time Bob developed his personally successful methods of calculating stock and treasury movements into a workable platform that others could follow. As an outgrowth of this system of astute observation grew his newsletter, the "Financial Intelligence Report” and the his current company, "InvestYourself," that specializes in helping investors of every experience level gain investment knowledge of real estate, stocks, bonds, commodities and general finances.


THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

Newsmax.com/ June 12, 2009

Rep. Shadegg: Obama Jeopardizing Healthcare

Rep. John Shadegg tells Newsmax that proposals backed by President Barack Obama and Democrats in Congress could "completely destroy" the American healthcare system.

The Arizona Republican also said the Obama administration is promoting "massive state involvement in the economy," which will be a "disaster."

Newsmax.TV's Kathleen Walter asked Shadegg whether people in Arizona are concerned about illegal immigration and the dramatic rise in drug violence in his border state.

"People all over Arizona are deeply concerned about all crime related to illegal immigration," said Shadegg, who represents a Phoenix-area district.

"But having said that, the people in Arizona recognize that there is a role to be played by immigrants from south of our border in our economy. There are in fact jobs, for example in our agricultural industry and in other industries that I think the majority of people in Arizona realize won't get done if there is no guest worker program, and no ability for someone from outside the country to come here and work.

"I personally support a guest worker program where people come but come lawfully, and supplement our economy. I don't support giving someone who got here illegally an automatic path to citizenship. I don't support an amnesty that says we are going to suddenly recognize all of them and let them become citizens. I've always argued for a middle ground on this issue."

Walter noted that Shadegg has introduced the Healthcare Choice Act and asked for his overall views on the issue.

"I really think the healthcare issue is the single most important issue facing the nation right now," the congressman declared.

"I notice that my colleagues on the Democratic side of the aisle have a very very extensive and shocking agenda, an agenda that will move us as a nation away from very fundamental principles.

"I think we have an administration that wants to restructure the government and its role with the citizens dramatically.

"I think the administration believes in a much larger role for the government, and I think it wants to recast America much along the lines of a European socialist [nation], with massive state involvement in the economy. I think that's a disaster...

"Americans need to understand that the reforms being proposed by Democrats in Washington and by President Obama on health care hold the potential to completely destroy what is great about the American health care system. And that is choice and individual control.

"I do not think that the American people want to go to a government-run, one-size-fits-all and the government rations care type of system . . . Actually, most of the countries that have a socialist form or a single-payer form of health care are moving away from that, having recognized that it's failed."

Walter asked Shadegg what he believes will be the outcome of the healthcare debate.
The outcome "depends on the willingness of the president and congressional Democrats to compromise," he said.

"Right now they're basically saying it's their way or the highway. They want to put in place a government plan, and that government plan will cause the private insurance market to wither and go away very, very quickly.

"If they don't give up that demand, I don't see how we can come to a compromise."

Shadegg also said Obama was "not strong enough" in talking about the dangers of radical Islam during his June 4 speech in Cairo. But he called the speech a "stunning step forward by an American president to reach out and open the door" to improved U.S.-Muslim relations. And Shadegg called Obama's statement that no nation should decide what other nations should have nuclear weapons "fundamentally wrong."

Editor’s Note: To see the full John Shadegg interview, Go Here Now.

© 2009 Newsmax. All rights reserved.

#26: NORTH KOREA MIGHT FIRE MISSILE AT HAWAII JULY 4 (Maj. General Curry resides in DC/Eastern Time.):North Korea might launch a missile at Hawaii on July 4, 2009, according to Japanese intelligence officials. (See Daily Mail/London article below.), three years to the day they launched their first Taepodong-2 missile on July 4, 2006.

With the finger on North Korea's volatile nuclear arsenal shifting from an erratic dictator who is partially recovered from a stroke, to someone who is half the age of President Obama, here’s the big question:

Is this nuclear bluster simply the birth pangs of a dictatorship transition from Kim Jong Il to his 26-year-old son, Kim Jong-un? Or is this a real threat? According to the Washington Post, Kim Jr is a youth with a reputation as a heavy drinker. If this is true, to what degree could the well being of Hawaiian citizens hang in the balance of a hangover?

Perhaps they can take comfort in knowing that experts say the missile only has a 4000 mile range, a tad bid shy of reaching Hawaii, 4500 miles away from the North Korean launch pad.

Ah, not so fast. Wasn’t it these same experts who didn’t even know Pakistan (or was it India?) had a nuclear bomb until after their test detonation? So, how do we know these ‘experts’ are accurate in their math? After all, if their margin of error is only off 10%, that’s enough to reach Hawaii. Or if the North Koreans have recently tweaked their missile, unbeknownst to US, their new improved model might just make it.

US Major General Jerry Curry (ret.) is your expert to discuss this potential powder keg in North Korea. Jerry enlisted in the US Army in 1951 at age 17, when the US was fighting, what foolishly is called the "Forgotten War." What many people have forgotten is that it was a DEMOCRAT President who called on the United Nations to deploy armies to thwart North Korea's invasion of South Korea at a time when the world was already war weary from World War 2.

General Curry's career ascended from Korea through Viet Nam to being Special Assistant to President Reagan’s Defense Secretary Caspar Weinberger, whose final book, "The Next War" predicted a scenario in which North Korea would resume aggression against South Korea, providing a diversion which would invite China to move against US ally, Taiwan.

General Curry opposed General Colin Powell's endorsement of candidate Barack Obama, questioning his capacity to lead as Commander-in-Chief.

Curry contends we know that "The Truman Doctrine" and "The Bush Doctrine" claimed a simple truth: That the US would commit its military force to combat any armed aggression against the US and its international interests, but "The Obama Doctrine" appears to be: "Let's Talk it Over,” with North Korea, a charter member of the "Axis of Evil.”

A few weeks ago North Korea said it would no longer recognize the armistice which halted combat in the Korean War, effectively declaring itself at war again with South Korea, exacerbated by its six missile launches and nuclear tests in violation of its obligations under the six nation talks.

What does this all mean to US? And what might we expect to see come of the new transition of power? Interview General Curry to hear what he has to say.

ABOUT MAJOR GENERAL JERRY CURRY…

Major Gen. Jerry R. Curry (US Army Ret.) Ph.D. is a decorated combat veteran, Army Aviator, Paratrooper and Ranger who has served his country both in the military and as a Presidential appointee in three administrations. He served as Deputy Assistant Secretary of Defense in the Carter Administration, as Press Secretary to Secretary of Defense Caspar Weinberger in the Reagan Administration, and as Administrator of NHTSA for President George H. W. Bush.

A munitions expert, General Curry was the top ranking officer overseeing all equipment at the Military Proving Ground at Aberdeen, Maryland.

But Jerry Curry was not born with a silver spoon in his mouth. Far from it, Jerry was a steel mill worker from the small town of Liberty, Pennsylvania who enlisted in the Army as a young private and rose to the rank of major general, a feat almost unheard of.

His recent book, From Private to General – An African American Soldier Rises Through the Ranks (Believe Books, 2007), is a gritty true-life story of an African American soldier determined to succeed in a white-dominated military culture, facing the barriers of racism and elitism without compromising his values or becoming a victim. He rose through the ranks by distinguishing himself in intense challenges of combat and in military command assignments and by surviving the political infighting that is endemic in the military.

Curry shares fresh insights on America’s role in Vietnam, achieving racial harmony, challenges in the military, leadership principles and America’s role in the world today. His insights into politics and military strategy are particularly relevant to the current situation in Iraq and the lessons in leadership that he presents are of timeless benefit. His descriptions of combat in Vietnam are particularly fascinating.

Gen. Curry on CNN:

http://www.special-guests.com/guests/data/video/Curry Jerry CNN inteview 07-25-08.mov


MAJ. GENERAL JERRY CURRY’S AREAS OF EXPERTISE:

Korea
Vietnam
Military issues
National Security
Racism in politics and the military
The role of America in the world today
Terrorism – the very real threat to America
Leadership in the military and political arenas

SUGGESTED INTERVIEW QUESTIONS FOR MILITARY/POLITICAL EXPERT MAJ. GENERAL JERRY CURRY:

1) How serious is the nuclear threat from North Korea? Same question regarding Iran & Pakistan?

2) What do we know about the new 26-year-old No. Korean dictator, Kim Jong-un?

3) Is it true the North Korean nuclear missiles can reach Alaska, and soon Calif.?

4) Since we haven’t had a serious terror attack on American soil since 2001, just how serious is the terrorist threat to American today? (General Curry has experienced terrorism first hand as a target for assassination during his distinguished military career.)

5) What should we expect from our leadership on Capitol Hill and the White House in protecting America from terrorism?

6) How ready are we to deal with a massive terror attack?

7) How much like Vietnam is the current Afghanistan/Pakistan conflict? Will America ever be able to ‘win’ this current quagmire?

8) What is the role of politicians and what is the role of the military leadership in bringing the Iraq, Afghanistan and Korean wars to a conclusion?

9) What looming threats do we face as a nation?

10) Tell us a little bit about your book, “From Private to General”?

11) How may our listeners get a copy of your book?

12) Is there anything else I missed that you would like to address?

THE DAILY MAIL/ LONDON, June 18, 2009

Japan warns that North Korea may fire missile at U.S. on Independence Day
By Mail Foreign Service

North Korea may launch a long-range ballistic missile towards Hawaii on American Independence Day, according to Japanese intelligence officials.

The missile, believed to be a Taepodong-2 with a range of up to 4,000 miles, would be launched in early July from the Dongchang-ni site on the north-western coast of the secretive country.

Intelligence analysts do not believe the device would be capable of hitting Hawaii's main islands, which are 4,500 miles from North Korea.

Details of the launch came from the Japan's best-selling newspaper, Yomiuri Shimbun.
Both Japanese intelligence and U.S. reconnaissance satellites have collated information pointing to the launch, according to the report.

This is North Korea's Taepodong-2 missile which has a range of 4,000 miles. Intelligence analysts do not believe it would be capable of hitting Hawaii which is 4,500 miles away

It is understood the communist state is likely to fire the missile between July 4 and 8. A launch on July 4 would coincide with Independence Day in the States.It would also be the 15th anniversary of North Korean president Kim Il-Sung's death.

The Japanese newspaper also noted that North Korea had fired its first Taepodong-2 missile on July 4, 2006.

Officials had initially believed that North Korea might attempt to launch a similar device towards either Japan's Okinawa island, Guam or Hawaii.

But the ministry concluded launches toward Okinawa or Guam were 'extremely unlikely' because the first-stage booster could drop into waters off China, agitating Beijing, or hit western Japanese territory.

If the missile were fired in the direction of Hawaii, the booster could drop in the Sea of Japan.

News of the launch would put 'enormous military pressure on the United States,' the Yomiuri said, citing the ministry report.



A spokesman for the Japanese Defense Ministry declined to comment on the report.
South Korea's Defense Ministry and the National Intelligence Service - the country's main spy agency - said they could not confirm it.

Tension on the divided Korean peninsula has risen markedly since the North, led by Kim Jong-il, conducted two nuclear tests this year in defiance of repeated international warnings.

The first rocket, fired in April, was widely seen as a disguised long-range missile test. A second launch came on May 25.

U.S. satellite intelligence has shown that a missile launch pad had been erected at Dongchang-ri on North Korea's north-west coast.

General James Cartwright, vice chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, said it would take at least three to five years for North Korea to pose a real threat to the U.S. west coast.
The UN Security Council last week authorised member states to inspect North Korean sea, air and land cargo, requiring them to seize and destroy goods shipped that violate the sanctions against arms export.

On Saturday, in response to this declaration Pyongyang said it would bolster its nuclear programs and threatened war.

Growing tensions come as arms-watchdog the International Crisis Group (ICG) claimed North Korea has several thousand tonnes of chemical weapons it could mount on missiles.

The report from the non-government organisation said they believed the North's army have about 2,500 to 5,000 tonnes of chemical weapons which include mustard gas, sarin and other deadly nerve agents.

ICG also also warned South Korea may become a target.

'If there is an escalation of conflict and if military hostilities break out, there is a risk that they could be used. In conventional terms, North Korea is weak and they feel they might have to resort to using those,' said Daniel Pinkston, the ICG's representative in Seoul.

The North has been working on chemical weapons for decades and can deliver them through long-range artillery directed on Seoul which is home to about half of South Korea's 49 million people and via missiles that could hit all of the country.

© 2009 Associated Newspapers Ltd

#27: ABC TURNS NEWS OVER TO WHITE HOUSE! “Free” Press now Broadcasting from ObamaNation HQ:ABC Television News is moving into The White House in what is widely viewed as a possible news coverage ‘dive’ for heavyweight contender Obama in the great health care debate.

Critics of the move contend that there will be little, if any, opposition coverage on the health care topic.

A dynamic panel of three experts is available to discuss this issue on your Talk Show, should you ‘dare’ broadcast any opposition to ObamaCare! (ABC’s Charles Gibson pictured giving highly favorable coverage of then Senator Obama; how much more favorable can it get? Watch.)

Panelist #1: Bob Chapman is available virtually any time.
Panelist #2: Bob Rinear resides in Eastern Time.
Panelist #3: Ron Greiner resides in Eastern Time.

EXPERT GUEST/PANELIST #1: BOB CHAPMAN, editor of The International Forecaster, commenting on the Obama takeover of ABC News, said, “Here we are back in 1984. George Orwell would be proud of the group in the White House. We are now to have totally managed news by ABC directly from inside the Oval Office and the Blue Room. ABC will concoct a primetime special, “Prescription for America,” excluding any opposing voices, to sell the 48% of functionally illiterate Americans, on socialized medicine and Euthanasia. This just shows you how captive the media really is. For any challenging views to go unaired smacks of dictatorial government, not democracy. This is nothing more than a glorified infomercial – and should be funded by the Democratic National Committee, not by American taxpayers! This is the ultimate insult to freedom loving US citizens.” –Bob Chapman

ABOUT BOB CHAPMAN…

Bob Chapman is founder and editor of The International Forecaster, a compendium of information on business, finance, economics and social and political issues worldwide, which reaches 10,000 investors and brokers monthly directly, and portions of his publication are picked up by 60 other financial publications, resulting in an aggregate number of weekly readers in the range of 10 million investors. Bob spent three years in the U. S. Army Counterintelligence, mostly in Europe. He speaks German and French and is conversant in Spanish. He lived in Europe for six years, off and on, three years in Africa, one year in Canada and another year in the Bahamas. Mr. Chapman became a stockbroker from 1960 to 1988. For 18 of those years he owned his own brokerage firm with over 6,000 clients.

EXPERT GUEST/PANELIST #2: BOB RINEAR: As editor/founder of The Intelligence Report, Bob Rinear knows full well the implications of the White House takeover of ABC News. Stated Rinear, “For years we have been explaining to our audience that the major media is not the unbiased and ‘fair’ reporting that they proclaim. Big media is owned by big corporations, and their editors are directed by those corporate elites to put out the news that favors their pet agendas. Nothing states this case more clearly than ABC's invite to basically do an info-mercial from the white house selling Obama's healthcare agenda. It is no secret that big media leans heavily towards liberal agenda's and Obama has been called by some in the media as a "God". This move by ABC will be seen by many without the time nor the inclination to discover the downside of this healthcare plan will accept it as "fair and balanced" reporting of an important issue. Nothing could be further from the truth, and this simply walks us another mile down the path of forced socialism.” - Bob Rinear

ABOUT BOB RINEAR…

Robert Rinear is editor of the Financial Intelligence Report. Bob’s entrepreneurial roots stem from his early years in the jewelry industry. Once immersed in the intricacies of the equity markets, it didn't take Mr. Rinear long to realize that he had a knack for predicting the ebb and flow of stock and options markets.

Over time Bob developed his personally successful methods of calculating stock and treasury movements into a workable platform that others could follow.

As an outgrowth of this system of astute observation grew his newsletter, the "Financial Intelligence Report” and the his current company, "InvestYourself," that specializes in helping investors of every experience level gain investment knowledge of real estate, stocks, bonds, commodities and general finances.

EXPERT GUEST/PANELIST #3: RON GRIENER of Save101.com says that the new White House address for ABC Television News will be nothing more than another forum for Obama to sell sell gobbledygook to the American public.

Greiner waxed eloquent regarding the specific ‘sell job’, saying, “In the Senate, Republicans expressed alarm at the shape of legislation being developed by Senators Edward M. Kennedy of Massachusetts and Christopher J. Dodd of Connecticut, both Democrats. Senator Orrin G. Hatch, Republican of Utah, called Obama’s health bill ‘The most liberal bunch of gobbledygook I’ve seen in my life — a complete liberal mishmash of ideas.’ Now President Obama has to try and sell this trillion dollar gobbledygook. All we know for sure is that Charlie Gibson won’t ask President Obama about tax free Health Savings Accounts (HSA), the centerpiece of the RNC’s health care reform agenda. Tax free HSAs are combined with low cost HSA insurance. TIME Insurance Company reported that 43% of all HSAs had no previous health insurance. It’s clear that HSAs get uninsured Americans insurance. HSAs are magical. A 30-year-old male can get HSA insurance for $60 a month in most states. If he saves $3,000 in his HSA at the bank he will save $840 (28%) in federal income tax alone. In other words, he saves more in taxes than the cost of his insurance. Rest assured, President Obama’s teleprompter won’t say, save premium, eliminate taxes and build wealth.”

Ron Greiner enrolled America’s 1st HSA in 1996. HSAs are line 25 on the front page of your IRS 1040. HSAs are the 1st account with tax free deposits, growth and withdrawals. Total tax freedom. Greiner says, “There have been thousands of articles in the print media about the Democrats’ plans for health care reform and none on the RNC’s solutions and the tax free HSA. The HSA is the only tool Republicans have to stop a massive government takeover of the health care system. When the public understands that their choice is the DNC’s gobbledygook or the RNC’s total tax freedom with HSAs, I’m betting on the HSA.”


ABOUT RON GREINER…

Ron Greiner started in the insurance industry in 1987 as an agent for a large national insurance agency. In 1993 he started his own insurance agency in Omaha, Nebraska selling health and life insurance. His job functions included recruiting and training insurance agents. In 1994 and 1995 Greiner’s agency became the largest in the United States selling health insurance for Time Insurance Company, America’s oldest health insurance company. Consumers know Time Insurance Company as Assurant Health.

Medical Savings Accounts (MSAs) were signed into law in August of 1996 as a federal test for self-employed people. Greiner immediately saw the advantages of America’s first tax-free savings account and he enrolled the first MSA in the USA in October 1996. Congress renamed MSAs to Health Savings Accounts (HSA) and made them available to all Americans, under the age of 65, in 2004. For the last 12 years Greiner’s agency, Insurance Processing Corporation (IPC) has focused entirely on enrolling consumers into tax-free MSAs and HSAs and the accompanying low cost health insurance.

Greiner also had the first press release in America on Medicare’s new option - tax free MSAs. He has senior clients in Medicare’s MSA program since the first day the program was available, 1/1/2007. The MSA in Medicare has gotten very little attention from the Nation’s press. With this option Medicare pays for the senior’s health insurance then makes a deposit into the senior’s MSA at the bank, all tax-free.

Before entering the insurance industry Greiner was the Director of six Richard Simmons Anatomy Asylums in Denver, Colorado. These facilities had 300 employees and 30,000 members. He learned about weight loss and exercise as a student. Greiner went to Iowa State University on a wrestling scholarship.

Greiner and his agency are based in Tampa Bay, Florida. IPC services clients nationally with online enrollments at www.save101.com

#28: GUN RIGHTS GROUND SWELL: Bent of Democratic Congress Feeding Old-Fashioned Backlash (Guest reside in Pacific and Eastern Time.):The Founding Fathers have done it again. Just when it was feeling like the anti-gun Democrats in Congress were building an unsettling momentum, Montana has led a number of state legislatures in a ground swell reach for a 10th Amendment trump card.

Offering their expert point of view on this recent unexpected shift in the gun rights battle is Alan Gottlieb, Chairman of the Citizens Committee for the Right to Keep and Bear Arms, and Larry Pratt, Executive Director of the Gun Owners of America (GOA). Each is available individually or together as a more dynamic panel.

Alan Gottlieb is a refreshing voice, a highly educated and perceptive man of the people, who is very close to the ebb and flow of the gun rights issue, enabling him to offer your audience a unique insight on legislative and regulatory movements that are critical, even if sometimes relegated to the back pages of newspapers.

CBS News’ Political Hotsheet featured Alan Gottliebs comments regarding the Montana law: “It's keeping gun owners across the country excited and energized. It's a way of taking the offensive when normally gun owners are on the defensive." (see article below.)

Gottlieb is prepared to discuss the cavalry-like charge led by the State of Montana to reclaim its 10th Amendment rights and beat back the federal government’s increasingly intrusive gun control. Montana’s recent passing of the Firearms Freedom Act declares that guns made and retained inside state lines are not subject to federal gun regulations.

As Alaska and Texas follow suit, and 15 other states start kicking around similar legislation in their capitals, Gottlieb points out the inspiration these state lawmakers are sparking among disgruntled citizens across the country.

“When it comes to gun control,” says Gottlieb, “Congress seems to think it can legislate anything it wants. Well, the states are finally starting to say ‘enough is enough’,” reclaiming their state rights in a way that could lead to the attack of a century’s worth of federal court decisions.

Larry Pratt is a no-nonsense leader of a no-nonsense GOA organization that works tirelessly to protect the 2nd Amendment rights of its members and all U.S. citizens. He’s available to discuss the states’ rights surge, as well as the long-fought victory his organization recently helped win in the Senate.

Said Pratt, "Too many judges have invented a fantasy out of whole cloth that it is up to the Supreme Court to decide whether the Second Amendment binds the states as well as the federal government. There is nothing for the courts to do. This issue was decided at the time of the adoption of the Fourteenth Amendment. One of the major purposes for the amendment was to stop southern states from using gun control laws to disarm newly-freed slaves. This fantasy is one of the reasons that Montana's Firearms Freedom Act is long overdue."

Behind Republican Tom Coburn (OK), the Senate, in spite of a Democrat majority, voted convincingly to repeal the gun ban on National Park Service (NPS) and National Wildlife Refuge System territories. While this would in no way change or override state or local gun laws that may already be in place in such areas, the importance is, according to Pratt, that “it will allow the laws enacted by legislators, not bureaucrats or judges, to govern firearms possession.”

So, what does all this really mean? Well, the big picture could be even bigger than your audience may realize. Schedule an interview with Alan Gottlieb and/or Larry Pratt to uncover how these developments—particularly with respect to the states feeling their 10th Amendment oats—can really impact the gun rights issue and possibly even change decades of federal law.

ABOUT YOUR EXPERT GUEST, ALAN GOTTLIEB:
Dynamic, articulate and diverse are three accurate descriptions of Alan Gottlieb. A Nuclear Engineering graduate of the University of Tennessee, Alan also attended the Institute on Comparative Political & Economic Systems at Georgetown University.
He is recognized as a member of the working press, maintaining active membership in the Outdoor Writers Association of America. His articles have appeared in periodicals including USA Today, Seattle Times, Washington Post, Atlanta Journal-Constitution, San Francisco Examiner, Cincinnati Inquirer, Orlando Sentinel, and Chicago Tribune.
Alan is the Publisher of Gun Week and The Gottlieb-Tartaro Report. He is the Chairman of the Citizens Committee for the Right to Keep and Bear Arms, Founder of the Second Amendment Foundation, serves on the Board of Directors of the American Conservative Union, President of the Center for the Defense of Free Enterprise, President of the American Political Action Committee and President of NoInternetTax.org.
His handiwork has received notice in the New York Times, Washington Post, Cleveland Plain Dealer, Time, People, Rolling Stone, National Review and Outside magazine.
Alan has received the prestigious Golden Eagle Award from the American Federation of Police, and was commended by the Kentucky House of Representatives for his “outstanding leadership in preserving our American heritage of freedom.” He is listed in Who’s Who in America, Who’s Who in the World and Who’s Who in American Politics.
Alan has appeared on over 3,700 TV and radio talk shows, including the McNeil-Lehrer News Hour, ABC’s 20/20, The Michael Reagan Show, PBS All Things Considered, CNN Crossfire, Fox TV’s Crier Report, NBC Today Show, The O’Reilly Factor, ESPN, Larry King Live, CNN Special Reports, Hannity & Combs, CNN All Politics, Fox News Channel and Good Morning America.
Alan is President of Merril Associates, a noted direct-response advertising agency specializing in direct mail, fund raising and public relations. He is also President of Merril Press, a non-fiction book publishing company.
Alan is also President of radio stations KBNP in Portland, Oregon, KITZ in Seattle, Washington, KGTK in Olympia, Washington, and KSBN in Spokane, Washington and former Chairman of the Talk America Radio Network and former President of the Universal Talk Network.
In addition, Alan is the author of seventeen books including Politically Correct Guns, Trashing the Economy and She Took a Village: The Unauthorized Biography of Hillary Clinton, Alan Gottlieb's Celebrity Address Book, Double Trouble: Daschle and Gephart Capitol Hill Bullies, and Gun Rights Affirmed, America Fights Back: Armed Self-defense in a Violent Age and These Dogs Don’t Hunt: The Democrats’ War on Guns.
Alan currently resides in Bellevue, Washington with his wife Julianne, his daughters Amy Jean, Sarah Merril, and Alexis Hope and son Andrew Michael.
ABOUT YOUR EXPERT GUEST, LARRY PRATT:

Larry Pratt has been Executive Director of Gun Owners of America for 30 years. GOA is a national membership organization of 300,000 Americans dedicated to promoting their second amendment freedom to keep and bear arms.

GOA lobbies for the pro-gun position in Washington and is involved in firearm issues in the states. GOA’s work includes providing legal assistance to those involved in lawsuits with the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, the federal firearms law enforcement agency.

Pratt has appeared on numerous national radio and TV programs such as NBC’s Today Show, CBS’ Good Morning America, CNN’s Crossfire and Larry King Live, Fox’s Hannity & Colmes, MSNBC’s Phil Donahue and Dan Abrams show and many others.

Larry Pratt has debated Congressmen James Traficant, Jr. (D-OH), Charles Rangel (D-NY), Rep. Carolyn McCarthy (D-NY), Senator Frank Lautenberg (D-NJ), and Vice President Al Gore, among others.

Larry’s columns have appeared in newspapers across the country. Pratt published a book, Armed People Victorious, in 1990 and was editor of a book, Safeguarding Liberty: The Constitution & Militias, 1995. Pratt’s latest book is “On the Firing Line: Essays in the Defense of Liberty.”

Pratt has held elective office in the state legislature of Virginia, serving in the House of Delegates. Pratt directs a number of other public interest organizations and serves as the Vice-Chairman of the American Institute for Cancer Research.

CBS/THE POLITICAL HOTSHEET/ June 16, 2009

Gun Rights Groups Plan State-By-State Revolt
By Declan McCullagh

Gary Marbut isn't aiming to eliminate federal gun laws. He just wants to make them much less relevant. Marbut, president of the Montana Shooting Sports Association, is one of the leaders of a new grassroots movement that's seeking to invoke the principle of states' rights -- including states' own authority to regulate firearms -- to thwart what he and his allies view as an increasingly overreaching federal government.

Politicians in Washington have "assumed power that many of us believe was not authorized under the limits of the Constitution," Marbut said in an interview with CBSNews.com last week.

This modern-day federalist revolt began with a Montana state law recently signed by Democratic Gov. Brian Schweitzer. It says that firearms, ammunition, and accessories manufactured entirely inside Montana are not subject to federal regulation, including background checks for buyers and record-keeping requirements for sellers. They would remain subject to state regulation.

The law, which does not permit the manufacture of certain large-caliber weapons or machine guns, takes effect on October 1, 2009.

Montana is hardly alone: the Tennessee legislature has approved a nearly-identical bill, and others are pending in Texas, Alaska, Minnesota, and South Carolina. About 10 other states, including Florida and Arizona, are reportedly considering similar measures, and a Colorado state legislator has publicly pledged to follow suit.

Tennessee Gov. Phil Bredesen, a Democrat, said on Friday that he would let the bill become law without his signature. (Bredesen vetoed one gun rights bill last month; the veto was overriden.)

While this federalism-inspired revolt has coalesced around gun rights, the broader goal is to dust off a section of the Bill of Rights that most Americans probably have paid scant attention to: the Tenth Amendment. It says that "powers not delegated to the United States by the Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the States, are reserved to the States respectively, or to the people."

Read literally, the Tenth Amendment seems to suggest that the federal government's powers are limited only to what it has been "delegated," and the U.S. Supreme Court in 1918 confirmed that the amendment "carefully reserved" some authority "to the states." That view is echoed by statements made at the time the Constitution was adopted; New Hampshire explicitly said that states kept "all powers not expressly and particularly delegated" to the federal government.

But a series of subsequent court cases have, in the eyes of the federal judiciary, narrowed the Tenth Amendment so it now has little legal force. The states "never gave the federal judiciary permission to erase the Tenth Amendment from the Constitution," Marbut said. "We need to reacquaint them with the Tenth Amendment."

That will be no trivial task. In a letter last week to the Tennessee House of Representatives, Gov. Bredesen said the state's version of the bill had "clear constitutional deficiencies," and even scholars who tend to favor gun rights believe it will meet a frosty reception if it ends up in court. (A spokesman for the Brady Campaign did not respond to an interview request.)

"I think they probably should succeed and I think they probably won't," Nelson Lund, a professor of constitutional law at George Mason University who specializes in the Second Amendment, said in an interview, referring to the backers of the gun rights bills. "The Supreme Court has strong precedents that would render this statute invalid."

Two doyens of gun rights advocacy agree. David Kopel of the free-market Independence Institute in Golden, Colo., says supporters would be "foolish" to expect to win. Randy Barnett, a Georgetown University law professor, believes the federalism laws won't "stand up to scrutiny" and has been suggesting ways Texas and Utah could amend their pending bills to survive judicial review.

Barnett should know: he was a lead attorney in Gonzales v. Raich, in which the U.S. Supreme Court rejected similar claims involving medical marijuana. Angel Raich is a seriously ill patient who wanted to grow her own medical marijuana, which state law permitted her to do. But a federal law that the Justice Department claimed was based on Congress' constitutional authority to "regulate commerce" made it illegal.

In a 6-3 opinion written in 2005, the court said that someone growing marijuana for her own use could have a "substantial effect on interstate commerce" and therefore was able to be regulated by the federal government. (In an impassioned dissent Justice Clarence Thomas said that: "If Congress can regulate this under the Commerce Clause, then it can regulate virtually anything -- and the federal government is no longer one of limited and enumerated powers.")

One possibility is that the composition of the U.S. Supreme Court has changed enough in the last four years to make a repeat of Gonzales v. Raich unlikely; on the other hand, some justices that might have been sympathetic to a sick mother using medical marijuana may not be as willing to embrace federalism in the form of liberalized gun regulations.

Another possibility is that proponents can argue -- as Marbut plans to do -- that this case is different. In Gonzales v. Raich, the Supreme Court noted "it is not feasible to distinguish" marijuana that's "manufactured and distributed interstate and controlled substances manufactured and distributed intrastate." The Montana law, by contrast, says that all state-made firearms "must have the words 'Made in Montana' clearly stamped on a central metallic part, such as the receiver or frame."

Marbut says he plans a test case in federal court that would use the example of a Montana resident without a federal firearms license seeking to manufacture a made-in-Montana gun. "We can get this clarified," he said. "I do not want any Montana citizen to face federal prison time."

Even though this case is a legal long shot, federalism fans say it's worth pursuing. "It's great PR for us," says Alan Gottlieb, founder of the Bellevue, Wash.-based Second Amendment Foundation. "It's keeping gun owners across the country excited and energized. It's a way of taking the offensive when normally gun owners are on the defensive."

The stakes are higher, of course, than just gun rights. If the judiciary somehow breathes new life into the Tenth Amendment, and curbs federal regulation of commerce taking place entirely within a state, that would let states bypass innumerable federal rules on everything from pharmaceuticals to children's toys.

"It's a response to federal overreaching," Gottlieb says. "A lot of people supporting this cause couldn't care less about firearms. They don't want the Obama administration dictating what states can and can't do. It's a pushback against federal authority in general."

In other words, if the state-by-state efforts to enact laws citing the Tenth Amendment prove to be legally futile, they might still raise the visibility of the topic of state autonomy. And a host of governors signing laws expressing their support for the Tenth Amendment might make the Obama administration view political realities a little differently.

Says Lund, the George Mason professor: "To the extent they're working to get people to think for themselves about the Constitution, that's a good thing and could lead to some good results." (Declan McCullagh is a senior correspondent for CBSNews.com. You can e-mail Declan at declan@cbsnews.com)

#29: DEM SENATOR: OBAMA ‘FAILED TO FOLLOW’ LAW OVER INSPECTOR GENERAL FIRING: Claire McCaskill (D) Admits Law She Authored and President Co-sponsored As Senator Not Followed:When Investigator General Gerald Walpin was phoned by the White House on June 10th and told he had one hour to resign or be fired, a law may have been broken. Democrat Senator from Missouri Claire McCaskill is now on record as saying so according to the St. Louis Post-Dispatch website.

McCaskill was quoted as saying, “The White House has failed to follow the proper procedure in notifying Congress as to the removal.” The law in question is the Inspectors General Reform Act of 2008, which says that Inspectors General do not serve at the pleasure of the president and can only be fired after 30 days notice and with the approval of congress.

Bob Chapman, founder and editor of The International Forecaster, spent three years in army counter-intelligence and owned an extremely successful brokerage firm. Among other things, his newsletter exposes political corruption and he is personally very familiar with how government works.

The reason behind Walpin’s firing appear to be that he got too close to the misuse of government grants by former NBA star and staunch Obama supporter Kevin Johnson, who may be tied to the misuse of close to $1 million, with over $70k going directly to him. Initially, when asked why Walpin was fired, the White House said it had lost confidence in him.

When that explanation failed to satisfy even some Democrats, a letter from White House counsel Norm Eisen to Claire McCaskill attacked Walpin’s character saying that at a Board meeting, Walpin, “was confused, disoriented, unable to answer questions and exhibited other behavior that led the Board to question his capacity to serve.”

“Not only does it appear that an Investigator General was fired illegally but compounding the problem,” says Chapman, “is that the White House has decided to justify it by attacking the man’s competence!”

As Chapman points out, not only does it appear Walpin was protected by President Obama but more disturbing is the fact that Obama allegedly broke a law he co-signed just last year in order to do it. “Congress will have reached a new low in cowardice,” Chapman says, “if this is allowed to stand.”

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLES MAY BE HELPFUL IN SHOW PREP:
http://www.stltoday.com/blogzone/political-fix/political-fix/2009/06/mccaskill-takes-aim-at-obama-ig-firing/

http://www.politico.com/news/stories/0609/23831.html


ABOUT ROBERT J. CHAPMAN:

Bob Chapman is founder and editor of The International Forecaster, a compendium of information on business, finance, economics and social and political issues worldwide. It directly reaches 10,000 investors and brokers every month, while portions of his publication are picked up by 60 other financial publications, resulting in an aggregate number of weekly readers in the range of 10 million investors. Bob spent three years in U.S. Army Counterintelligence, mostly in Europe. He speaks German and French and is conversant in Spanish. He lived in Europe for six years, off and on, three years in Africa, one year in Canada and another year in the Bahamas. Mr. Chapman became a stockbroker from 1960 to 1988. For 18 of those years he owned his own brokerage firm with over 6,000 clients.

#30: TEACHER FIRED FOR BIBLE ON DESK: Religion-in-School with a Twist (Alan Reinach resides in Pacific Time.):About a year after being released from Ohio’s Mount Vernon City School District over accusations that he imposed Christianity on his students, eighth-grade teacher John Freshwater is fighting back.

Last week, following failed attempts to regain his job, Freshwater filed a lawsuit against the School District Board of Education, district administrators and other parties for violation of his First Amendment rights, among other claims.

Does he have a legal leg to stand on? Attorney Alan Reinach, President of the North American Religious Liberty Association–West is available for interviews to answer that question and offer an intriguing commentary on how important the case is in the battle against the secular takeover of public schools.

The linchpin in Freshwater’s termination was his refusal to remove his own personal Bible from his desk—a fact that Freshwater doesn’t deny, and an act that his case states should be allowed under his Constitutional rights.

But then, the case really diverges. The school says he was preaching in class. Freshwater says he was introducing his students to the theory of intelligent design, and stopped when the school charged it was not a creation theory on par with evolution. Then, the school alleged he burned a cross onto a student’s arm. Freshwater says he’s been harassed because of his religion and discriminated against because of his involvement with the Fellowship of Christian Athletes.

As the case resurfaces in the media, and the religion-in-school issue takes a compelling twist, give your audience a jump on the topic with a unique perspective from Alan Reinach. Call Special Guests right away.

For more information, visit: http://christiannewswire.com/news/1638310633.html


ABOUT YOUR SPEAKER:
ALAN J. REINACH, ESQ.

Alan serves as the Director of the Church State Council and President of the North American Religious Liberty Association–West. He is an attorney and a Seventh-day Adventist minister. A graduate of the State University of New York, in New Paltz, with special honors in history, in 1984, and the University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill School of Law, in 1987.

Reinach represents employees who have suffered religious discrimination, and has filed briefs in religious liberty cases in state and Federal courts, and in the California and United States Supreme Court.

When he’s not in court, Alan maintains an extensive speaking schedule, hosts the weekly radio program, Freedom’s Ring, and appears regularly on radio interviews throughout the nation. He also regularly publishes articles on religious freedom. Alan is a passionate advocate of liberty of conscience.

As a young man coming of age in the 70s, he struggled to know God, examining the religious teachings of various traditions. He saw friends taken captive to religious cults, and was wary of getting into something that he couldn’t get out of. God’s gracious commitment to respecting human freedom made it possible for him to experience Christian conversion without fear of being trapped or conned. He has dedicated his life to serving God, and to championing an understanding of God’s character – i.e., that a loving God gives freedom, and does not coerce the conscience.

#31: WILL U.N. PROTOCOL BE USED TO REGULATE HOMESCHOOLING? (Guests reside in Central Time.):Will a new United Nations protocol be used to regulate homeschooled children?

A British plan to allow local authorities "the right of access to the home" and "the right to speak with each child alone" for the purpose of ‘evaluating’ homeschooling families to be certain they comply with government educational wishes is a wakeup call as to what might be next in the United States (per article below).

This latest U. N. encroachment calling for “extensive regulation” of homeschooling was embraced by the British Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families, on June 11, 2009.

Available to be your Talk Show interview guest on this topic are Mike McHugh and Pastor Calvin Lindstrom of Christian Liberty Academy, one of the oldest and largest homeschooling organizations in the world.

During your interview, your guests share how under the international document parents would no longer be allowed to administer reasonable spankings to their children, and that children would be given government authority to choose their own religion—independent of their parents’ wishes in what the government deems to be ‘in the best interest of the child.’

Children picking their own religion that the government deems to be the best interest of the child??? Talk about a gross double standard! The government used to ‘preach’ separation of church and state for ‘bible thumping’ Christianity or religious Judaism, but when it’s ‘convenient’ to push new fangled New Age, Occultism, worship of mother earth or any ‘god’ of tolerism that is in the ‘best interest’ of the child, the feds are now going to be the experts on church planting and church growth?

And this new ‘wonderful’ federal ‘church planting’ can be done right in your family’s own living room! This gives a whole new meaning to the phrase ‘home bible study’! Imagine that: Compulsorily government religious services and education, a one stop shop! Hey, pass that collection plate and put in 10% for the ‘First Home Church of the Federal Government,’ and another 30% in income tax and another 12% in miscellaneous other taxes, and while you’re at it, let’s toss in a benevolent fund to support all the government bailouts and other federally mandated ‘charities.’ Brother, do I get a witness?

McHugh and Lindstrom can share with your audience one horror story after the next about government intrusion into US families even before this new draconian U.N. protocols is implemented.


(More for longer interviews)

THE HOMESCHOOL EXPANSION:
What’s Behind Its Growing Popularity?

Once perceived as a small, rather obscure clique on the education landscape, homeschool parents are beginning to see their numbers increase. As a matter of fact, they’ve nearly doubled in less than ten years, according to the federal government.

So what’s behind the growing popularity? And, if this trend continues, how might it affect the future of our workforce and our education system?

Senior staff member of Christian Liberty Academy, Mike McHugh, and Christian Liberty Pastor Calvin Lindstrom, are leaders in the modern homeschool movement, and they’re available for interviews to discuss this intriguing topic that is becoming more than a blip on the pop culture radar screen.

Their organization, the Christian Liberty Academy, based in Arlington Heights, Illinois, has been active nationally as an advisor, advocate and materials supplier to homeschool parents since 1972.

McHugh and Lindstrom know and understand why the prospect of homeschooling is resonating with more parents, and they’ve seen firsthand the success that a true “private” institution like homeschooling can yield—including students who have achieved everything from winning national spelling bee contests, to special honors at major colleges.

Your guests can also provide insight regarding parental rights in education, why government education is incompatible with a truly free society, and how homeschooling is changing in the twenty-first century.

Want to learn more? Call Special Guests today to schedule an interview.


ABOUT MIKE MCHUGH…

Michael McHugh has worked in the field of Christian home education for nearly thirty years with the Christian Liberty Academy home school program based in Arlington Heights, Illinois.

During his time on staff, Mr. McHugh has written several textbooks, as well as articles that seek to encourage families who are home schooling.

Over the years, Mike has also had the honor to speak frequently before home school groups throughout the U.S. and abroad.

As a home school father, Mike lives in the Chicago area with his wife and seven children. His family began its home school journey in 1988.


ABOUT PASTOR CALVIN LINDSTROM…

Calvin Lindstrom has been on staff with the Church of Christian Liberty and Academy, located in Arlington Heights, IL, for over ten years. During this period of time, Mr. Lindstrom has served as a teacher and guidance counselor.

As an ordained minister and graduate of the University of Illinois, Calvin has recently taken on a new calling as pastor of the Church of Christian Liberty.

One of Pastor Calvin’s chief passions is to encourage parents to provide their children with a comprehensive Christian education.

Rev. Lindstrom lives in the Chicago area with his wife and young son. Both Calvin and his wife attended Christian schools, or were home schooled, prior to college.


THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

WORLDNETDAILY.COM/ June 16, 2009

U.N. protocol used to regulate homeschoolers
New Brit report: Authorities have 'right to access of the home'
By Bob Unruh


A British plan to allow local authorities "the right of access to the home" and "the right to speak with each child alone" in order to evaluate homeschooling families and make certain they do what the government wants is a warning about what could happen in the United States, according to the world's largest homeschool advocacy organization.

"On June 11, 2009, a report on home education in England by Graham Badman, a former Managing Director of Children, Families and Education in the County of Kent, was accepted in full by the British Secretary of State for Children, Schools and Families," according to today's report from the Home School Legal Defense Association.

"The report makes the case that homeschooling should be extensively regulated in England," the HSLDA continued. "Aside from registering with the state and mandating reports by homeschoolers, the Badman report makes references to balancing the rights of parents with the rights of children. This idea is expressed in the UNCRC."


That is the U.N. Convention on the Rights of the Child, a document that the HSLDA has been warning about for a number of years already.

It has been adopted in the United Kingdom, and it is on its way toward approval in the United States, lacking mainly the approval of two-thirds of the U.S. Senate.

The document, however, grants dozens of "rights" to children, sometimes running roughshod over conflicting parental rights, the organization said.

For example, under the international document parents no longer would be allowed to administer reasonable spankings to their children, children would be granted the authority by the state to choose their own religion, the "best interest of the child" would govern all decisions and give the government the authority to override any parental decision, children would have a legally enforceable "right to leisure" and parents would be required to have their children attend state-sponsored sex education courts.

There is a ParentalRights.org website that notes if approved, the treaty would supersede "the laws of all 50 states on children and parents."

The HSLDA now is sending a very gentle "I told you so" message.

"Ever since the United Nations Convention on the Rights of the Child (UNCRC) was adopted by the United Nations General Assembly and opened to nations across the world for ratification in 1989, HSLDA has been deeply concerned about the implications of this treaty for U.S. homeschoolers, if the U.S. were to ratify the treaty," the organization said today. "We have consistently warned that this treaty could be the vehicle opponents of home education could use to effectively ban or severely regulate homeschooling."

If the U.S. Senate ever approves it, "the UNCRC will automatically supersede all state laws and U.S. judges will be obligated to follow the provisions of the treaty. Currently, family and education laws are state-based; however, ratification of the UNCRC would transfer the jurisdiction for making family and education law to the U.S. Congress. Congress would, in turn, be obligated to follow the U.N. mandates contained in the CRC," the HSLDA said.

UNCRC supporters have scoffed at such concerns, saying, "There is no language in the CRC that dictates the manner in which parents are to raise and instruct their children," the HSLDA said.

But now, with the adoption of the Badman report in Britain, "Sadly, HSLDA's position has been proven to be correct. Contrary to what proponents like the Children's Rights Campaign claim, UNCRC will be used to significantly restrict the freedom to homeschool in England."

According to the report now awaiting legislative action in Britain, Badman concludes, "I am not persuaded that under the current regulatory regime that there is a correct balance between the rights of parents and the rights of the child either to an appropriate education or to be safe from harm. The United Nations Convention on the Rights of the Child (UNCRC) gives children and young people over 40 substantive rights which include the right to express their views freely, the right to be heard in any legal or administrative matters that affect them and the right to seek, receive and impart information and ideas. Article 12 makes clear the responsibility of signatories to give children a voice:

"'Parties shall assure to the child who is capable of forming his or her own views the right to express those views freely in all matters affecting the child, the views of the child being given due weight in accordance with the age and maturity of the child.'

"Yet under the current legislation and guidance, local authorities have no right of access to the child to determine or ascertain such views," the report finds.

Therefore, authorities not only must have access to homes and private interviews with children, they should, "secure the monitoring of the effectiveness of elective home education," Badman wrote.

"In short, the Badman report recommends that the state should have the authority to choose the curriculum for homeschoolers and he used Britain's treaty obligations under the UNCRC to justify this intrusion," the HSLDA report said.

"Remember, the Badman report has already been accepted by the British government. It is now only a question of time before the legislation is introduced and a vote occurs in the British Parliament. Not surprisingly, the estimated 80,000 British homeschooling families are outraged at the Badman report. The Badman report is a stark reminder of how government officials in an English-speaking democracy have interpreted the UNCRC. It's clear that the right to homeschool in America will be negatively impacted if the U.S. Senate ever ratifies the UNCRC," the HSLDA said.

Among Badman's recommendations:

At the time of registration parents/carers/guardians must provide a clear statement of their educational approach, intent and desired/planned outcomes for the child over the following 12 months.

That the government review the current statutory definition of what constitutes a "suitable" and "efficient" education.

That all local authorities analyze the reasons why parents or carers chose elective home education and report those findings to the Children's Trust Board.

Authorities should regard the move to home education as a trigger to conduct a review and satisfy themselves that the potentially changed complexity of education provided at home, still constitutes a suitable education.

Michael Farris, founder of the Home School Legal Defense Association, a college and a church and now a dedicated leader in the effort to change the U.S. Constitution through the amendment process to restore and protect parental rights, has told WND even U.S. courts in recent years have refused to acknowledge parental rights in many case.

© 2009 WorldNetDaily

#32: THE US OPEN: What Makes Tiger Woods Such a Genius on the Greens?:The US Open, with its high rough and hard greens, most pros are just trying to stay alive and shoot a respectable score. But Tiger Woods has come for one reason-to defend his title and win his fourth U.S. Open title.

What makes Tiger such a genius on the greens? How can he handle the intense pressure of major championship golf like no other player of his generation? Why does he look like a man who is destined to win every tournament he enters?

Available to be Your Talk Show Guest on the Tiger topic is sports potential expert, Dr. Gregg Steinberg, author of "Full Throttle:122 strategies to supercharge your performance at work (Wiley, 2009).

Dr. Steinberg contends that Tiger possesses the secrets to peak performance-whether on the golf course or in the business arena, and that we must be mentally and emotionally ‘tough like Tiger’ to reach our full potential.

Dr. Gregg Steinberg's new book shares with your audience the performance secrets of Tiger Woods. But Gregg’s book is much more than just about Tiger. Full Throttle shares the secrets to peak performance from successful individuals from a wide rage of venues, from politics to business to sport.

Full Throttle gives your loyal fans the secrets to mental and emotional toughness and shows you them how to:

1) Turn pressure into pleasure
2) Make all your butterflies fly in the correct formation
3) Be full engaged in each moment
4) Squash the sour grapes
5) Discover the power of pride
6) Rocket past a plateau

ABOUT DR. GREGG STEINBERG…

Dr. Gregg Steinberg is an expert in personal development and a corporate speaker to Fortune 500 companies such as Merrill Lynch, UBS, Bank of America, and Pacific Life.

He has appeared on numerous television shows including Dancing with the Stars, Fox News 2008 Olympic coverage, and the Golf Channel. Golf Digest ranked him as one of the games great masterminds.

Gregg is He is the author of MentalRules for Golf, associate editor for the Journal of Sport Behavior, and the head sport psychologist for the United States Golf. In addition, he has consulted with many college teams and professional athletes on the mental game.

To see more about Dr. Gregg and view his national television show TV clips, visit: www.drgreggsteinberg.com

#33: AG HOLDER CALLS FOR ‘HATE CRIMES’ LAW To Protect US from White Supremacists! Boo! Yikes! a.k.a. another excuse to grab more government control (Evangelist Bill Keller resides in Eastern Time.):Citing the recent Holocaust Museum shooting, U. S. Attorney General Eric Holder is calling for the need for new ‘Hate Crimes’ laws to protect US from White Supremacists!

Huh?

Yeah, we need to grab even more government control, strip away any remaining freedoms for the sake of security!

Yes! We must protect US from US! You know, from those roaming gangs of White Supremacists lurking around street corners looking for dimly lit convenience stores to steal chewing gum.

Or perhaps to protect the 30 million illegal immigrants from Christ and other Caucasian Christian ‘extremists.’

Never mind the Islamic terrorists who took down the Twin Towers on 9/11. Forget about the Islamic terrorists committing mass murder in Pakistan, Israel, Iraq and Afghanistan. We need to be on the alert for U.S. citizens! Watch out: They’re everywhere!!!

Sound crazy? Well, it’s really happening. And if the top ranking attorney in the US and the Democrat-controlled Congress get their way, so-called hate crime laws will be able to imprison anyone who dares to call homosexuality a ‘sin’ or ‘hatefully’ labeling Islamic terrorists as ‘murderers.’

Big brother knows best. He knows that it starts with the small things, like changing water into wine. Then it leads to incendiary talk, and eventually to—well, just to be safe we better outlaw whatever those disenfranchised 200 million White illegal-immigration-phobic people might be thinking!

Conducting Talk Show interviews on the ludicrous ‘Hate Crimes’ Bill is Evangelist Bill Keller, author of Live Prayer, the daily devotional with a subscriber base of 2.4 million people.

During your interview, Evangelist Keller reminds Americans that God-hating liberals have been attempting to boil U. S. citizens like frogs, turning up the heat against morality incrementally until we no longer scream bloody murder even over the most egregious of government violations of common decency in the history of the United States.

Bill’s message is simple: Wake up America! Hop out of the pan! This is no drill. This is not a test. This is the First Amendment burning up before your very eyes. Don’t just sit there and lose your God-given nation!

Attorney General Eric Holder on Tuesday said new hate crimes law were needed to stop what he called "violence masquerading as political activism." How much more insane can anything get? One lone gunman shooting up a museum qualifies for the war on terror to cease and all the might of the U. S. government to be turned on its own people? Under the freakish auspices of ‘hate crimes’ legislation? Our founding fathers must be turning over in their graves!

The attorney general's call for Congress to act came as a civil rights coalition said there has been a ‘surge’ in white supremacist activity since the election of the first African-American president and the economic downturn. Is this guy serious??? (See Yahoo! News article below.)

The so-called “Hate Crimes” Bill passed through the House Judiciary committee and is expected to head to the House and Senate for quick votes, to be signed into law by Barack Obama.

Once the John Conyers/ Barney Frank H. B. 1913 is signed into law by Barack Obama, America may soon see the wholesale gagging of pastors, talk show hosts and other ‘hateful extremists’ who dare call homosexuals “sinners” or Muslim terrorists “Muslim terrorists.” Carrying the full force of U.S. law, heaven help the poor Pastor who dares to preach what the Bible says to preach. And in prisons, wardens will be wondering why the new inmates talk so much—because the jails will be filled with talk show hosts!!!

During your interview Keller gives his first hand experience with being accused of committing ‘hate crimes,” when CAIR (Counsel of Arab Islamic Relations) succeeded at getting Bill Keller’s TV show taken off air. He had been enjoying top ratings in his time slot, yet CBS television affiliate WTOG of Tampa yanked him off the air in response to the complaint by CAIR claiming Keller was inciting people with hatred and violence toward Muslims by his statements that Islam is a false religion.

“What’s next?” asked Keller predicted, “Speaking out against legal abortions will be considered a hate crime.” When asked if he will back down once the Hate Crime legislation becomes law, Keller said, “I refuse to back down from preaching the truth of the bible, regardless of what the government says. I will continue to call homosexuality a sin.”

Christian leaders have pointed to hate crime laws in England, Sweden and Canada, where Christians have been prosecuted for breaking these laws. According to The Christian Post 11 Christians in Pennsylvania were reportedly prosecuted under the state’s hate crimes law shortly after “sexual orientation” was added, resulting in ten adults and one teenager getting arrested for singing hymns and carrying signs at a homosexual celebration in Philadelphia, the city of brotherly love. (See Christian Post article below.)

Current federal law covers crimes committed on the basis of race, religion, color or national origin but under the new John Conyers/Barney Frank law, sexual preference would be elevated to these categories.


ABOUT YOUR EXPERT GUEST, BILL KELLER…

Crowned the next big thing in mass media religion by the news media, Pastor Bill Keller has hosted the only live call-in faith and values-based program airing nationally on major secular television network affiliates for nearly six years. Live Prayer with Bill Keller is now seen exclusively on the internet, Monday through Friday from 11 PM to midnight EST on Liveprayer.com.

The program is also simulcast on Tampa's 50,000-watt WWBA-820, and is being syndicated nationwide on other major secular radio stations.

Live Prayer deals head-on with issues ranging from divorce, homosexuality, abortion, sexual abuse, pornography, drug addiction, radical Islam, race relations, spousal abuse, false prophets, and various other issues from a conservative, biblical worldview.

Unscripted and unedited, Live Prayer is a fresh and totally spontaneous approach to problem solving. Launched in 1999 by Keller, LivePrayer.com has become the most successful online faith outreach in history.

Since its inception, LivePrayer.com has responded personally to more than 60 million online requests for prayer. Additionally, Keller's Live Prayer devotional is received daily by over 2.4 million email subscribers, making Keller's devotional one of the most read e-communications worldwide.

SEE LIST OF ALL SPECIAL GUESTS: www.specialguests.com

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLES MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOP PREP:

THE CHRISTIAN POST/ Apr. 17, 2009

House Committee to Vote on Hate Crimes Bill
By Jennifer Riley, Christian Post Reporter

The U.S. House Judiciary Committee will vote on a controversial legislation next week that seeks to add homosexual and transgender people to the list of classes federally protected from hate crimes.

H.R. 1913, named the Local Law Enforcement Hate Crimes Act of 2009, is expected to be passed by the committee next week and come to the House floor for a vote in the spring, announced Rep. Barney Frank (D-Mass.), the original co-sponsor of the bill and an openly gay member of Congress, on his website.

An identical legislation (H.R. 1592) was passed by the U.S. House in 2007. The Senate later attached the hate crimes legislation to a high-priority defense spending bill, which included funding for the Iraq War, in a political maneuver to pressure former president George W. Bush to pass the amendment.

But Bush said the spending bill and the hate crime legislation were two separate issues and vetoed the bill including the legislation.

The hate crimes measure seeks to add violence against individuals based on sexual orientation, gender, gender identity or disability to the list of federal hate crimes. Current federal law covers crimes committed on the basis of race, religion, color or national origin. If passed, the federal government would be more involved and have greater power to investigate alleged hate crimes.

Critics of the hate crimes legislation fear that if passed, the legislation would inhibit pastors from speaking about homosexuality as a biblical sin and be interpreted in a way that bars speech against the lifestyle.

Christian leaders have pointed to hate crime laws in England, Sweden and Canada, where Christians have been prosecuted for breaking these laws.

In the United States, 11 Christians in Pennsylvania were prosecuted under the state’s hate crimes law shortly after “sexual orientation” was added as a victim category several years ago. According to reports, the ten adults and one teenager were singing hymns and carrying signs at a homosexual celebration in Philadelphia when they were arrested.

But Rep. Frank assured that the new bill would only apply to violent crimes and “does not infringe on free speech in any way.”

President Obama has expressed support for the hate crime legislation in the past and is expected to sign the bill if passed.

Christian leaders who have spoken against the 2007 hate crimes legislation include Dr. James C. Dobson, founder of Focus on the Family Action; Tony Perkins, president of Family Research Council; Richard Land, president of The Ethics & Religious Liberty Commission of the Southern Baptist Convention; and Bishop Harry Jackson, senior pastor of Hope Christian Church and chairman of High Impact Leadership Coalition.

© 2006 Christianpost.com

---------------------

ONE NEWS NOW/ April 20, 2009

'Hate crimes' bill - bad news for believers
Jim Brown and Jody Brown

A vote is looming this week in Congress on a bill that one conservative activist warns would not only silence Christian opposition to homosexuality, but also would legitimize deviant forms of "sexual orientation."

A markup vote is expected Wednesday in the House Judiciary Committee on the Local Law Enforcement and Hate Crimes Prevention Act of 2009. House Democrats only have to give 24 hours' notice before the vote. The measure (H.R. 1913) sponsored by Representatives John Conyers (D-Michigan) and Mark Kirk (R-Illinois) would add homosexuals and transgender people to the list of classes federally protected from so-called "hate crimes."

Andrea Lafferty, executive director of the Traditional Values Coalition, says the bill is a serious threat to religious freedom.

"Your pastor could be prosecuted for conspiracy to commit a hate crime if it passes and become law," she warns. "This so-called 'hate crimes' bill will be used to lay the legal foundation and framework to investigate, prosecute, and persecute pastors, business owners, Bible teachers, Sunday School teachers, youth pastors -- you name it -- or anyone else whose actions are based upon and reflect the truth found in the Bible."

TVC says H.R. 1913 broadly defines "intimidation" -- and offers up this example: "A pastor's sermon could be considered 'hate speech' under this legislation if heard by an individual who then acts aggressively against persons based on 'sexual orientation.'" Under those circumstances, says the group, the pastor could be prosecuted for "conspiracy to commit a hate crime."

The legislation has another "serious problem," the pro-family group says, because Congress has failed to define the term "sexual orientation." Consequently, says TVC, 30 sexual orientations (as defined by the American Psychiatric Association) will "arguably be protected" under the legislation. "Those 30 sexual orientations include behaviors that are felonies or misdemeanors in most states or can result in death," notes the group's website.

In addition, TVC argues the bill is based on a fraudulent premise: that there is an epidemic of so-called "hate crimes" against "lesbian, gay, bisexual, and transgender" persons that needs federal involvement for local law enforcement officials.

Lafferty says unless Christians in America act, the hate crimes bill could be on President Obama's desk in three to four weeks at the most.

© 2009 American Family Association


YAHOO!/ June 16, 2009

AG Holder urges new hate crimes law
By LARRY MARGASAK and DEVLIN BARRETT, Associated Press Writers Larry Margasak And Devlin Barrett, Associated Press Writers

WASHINGTON – Citing recent killings in Arkansas, Kansas and the nation's capital, Attorney General Eric Holder on Tuesday said new hate crimes law were needed to stop what he called "violence masquerading as political activism."

The attorney general's call for Congress to act came as a civil rights coalition said there has been a surge in white supremacist activity since the election of the first African-American president and the economic downturn.

"Over the last several weeks, we have witnessed brazen acts of violence committed in places that many would have considered unthinkable," Holder told the Washington Lawyers Committee for Civil Rights and Urban Affairs.

He cited separate attacks over a two-week period that killed a young soldier in Little Rock, an abortion provider in Wichita and a guard at the U.S. Holocaust Memorial Museum.

Federal agents and prosecutors already are involved in the local investigations of each attack.

The violence, Holder said, "reminds us of the potential threat posed by violent extremists and the tragedy that ensues when reasoned discourse is replaced by armed confrontation."

"We will not tolerate murder, or the threat of violence, masquerading as political activism," he said. "So let me be clear. The Justice Department will use every tool at its disposal to protect the rights ensured under our Constitution."

Holder said that to stop such violence, Congress should pass an updated version of hate crimes legislation in order to more effectively prosecute those who commit violent attacks based on gender, disability or sexual orientation.

The growing number of hate crimes against Latinos also shows the need for tougher laws, Holder said.

In recent years Republicans, including then-President George W. Bush, have opposed Democratic efforts to expand the hate crimes law, saying it was unnecessary because current laws on the books provide for effective punishment and prosecution.

Separately Tuesday, the Leadership Conference on Civil Rights Education Fund issued a report saying white supremacist activity online spiked after Barack Obama's election victory in November, and hate groups now use social networking sites like MySpace and Facebook to spread their message.

The report reviewed hate crimes over nearly two decades.

"In the nearly twenty years since the 1990 enactment of the Hate Crime Statistics Act, the number of hate crimes reported has consistently ranged around 7,500 or more annually — that's nearly one every hour of every day," the report said.

Hate crime statistics are compiled by the FBI.

The Center reported in February that the number of hate groups had risen by more than 50 percent since 2000, from 602 to 926. It attributed the growth mainly to fears about nonwhite immigration, but said Obama's election and the downward economy also were factors by early this year.

The report found:

_African-Americans remain by far the most frequent victims of hate crimes. Of the 7,624 hate crime incidents reported nationwide in 2007, the most recent year available, 34 percent were perpetrated against African-Americans.

_In the five years from 2003-2007, the number of hate crimes reported against Hispanics increased nearly 40 percent, from 426 in 2003 to 595 in 2007. Of all hate crimes reported in the United States in 2007, 7.8 percent were committed against Hispanics.

_In 2007, there were 969 reported hate crimes committed against Jews, constituting 12.7 percent of all hate crimes reported and 69 percent of religious bias hate crimes reported.

_Following the terrorist attacks of Sept. 11 2001, the number of hate crimes directed against Arab-Americans, Muslims and Sikhs escalated dramatically. In 2001, those groups were victimized in nearly 5 percent of the total number of hate crimes reported that year, 481 out of 9,730. While the number of reported hate crimes against the groups declined from the peak of 2001, it remains substantially above pre-2001 levels.

_Reported hate crimes committed against individuals because of their sexual orientation increased in 2007 to 1,265, the highest level in five years. Of all hate crimes reported in 2007, the proportion committed against lesbian, gay, bisexual and transgender individuals rose to 16.6 percent, also the highest level in five years.

(C) 2009 Yahoo! Inc.

#34: OBAMA OPPOSITION RALLY/ NEWS CONFERENCE: Unveiling Dirt on Obama Education Appointee Kevin Jennings (Peter LaBarbera resides in Central Time.):CONTACT: Angela Sumbles at 847-722-5330; americansfortruth@comcast.net or Peter LaBarbera cell: 630-546-4439

Barack Obama’s high level appointees are the target of a socially conservative coalition who will be conducting a rally/press conference at 29 South LaSalle Street, Suite 610, Chicago, at 11 am Central Time to unveil its earth shaking documentation of dirty deeds by Obama appointees, including secretly recorded audio tape capturing Kevin Jennings organization Gay, Lesbian, Straight Education Network (GLSEN), which he founded, teaching under age youth how to engage in the homosexual ‘fisting,’ the insertion of one person’s fist into the another person’s rectum for alleged sexual pleasure of the recipient without regard to any aspect of proper hygiene or health.

The group will decry the utter hypocrisy of Obama rewarding Jennings with the position of ‘Deputy Assistant Secretary of Safe and Drug-free Schools,’ a division of the Department of Education division.

Another Obama appointee being protested is Harry Knox of the homosexual lobby group Human Rights Campaign, of Obama’s ‘Safe Advisory Council.’ Catholics are furious over Knox’s anti-Catholic rhetoric, including his bizarre condom comments and his flagrantly disrespectful comments calling Pope Benedict “a discredited leader” and the Knights of Columbus, “the Pope’s foot soldiers” in a “discredited army of oppression.”

Oh, it gets worse-- much worse. The Safe Advisory Council chief blasphemously called his own homosexuality, “an immutable, unchangeable gift from God, one for which I am very grateful,” adding, “And it would fly in the face of my respect for God to give that gift back. It would simply be unethical and hurtful to our relationship with the Creator to give back gifts that God has given us.”

A ‘Who’s Who’ of moral conservative event speakers includes:

Peter LaBarbera, Americans For Truth About Homosexuality; www.aftah.org

Matt Barber, Liberty Counsel; www.lc.org

Oklahoma State Rep. Sally Kern (R); http://repsallykern.com/
Hiram Crawford, pro-family, pro-life advocate, Chicago;

Mary Ann Hackett, Catholic Citizens of Illinois; www.catholiccitizens.org

Diane Gramley, American Family Association of Pennsylvania; www.afaofpa.org

David Smith, Illinois Family Institute; www.illinoisfamily.org

Pastor Larry Rogers, Israel Methodist Community Church, Chicago;

Tom Brejcha, Thomas More Pro-Life Law Center, www.thomasmoresociety.org

7 Topics of Discussion during Rally and News Conference:

1) Obama’s radical appointments including anti-traditional-Catholic Harry Knox (of the homosexual lobby group Human Rights Campaign) and Gay, Lesbian, Straight Education Network (GLSEN) founder Kevin Jennings

2) Hate Crimes bill

3) Obama’s radical promise to repeal the Defense of Marriage Act (DOMA), signed into law by President Clinton in 1996)

4) Obama’s ENDA (Employment Nondiscrimination Act) plans to force businesses to approve of homosexuality;

5) Obama’s plan to homosexualize the U.S. military (repeal “Don’t Ask, Don’t Tell”);

6) Obama’s confusion about Christianity, the Bible and homosexual practice;

7) Obama’s lack of mandate to push the envelope on homosexual and transsexual issues

“Americans are largely ignorant about President Obama’s extreme pro-homosexual goals, which includes repealing DOMA and homosexualizing the U.S. military,” said AFTAH’s Peter LaBarbera. “We are thrilled these organizations and leaders are coming together to expose Obama’s ‘gay’ and transsexual agenda –– for which he has zero mandate because these issues were almost completely ignored in the general election campaign.”

Matt Barber, Liberty Counsel attorney and AFTAH board member, said: “By pledging his support for every demand of extremist homosexual pressure groups, President Obama has revealed himself to be out of step with those he serves. For example, he has promised to homosexualize the military supplanting sound judgment with San Francisco vice. It’s dangerously irresponsible for the President to place political correctness above national security.” #

#35: OBAMA AND DEMOCRATS COULD “COMPLETELY DESTROY” AMERICAN HEALTHCARE SYSTEM: 80% of Americans Polled say NO to Healthcare to Illegals:A panel of healthcare and financial experts are available to be your Talk Show guests to say that Obama and the Democrats could “completely destroy” the American healthcare system (See Newsmax article below.)

During your interview, each panelist explains just how bad the proposed healthcare ‘reform’ will be four our nation.

The group also shares findings from recent polls showing overwhelmingly that US citizens do NOT want to pay for the healthcare of illegal immigrants.

Four key excerpts from Rasmussen poll:

1) Eighty percent (80%) of U.S. voters oppose providing government health care coverage for illegal immigrants as part of the health care reform package that is working its way through Congress.

2) Only 11% disagree and think coverage for illegals is a good idea.

3) While most Americans support the idea of providing quality health care coverage for all Americans, they overwhelmingly oppose such a proposal if it also includes coverage for illegal immigrants. Only 20% favor a proposal for universal health care if illegal immigrants are included. Seventy percent (70%) are against such a proposal.

4) As is often the case, there’s a wide division between Mainstream America and the Political Class on this question.

Full Poll article:

http://www.rasmussenreports.com/public_content/business/healthcare/june_2009/americans_support_universal_health_coverage_but_not_if_it_covers_illegal_immigrants

Interview one, two, three, or all four expert guest panelists on this topic:

Panelist #1: Bob Chapman

Panelist #2: Ron Greiner resides in Eastern Time.

Panelist #3: James Lansberry resides in Central Time.

Panelist #4: Bob Rinear resides in Eastern Time.

PANELIST #1: Bob Chapman:

Bob Chapman’s statement on ObamaCare: “President Obama has begun selling his healthcare program. He presents it as a reduced cost, guaranteed choice, quality plan for all. The reality is government programs will result in higher costs, no choices and inferior care. The legislative vehicle for this health care deception is planned to be in the budget reconciliation bill, which requires only 51 Senate votes for passage instead of the 60 needed to authorize new programs.

The Kennedy Plan promises that all Americans will have health care, employers will have to contribute to the costs. A government program will subsidize premiums for people up to 500% of the poverty level, that is $110,000 for a family of 4, and private insurers will have to pay out a specified percentage of their premium revenues in benefits. There is no provision for funding the program, so it looks like perpetual deficit spending to cover the costs.

Healthy people will be forced to pay more for their insurance in order to subsidize those not as healthy, those who have ruined their bodies and minds and the old.

Fines will be imposed if you do not provide health care for employees. That means the employers will not insure employees and pay the cheaper fine, or just go out of business.

That means 100 million people happy with their programs will have to take an inferior government plan. Then, of course, is the bureaucracy, which dictate treatment and who will live and who will die.

Part of the proposal includes a proposal to tax these health benefits with current employer-based health insurance.

We are promised cost savings by putting all Americans’ health records on a uniform computer system, which will be eventually mandatory for all countries. These totalitarian controls will be forced on all doctors and terminate all medical privacy.

Healthcare will be rationed letting bureaucrats decide who gets treated and how and who will be allowed to die. Seventy percent of medical lifetime costs occur in the last year of life. We already experienced this with a doctor and I asked him which side of his head he’d like his brains blown out of.

Part of the legislation would provide healthcare for illegal aliens, which 80% of American voters are opposed too.

It would be far more constructive to begin to fix the problems in Medicare and Social Security then try to create an expensive new system.

On the other side of the spectrum are those who want a single-payer-approach like those used in Europe. Congress has said they won’t even consider it, this in spite of the fact that any other plan will leave the big insurance companies in charge and keep hurting patients. Someone should tell these poor ignorant souls that both parties are promoting corporatist fascism.

The real deep-seated problem is that the health insurance companies and related industries are major campaign contributors to members of Congress on both sides of the aisle. Senator Grassley is a good example. Since 2005, he has collected $1.3 million in donations from industries related to the health insurance debate.

In a different perspective on healthcare the US will spend 15.4% of GDP both state and private. With that it gets 2.6 doctors per 1,000 people; 3.3 hospital beds and its people live to 78.2 years.

The question is how do we cut down medical costs? There has been some pressure to do so, but costs go relentlessly higher. Senators and congressmen receive hundreds of millions of dollars from the industry to continue their gravy train. Then there are the investors, bureaucrats and preexisting conditions.

Mr. Obama doesn’t have the answers and neither does the industry.” –Bob Chapman

ABOUT ROBERT J. CHAPMAN:

Mr. Chapman is 73 years old. He was born in Boston, MA and attended Northeastern University majoring in business management. He spent three years in the U. S. Army Counterintelligence, mostly in Europe. He speaks German and French and is conversant in Spanish. He lived in Europe for six years, off and on, three years in Africa, one year in Canada and another year in the Bahamas.

Mr. Chapman became a stockbroker in 1960 and retired in 1988. For 18 of those years he owned his own brokerage firm. He was probably the largest gold and silver stockbroker in the world during that period. When he retired he had over 6,000 clients.

From 1962 through 1976 he specialized in South African gold shares. He and his family lived in Salisbury, Rhodesia (now Harare, Zimbabwe) and Johannesburg, South Africa from 1970 to 1973. During that time he did a great deal of further study into the South African mining industry.

Mr. Chapman belonged to The Traders Association for 25 years. He did all his own trading. During his South African years some was done directly through Johannesburg, but 95% was done through London brokerage firms. Hence, he has extensive contacts, both in London and on the Continent.

Starting in 1967 Mr. Chapman began writing articles on business, finance, economics and politics having been printed and reprinted over the years in over 200 publications. He owned and wrote the Gary Allen Report, which had 30,000 subscribers.

He currently is owner and editor of The International Forecaster, a compendium of information on business, finance, economics and social and political issues worldwide, which reaches 10,000 investors and brokers monthly directly, and parts of his publication are picked up by 60 different websites weekly exposing his ideas to over 10 million investors a week.

In 1976, after the Soweto riots, Mr. Chapman began buying North American shares exclusively for his clients. Up to that point only a handful of American and Canadian issues interested him, due to the high dividends the South African shares had paid out over the years. Between 1976 and 1988 his business surged from 1,000 to 6,000 clients, so the bulk of his business ended up being Vancouver Stock Exchange issues. For this reason he is very conversant with the quality of management, geologists, properties and traders on today’s North American scene. He is well known.

From 1976 to present he has spoken and given workshops at over 200 business conferences worldwide, and has been on radio and TV thousands of times. Until his retirement he was always judged by the attendees to be one of the top three speakers and never once was lower than first in workshops due to his vast knowledge of the mining business and his grasp of worldwide financial markets and political scenes.

In June of 1991, at the request of business associates, and due to retirement boredom, he began writing the International Forecaster.

Over the past 40 years, Bob Chapman has immersed himself in the study of world politics and economics. His articles have run in more than 200 publications. His newsletter, "THE INTERNATIONAL FORECASTER,” has active subscribers all across world. Bob Chapman has conducted hundreds of workshops at business conferences and has been a featured guest on hundreds of radio and television programs.

Some of Bob Chapman’s uncanny predictions include:

* Called the top of the market in April 2000.
* Predicted 9/11 or an event like that, nine months early, within 33 days of it actually occurring.
* Predicted the invasion of both Afghanistan and Iraq two years before they happened.


PANELIST #2: RON GREINER: Founder of Insurance Processing Corporation

Consumer Healthcare expert Ron Greiner of www.save101.com says the bitter taste of Democrat healthcare pill that politicians like Ted Kennedy are attempting to shove down our throats is nothing more than an over-priced government HMO and hardly the best available alternative when solutions such as tax-free health savings accounts (HSAs) exist. Discusses the Republican antidote to ObamaCare: Health Savings Accounts (HSAs), a win–win for US citizens, corporations and government. Health Savings Accounts” (HSAs) were quietly introduced by the Republican Party years ago and they have been working, although most people don’t know they exist, no less that they are available in many parts of the nation already. HSAs are Ron’s ‘antidote’ for socialized medicine.

“At the core of the newly proposed (AHIP) mandate is that all Americans must buy health insurance. Unfortunately, the government will be doing the selling so there will be no managed competition among agents. And we all know how the consumer fares when there’s no competition. Worse yet, the ‘community rating’ concept means there will be no medical underwriting. So, the young and healthy will pay a lot more to spread the risk,” said Greiner.

ABOUT RON GREINER…

Ron Greiner started in the insurance industry in 1987 as an agent for a large national insurance agency. In 1993 he started his own insurance agency in Omaha, Nebraska selling health and life insurance. His job functions included recruiting and training insurance agents. In 1994 and 1995 Greiner’s agency became the largest in the United States selling health insurance for Time Insurance Company, America’s oldest health insurance company. Consumers know Time Insurance Company as Assurant Health.

Medical Savings Accounts (MSAs) were signed into law in August of 1996 as a federal test for self-employed people. Greiner immediately saw the advantages of America’s first tax-free savings account and he enrolled the first MSA in the USA in October 1996. Congress renamed MSAs to Health Savings Accounts (HSA) and made them available to all Americans, under the age of 65, in 2004. For the last 12 years Greiner’s agency, Insurance Processing Corporation (IPC) has focused entirely on enrolling consumers into tax-free MSAs and HSAs and the accompanying low cost health insurance.

Greiner also had the first press release in America on Medicare’s new option - tax free MSAs. He has senior clients in Medicare’s MSA program since the first day the program was available, 1/1/2007. The MSA in Medicare has gotten very little attention from the Nation’s press. With this option Medicare pays for the senior’s health insurance then makes a deposit into the senior’s MSA at the bank, all tax-free.

Before entering the insurance industry Greiner was the Director of six Richard Simmons Anatomy Asylums in Denver, Colorado. These facilities had 300 employees and 30,000 members. He learned about weight loss and exercise as a student. Greiner went to Iowa State University on a wrestling scholarship. Greiner and his agency are based in Tampa Bay, Florida. IPC services clients nationally with online enrollments at www.save101.com.

PANELIST #3: JAMES LANSBERRY:

Yes, there is a better way and James Lansberry, president of the Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, would be delighted to share with your audience a healthcare concept called “Shared Care,” that has been working successfully in the private sector for decades.

"The AMA objections to national healthcare is good news for those joining in opposition against an expansion of government and a further limiting of freedom in the health care industry. The AMA opposing a government competing ‘option’ will help the opposition to the plan, and be better for patients,” stated James Lansberry.

Shared Care is not health insurance but it provides medical care for thousands at a mere fraction of the cost of traditional health insurance and for pennies on the dollar compared to the grossly inefficient government healthcare plans. Essentially the way Shared Care works is that people of Faith and embracing traditional values, agree to live their lives in ‘low risk’ fashion, meaning not engaging in dangerous lifestyles of sexual promiscuity, etc., and to attend church at least twice a month. Remarkably when this criterion is met, the vector of healthcare expense plummets, allowing each member to help meet the needs of others, thus the phrase: Shared Care.

Stated Lansberry, “Health care and bioethical issues may be the most important public policy issues facing governments on both the federal and state levels. The decisions that are made in these arenas will have a profound effect on every family in the country. Often the politicians talk of the importance of issues like portability and affordability in health care. Health care sharing ministries offer a viable, vital, faith based health care solution that is both affordable and completely untied to employment. And how much more caring can health care get than real people helping one another?”

In addition to being the president of Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, James Lansberry is vice president of Samaritan Ministries International, a health care sharing ministry representing more than 13,400 households in all 50 states. Health care sharing ministries provide a unique way for followers of Jesus Christ to meet one another’s health care needs without using health insurance. Other people with affinity groups might consider grouping together in similar shared care concepts. Of course, groups widely known for actively engaging in ‘progressive’ lifestyles proven to be far more dangerous than in mainstream communities, would likely have larger ‘per person’ medical needs to share within their alternative community.

ABOUT JAMES LANSBERRY AND SAMARITAN MINISTRIES…

James Lansberry, president of the Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, is a Peoria-based expert available to comment on a variety of issues related to health care, including alternatives to traditional health insurance, the economics of health care, health care public policy, health care and tax policy, and the health care industry in general.

Lansberry also is vice president of Peoria-based Samaritan Ministries International. He is a frequent radio guest and an occasional preacher/speaker at churches and conferences. His articles have been published in Heritage Forum, the Journal of Modern Ministry, and Every Thought Captive. He has been interviewed by the CBS Evening News, U.S. News and World Report and the Washington Post.

The Alliance, with offices at 2400 W. Altorfer Drive, Peoria, was formed in 2007 to track and address public policy developments that could affect member ministries, which include Samaritan and Medi-Share. The two ministries provide health care cost-sharing arrangements among persons of similar and sincerely held beliefs.

Additional information on the Web: www.healthcaresharing.org or at: www.samaritanministries.org

PANELIST #4: BOB RINEAR:

Bob Rinear Statement on ObamaCare: “Since when did America go from giving a helping hand, to giving hand outs? Most of the people we poll on a daily basis realize that the word "illegal" means not legal. Yet because of our crooked politicians looking for votes, they stomp on what true Americans want, and grant healthcare and drivers licenses to illegals. Is there any wonder why the Southern California hospital situation is dire? Of course not, the illegals us the emergency rooms and cannot be turned away. Our Healthcare system is already on the ropes, and Americans are dead set against spending their tax money on people that snuck into the country illegally. But since all our current administration cares about is votes, they pander to everyone despite the costs and the desire of their constituents.” --Bob Rinear

ABOUT BOB… Robert Rinear’s entrepreneurial roots stem from his early years in the jewelry industry. Once immersed in the intricacies of the equity markets, it didn't take Mr. Rinear long to realize that he had a knack for predicting the ebb and flow of stock and options markets. Over time Bob developed his personally successful methods of calculating stock and treasury movements into a workable platform that others could follow. As an outgrowth of this system of astute observation grew his newsletter, the "Financial Intelligence Report” and the his current company, "InvestYourself," that specializes in helping investors of every experience level gain investment knowledge of real estate, stocks, bonds, commodities and general finances.


THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

Newsmax.com/ June 12, 2009

Rep. Shadegg: Obama Jeopardizing Healthcare

Rep. John Shadegg tells Newsmax that proposals backed by President Barack Obama and Democrats in Congress could "completely destroy" the American healthcare system.

The Arizona Republican also said the Obama administration is promoting "massive state involvement in the economy," which will be a "disaster."

Newsmax.TV's Kathleen Walter asked Shadegg whether people in Arizona are concerned about illegal immigration and the dramatic rise in drug violence in his border state.

"People all over Arizona are deeply concerned about all crime related to illegal immigration," said Shadegg, who represents a Phoenix-area district.

"But having said that, the people in Arizona recognize that there is a role to be played by immigrants from south of our border in our economy. There are in fact jobs, for example in our agricultural industry and in other industries that I think the majority of people in Arizona realize won't get done if there is no guest worker program, and no ability for someone from outside the country to come here and work.

"I personally support a guest worker program where people come but come lawfully, and supplement our economy. I don't support giving someone who got here illegally an automatic path to citizenship. I don't support an amnesty that says we are going to suddenly recognize all of them and let them become citizens. I've always argued for a middle ground on this issue."

Walter noted that Shadegg has introduced the Healthcare Choice Act and asked for his overall views on the issue.

"I really think the healthcare issue is the single most important issue facing the nation right now," the congressman declared.

"I notice that my colleagues on the Democratic side of the aisle have a very very extensive and shocking agenda, an agenda that will move us as a nation away from very fundamental principles.

"I think we have an administration that wants to restructure the government and its role with the citizens dramatically.

"I think the administration believes in a much larger role for the government, and I think it wants to recast America much along the lines of a European socialist [nation], with massive state involvement in the economy. I think that's a disaster...

"Americans need to understand that the reforms being proposed by Democrats in Washington and by President Obama on health care hold the potential to completely destroy what is great about the American health care system. And that is choice and individual control.

"I do not think that the American people want to go to a government-run, one-size-fits-all and the government rations care type of system . . . Actually, most of the countries that have a socialist form or a single-payer form of health care are moving away from that, having recognized that it's failed."

Walter asked Shadegg what he believes will be the outcome of the healthcare debate.
The outcome "depends on the willingness of the president and congressional Democrats to compromise," he said.

"Right now they're basically saying it's their way or the highway. They want to put in place a government plan, and that government plan will cause the private insurance market to wither and go away very, very quickly.

"If they don't give up that demand, I don't see how we can come to a compromise."

Shadegg also said Obama was "not strong enough" in talking about the dangers of radical Islam during his June 4 speech in Cairo. But he called the speech a "stunning step forward by an American president to reach out and open the door" to improved U.S.-Muslim relations. And Shadegg called Obama's statement that no nation should decide what other nations should have nuclear weapons "fundamentally wrong."

Editor’s Note: To see the full John Shadegg interview, Go Here Now.

© 2009 Newsmax. All rights reserved.

#36: ISRAEL, OBAMA, AND IRAN (Guests reside in Eastern Time; for 30,000 minimum cume audience):“America’s betrayal of Israel by the present [Obama] government is a reality." So noted a recent issue of the Jerusalem Post.

Can Israel withstand U.S. pressure for a two-state solution with a divided Jerusalem?

Will Palestinians consent to a de-militarized state as well as Israel as a Jewish state? (See Jerusalem Post article below.)

And if the Palestinians do get a de-militarized state, will they then demand that Israel disarms entirely?—including their nuclear arsenal?

And does anyone believe that for even one moment that a newly re-elected Ahmadinajad would sit still and disarm in the face of Israel still being armed? We can hear it now in great bravado, “Iran needs to defend the poor defenseless Palestinian state!”

Senator John Kerry and Barack Obama have indicated that they want to give Iran the opportunity to show their nuclear intentions, whether they be for peace or war. But do Americans and Israelis really want to take that risk—just in case Iran MIGHT decide to nuke either nation? So, under what circumstances, if any, would Obama be willing to act preemptively to stop the nuclear arming of Iran?

Two expert guests are available to answer these questions and more:

Jim Hutchens gives answers from a political, military and a Biblical perspective. As a former U. S. Military Chaplain, who retired with the rank of Brigadier General.

“General Jim” is quite experienced in the ways of spiritual warfare, as well as old fashioned military warfare.

Sid Roth is an investigative journalist who has some of the world’s foremost research on the correlations between the seemingly inexplicable connection between monumental events effecting Israel and a counterpart connection with the Christian Church.

Mr. Roth contends that there is a spiritual principle connecting Jewish and Christian faith. He says there is a biblical pattern of both a ‘natural’ and ‘spiritual’ event. Sid goes so far as to say that every major event in the history of Israel has released a major event in the Christian church.

Sid includes as examples:

•The first Zionist Congress released the 1900 Pentecostal revival.

•1948 when Israel became a nation released the great healing revival of people like the then new ministries of Billy Graham, Oral Roberts, etc.

•1967 when Jerusalem in Jewish hands for first time in 2,000 years released the Catholic Charismatic renewal and the Jesus People Movements.

•1973, the six day war released the current Messianic Jewish movement.

OK, OK, you may argue that anyone can look and connect the dots on past historic events, but what about the future? Can Sid predict will happen in the future?

Among other predictions, Sid Roth says that when Israel fights its next devastating major war with Iran, Russia or the Palestinians, it will result in an explosion of the biggest outpouring of God's Spirit in history!

Sid Roth’s television show is called, “It’s Supernatural!” and it airs on television networks worldwide and is carried via 13 satellite/cable networks to Canada, Finland, Israel and the Middle East, the United Kingdom, Europe, Asia, Africa and Australasia. Sid’s program also is broadcast on TBN, Daystar USA, DISH Channel 263 and DIRECTV Channel 369. Monday 11:00 a.m., Tuesday 2:00 p.m., Thursday 10:30 p.m. and Saturday 6:30 p.m. EDT.

On the Daystar Israel satellite, the program is carried on Hot Channel 122 and YES Channel 110, Monday 10:00 p.m., Wednesday 1:00 a.m., Friday 9:30 a.m. and Saturday 5:30 p.m.

Sid Roth has been interviewed by Oprah Winfrey and many other radio and television talk show hosts—including, we hope, you!


ABOUT REV. HUTCHENS, Ph.D…

Rev. James M. Hutchens, Ph.D., a retired US Army Chaplain with the rank of Brigadier General, is President of The JerUSAlem Connection, International and editor of the foremost Christian Zionist magazine in America, The JerUSAlem Connection.

Dr. James M. Hutchens is a Christian Zionist on a mission for Israel – a mission to make God’s purposes for Israel and the Jewish people an unavoidable issue. He is President and Chairman of the Board of The JerUSAlem Connection, International and Editor of the magazine “The JerUSAlem Connection.”

Dr. Hutchens also serves as the Washington DC Regional Director of Christians United for Israel. He is on the forward edge in the battle area of informing, educating and activating America’s Christian community on issues related to Israel from a Biblical perspective.

From his military experience, Dr. Hutchens is well acquainted with the concept of “Mission.” He came to faith in Christ as an enlisted paratrooper under the ministry of his unit chaplain. After college and seminary, he returned to the Army as a chaplain.

Dr. Hutchens was decorated for personal bravery in Viet Nam, including the Purple Heart, as the first chaplain wounded in Viet Nam. He served with the famous 173rd Airborne Brigade, and later with the celebrated “Green Berets.” Dr. Hutchens retired from active duty in 1994 with the rank of Brigadier General. His personal account of service in Viet Nam, “Beyond Combat,” tells of his experience as a combat chaplain in Viet Nam.

Dr. Hutchens was ordained to the ministry in 1962 and has served, concurrent with his chaplain duties, as a church planter and senior pastor for over 24 years. His wife, Patty, is an exhibiting artist and professor at the Corcoran School of Art in Washington, D.C. and the Northern Virginia Community College system. The Hutchens have three married children and twelve grand children. The Hutchens tell their fascinating story of a life-long love for Israel in their book “Guilty: Keeping God’s Covenant of Love with Israel.” The “General”now brings his military leadership skills and pastoral devotion to duty to accomplish the mission of The Jerusalem Connection International.(TJCI)

TJCI is an advocate of Christian Zionism. We are one with Christians world-wide who stand in agreement with what God’s Word says about Israel. As Christian Zionists, we support the modern State of Israel as the partial fulfillment of God’s covenant promise to provide homeland of the Jewish people. Through its “Operation Aliyah,” TJCI has helped bring over 80,000 Jews out of the former Soviet Union back to Israel. While still involved with Aliyah efforts in the FSU, we believe God’s future focus will be on the 6.2 million Jews in the Americas. TJCI’s Elisha Fund brings food, shelter and medicine to countless impoverished Israelis – its Operation Life for Israel provides aid and comfort to victims of terror and supports sanctity of human life endeavors throughout Israel. Taking bombed out Bus # 19 around the USA served to confront anti-Semitism of Islamic terrorism.

Rather than “replacing” or “superseding” Israel and the Jews, Dr. Hutchens sees Christians as having been “engrafted” into the family of God and thus joint-heirs of the covenant promises of God. He believes TJCI is called to restore an appreciation of the Hebrew roots of Christianity. He seeks to encourage all believers to wait with expectation “for the blessed hope and glorious appearing of our great God and Savior, Jesus Christ.” These projects and purposes are carried out with an attitude of extending mercy because of the mercy we have received in Christ. [Romans 11:30-31].

The JerUSAlem Connection. Int’l is bold to believe we follow in the distinguished tradition of the “men of Issachar, who understood the times and knew what Israel should do.” We believe a Christian’s perspective on what God is doing in Israel is a vital key to seeing the big picture of God’s plan and how he is operating in the world today. With this perspective, Christians have a sense of urgency to be used by God as never before. TJCI encourages you to be a part of living out that sense of urgency as a result of having a Biblical perspective on Israel.

Under Dr. Hutchens’ leadership, The JerUSAlem Connection’ In’l stays current on all the issues regarding the Middle East and Israel on a daily basis and keeps an ongoing update through “The JerUSAlem Connection” magazine. The “General’s” passion is to share the mission and vision of this ministry which has been raised up “for such a time as this.”

ABOUT SID ROTH…

As a successful stockbroker, little did Sid Roth realize that his worldly investments would give way to otherworldly experiences. Driven by an insatiable quest for supernatural powers and mysteries, Roth began to lose control of his life to forces beyond the physical realm. He left his job, and even abandoned his wife and infant daughter.

“I was into astral-projection, mind control—you name it,” Roth explains. Those inexplicable phenomena were more than his mind and body could endure. “I was terrified. I thought I was doing to die,” he recalls.

In his best-selling autobiography, “There Must Be Something More!,” Roth dramatically describes his supernatural rescue from the occult and the total restoration of his family. “God—the one true God—restored my mind, my family and my career,” Roth proclaims.

Today, Sid Roth is heavily invested in presenting the invisible world to the skeptic. Over the past 30-plus years, he has investigated reports of miracles, interviewed thousands of people claiming to have been declared dead, had crippled limbs instantly healed, witnessed “angels,” conversed with God, and had out-of-body experiences.

Roth has no shortage of bizarre reports to choose from. “Some of the people I hear from are simply bluffing,” he says,” and others aren’t exactly uplifting.” Those don’t get on the air. Roth’s litmus test is his gut discernment. “You won’t see ghost stories or the glorification of demons. I try to present the stories that reflect a God who wants us to draw closer to Him,” Roth says.

“Just about everyone is looking for intimacy with God. Our radio program and TV show, ‘It’s Supernatural!’ provide tools and resources to help them draw closer to God,” says Roth who founded his broadcast organization in 1977.

Although Roth makes no claims of being a miracle worker himself, he says that miraculous occurrences have been reported during his program and lectures. Says Roth, “I have personally seen the power of God heal the crippled, open deaf ears, and cause the blind to see. Cancers and tumors have been supernaturally removed, and people imprisoned by fear and depression have been set free.” His lectures have drawn large audiences in Germany, Israel and Russia.

“Who would have thought that a Jewish boy from Washington, DC would be traveling the world in search of supernatural stories?” Roth said. “Who would have imagined that our radio and TV interviews would reach a global audience?”

He believes that when Jews and Christians come together, miracles result. “When that Holy merger takes place, the resulting miracles will be greater than those recorded in the Bible,” he says.

Roth is the author of, ‘There Must Be Something More!’ (Autobiography), ‘Time is Running Short,’ ‘They Thought for Themselves,’ and ‘The Incomplete Church.’ Also, he has been interviewed by Oprah Winfrey, Barry Farber and Pat Robertson, and he has been a guest on numerous radio and television programs. Sid Roth lives in Brunswick, Georgia with Joy, his wife of 43 years.


THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

THE JERUSALEM POST/ June 15, 2009

Associated Press, THE JERUSALEM POST

Prime Minister Binyamin Netanyahu said Monday that Israel cannot live side by side with a new Palestinian state if it must continually be in fear of attack.

But Netanyahu repeated in a nationally broadcast interview his groundbreaking statement saying that he would accept a Palestinian state. At the same time, he told NBC's "Today" show in an interview from Jerusalem that it would have to be a demilitarized state.

On the issue of further Jewish settlements in territory the Palestinians wish to claim as their own in a new state, Netanyahu said "I think I made it also clear that I would not build new settlements." He said that he and President Barack Obama are trying to resolve that issue.

Netanyahu said his vision is of separate Jewish and Palestinian states, living side by side in harmony, "not enmity."

The prime minister said his concern about Israel's security "is not a political exercise."

"We've got an enclave in Gaza and we can't have rockets in Tel Aviv," he said.

Netanyahu said that Israel has been pummeled by attacks from its Palestinian territories, telling NBC's Ann Curry: "Let's just think about seven rockets in New York, not to mention 7,000 in Tel Aviv ... Of course, that's (demilitarized zone) a requirement for peace."

On the issue of new settlements in the West Bank, he said, "This is a subject that I have discussed with" Washington.

"I think that President Obama and I are trying to reach a common understanding of this," he said. "I think we'll find some common ground."

This article can also be read at http://www.jpost.com /servlet/Satellite?cid=1244371103874&pagename=JPArticle/ShowFull

Copyright 1995- 2009 The Jerusalem Post - http://www.jpost.com/

#37: OBAMA FIRES INSPECTOR GENERAL WALPIN-- FOR DOING HIS JOB! (David Armstrong resides in Eastern Time.):As the old saying goes, “No good deed goes unpunished,” as Investigator General Gerald Walpin just found out as he was just fired—for doing his job!

That’s right. Walpin’s job was to investigate corruption and report it, except the person he investigated just so happened to be a ‘sacred cow,’ the former NBA star Kevin Johnson, who also is Mayor of Sacramento—and a buddy of Barack Obama.

Apparently the unwritten Chicago-style political rule was to never touch an untouchable, like Kevin Johnson. Yes, go after the other uncharasmatic bad guys but not this bad guy!

But Walpin either never got ‘the memo’ or didn’t care and chose to do his job without fear. The result: You’re fired!

Here’s the skinny: Walpin appears to have uncovered the misuse of federal grants by Kevin Johnson. It was reported by the Associated Press (link below) that Johnson used Americorps grants (over $800,000) to his non-profit organization St. HOPE, for personal and political purposes (ranging from major to minor things, including having his car washed, etc.) totaling $72,836.50 that Walpin said Kevin Johnson would have to pay back—and return $400,000 of the money issued to St. HOPE.

And if Kevin Johnson would have been allowed to do his job, Kevin Johnson not only would have had the humiliation of getting caught with hands in the cookie jar, but he also would unlikely to be able to get his hands on millions of dollars in Obama’s ‘Stimulus Money’ while the light of public scrutiny is shining so brightly.

Conducting Talk Show interviews on this topic is Ethicist David Armstrong, who is also CEO of Armstrong International, a multinational corporation specializing in providing clean steam power to business.

Armstrong says this egregious act is yet another example of the arrogance and hypocrisy of ‘elitists’ thinking ethical rules don’t apply to them or to their fellow-elitist friends. Furthermore, this is a dangerous breach of the basic constitutional separation of government when the Executive Branch of the United States government can blatantly thumb its nose at Congress as in a case like this.

During your interview, David explains that it was Obama himself who as a U. S. Senator co-sponsored “The Inspector General Reform Act of 2008,” a law that mandated that the Inspector General does NOT serve at the pleasure of the president. Before Obama was President he championed populist measures like this to protect the masses against unscrupulous Republican Presidents. But once Obama sat in the Oval Office himself, the view looked quite different and he apparently forgot (or didn’t care) about the clause Obama himself approved that mandated that Congress must be consulted with reasons for any IG firing being clearly defined in writing and a 30 day notice is required!

But did Gerald Walpin get 30 day notice? According to Walpin, the White House contacted him by phone on June 11, 2009 and told him he had one hour to resign or be fired. The only reason given was that the President “no longer” had “the fullest confidence” in Walpin. That reason is short on specifics and also suspect since it appears Walpin actually performed his duties exceedingly well. It also has the tone of being the final word before Congress is afforded the opportunity to do its job in looking into the matter.

What a horrendous breach of trust! Not only was a man shafted for doing his job, but another man does not have to pay the consequences of not doing his job!

David Armstrong doesn’t just understand trust. He uses trust on a daily basis with his employees at Armstrong International who all work on the honor system without having to punch a time clock and who make their own change in their company cafeteria with no cash register. They simply drop cash in a big box and make their own change.

David’s philosopy is the same for business as it is for politics: The Golden Rule: “Do Unto Others as You Would Have Others Do Unto You,” and he has written a book that embodies his philosophy, “Hanging in by a Threat: The Erosion of The Golden Rule in America.”

Although our nation is currently experiencing unprecedented low levels of ethics in both government and business, David says it doesn’t have to stay that way and he gives an inspriational message of Change—moral change for the better, for all, and not politically expedient change for the the chosen few.

David Armstrong challenges the Democratic Congress to stand up to the firing of this their watchdog instead of looking the other way, taking cowardly political cover.

NOTE: Hosts are requested to mention the name of David Armstrong’s new book on the topic of business and personal ethics: “Hanging By A Thread: The Erosion of the Golden Rule in America.” Thank you.

ABOUT DAVID ARMSTRONG…

David M. Armstrong still believes in Camelot. An idealist and a nationally known ethicist, David is CEO of Armstrong International, a multinational corporation that runs on the honor system, with no time clocks, no cash register in their massive company cafeterica (employees drop cash in a big box and make their own change!).

But more than that, David is a consummate storyteller. More importantly, he has evolved corporate storytelling into a whole new style of management—a style praised by Tom Peters as the leadership answer for tormented managers who need their people to champion initiative.

David Armstrong’s stock in trade is anecdotes—stories about urgency, bravery, wisdom, core values, change management, innovation and having fun in the workplace. And when there is a breaking news story about ethics or the lack thereof, David is your ‘go to’ man to interview.

Your listeners won’t dare change their dial when listening to anecdotal stories David uses to drive home ethical points. And just where does he find stories? In the same places he suggests you look for yours—in the eyes and on the faces of the customers, partners and employees who come through your doors every day.

“Every company has a rich heritage of stories,” says David. “I’m just putting my company’s treasure to work.”

While it may be true that every company has stories, not every CEO has the vision to search them out and retell them with powerful and memorable morals. That’s what this site is all about—helping you to dig into, discover and use the stories that surround you.

Today Armstrong International is a safe haven in a business world grown confusing and complex. Doing business with Armstrong International is refreshingly simple and pleasant. In fact, today’s dream has become the vision of business as a series of enjoyable experiences.

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLES MAY BE HELPFUL IN SHOW PREP:

http://news.yahoo.com/s/ap/20090612/ap_on_go_pr_wh/us_national_service_inspector_general

http://www.washingtontimes.com/news/2009/jun/15/walpin-gate/

http://www.washingtonexaminer.com/opinion/blogs/beltway-confidential/Whats-behind-Obamas-sudden-firing-of-the-AmeriCorps-inspector-general-47877797.html

http://hotair.com/archives/2009/06/15/the-curious-firing-of-gerald-walpin-gets-curiouser/

THE AMERICAN THINKER/ June 15, 2009

Fired for doing his job: Walpin speaks
By Rick Moran

Gerald Walpin, a former Inspector General with the Corporation for National and Community Service which oversees AmeriCorps said in an interview with Byron York of The Examiner that his firing was politically motivated.

Yes, we knew that. We knew that Walpin's investigation into the misuse of AmeriCorps funds by Sacramento Mayor Dennis Johnson was the proximate cause of his firing. What we didn't know, as York points out, was how blatant it was:

The White House's decision to fire AmeriCorps inspector general Gerald Walpin came amid politically-charged tensions inside the Corporation for National and Community Service, the organization that runs AmeriCorps. Top executives at the Corporation, Walpin explained in an hour-long interview Saturday, were unhappy with his investigation into the misuse of AmeriCorps funds by Kevin Johnson, the former NBA star who is now mayor of Sacramento, California and a prominent supporter of President Obama. Walpin's investigation also sparked conflict with the acting U.S. attorney in Sacramento amid fears that the probe -- which could have resulted in Johnson being barred from ever winning another federal grant -- might stand in the way of the city receiving its part of billions of dollars in federal stimulus money. After weeks of standoff, Walpin, whose position as inspector general is supposed to be protected from influence by political appointees and the White House, was fired.

Walpin learned his fate Wednesday night. He was driving to an event in upstate New York when he received a call from Norman Eisen, the Special Counsel to the President for Ethics and Government Reform. "He said, 'Mr. Walpin, the president wants me to tell you that he really appreciates your service, but it's time to move on,'" Walpin recalls. "Eisen said, 'You can either resign, or I'll tell you that we'll have to terminate you.'"

Walpin had also just finished a report on the misuse of stim funds by the City University of New York. The two reports taken together would have placed Obama cronies in the sights of a criminal investigation. Hence, we can certainly agree that the timing of his firing was "very interesting" as Walpin put it.

Johnson was suspended from receiving any more Americorps dollars last year and the fact that millions more in stim money would be barred from coming his way as a result of Walpin's investigation didn't sit well with the White House. If they had used Chicago rules, Walpin would have been fortunate he didn't have a couple of thugs pay a visit to his house, urging him to resign. As it is, they let some White House flunkie deliver the bad news. Walprin had little choice.

Where does this go from here? No, seriously, will some MSM outlet pick up on this and flog it like they would have flogged it if it were a Republican? It's a juicy story. And we've only scratched the tip of it.

#38: HEALTHCARE’S ‘LEFT’ TURN TO DISASTER: Republicans, Medical and Insurance Experts Seriously Concerned (James Lansberry resides in Central Time.):Right now, about the only common ground Democrats and Republicans share on the healthcare issue is they largely agree that it’s the most critical domestic policy problem facing the United States.

But as the latest Democrat, Senator Ted Kennedy (MA), steps to the plate with a public healthcare scenario, and President Barack Obama writes a formal letter to Congress urging them to support such a plan, healthcare experts, like James Lansberry of Samaritan Ministries International, are growing increasingly restless.

Lansberry agrees with Congressman John Shadegg, who is quite concerned with the Democrats’ “very, very extensive and shocking agenda that will move us as a nation away from very fundamental principles” (See Newsmax interview below).

A growing number of critics agree that Obama’s promise consumers will have a choice to stay with private insurance is a fallacy, because against a public plan that doesn’t have to make a profit, private companies cannot compete, and will likely eventually disappear. This would leave a one-payer government system that, when combined with the likes of banking and auto company bailouts, looks to Lansberry too much like a strategy toward becoming “a European socialist [nation], with massive state involvement in the economy. I think that’s a disaster . . .”

Regarding the recent Democrat healthcare proposals, James Lansberry asks, “Why should the public sector, which has a long history of causing cost increases that price many middle-class Americans out of health care through over-regulation and cost shifting, be trusted with determining not only our health care, but that of our children and grandchildren as well?"

When virtually the only healthcare options being discussed in front of the American people these days is a government system, give your audience the rest of the story. Call Special Guests today to schedule an interview with James Lansberry.

ABOUT JAMES LANSBERRY AND SAMARITAN MINISTRIES…

James Lansberry, president of the Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, is a Peoria-based expert available to comment on a variety of issues related to health care, including alternatives to traditional health insurance, the economics of health care, health care public policy, health care and tax policy, and the health care industry in general.

Lansberry also is vice president of Peoria-based Samaritan Ministries International. He is a frequent radio guest and an occasional preacher/speaker at churches and conferences. His articles have been published in Heritage Forum, the Journal of Modern Ministry, and Every Thought Captive. He has been interviewed by the CBS Evening News, U.S. News and World Report and the Washington Post.

The Alliance, with offices at 2400 W. Altorfer Drive, Peoria, was formed in 2007 to track and address public policy developments that could affect member ministries, which include Samaritan and Medi-Share. The two ministries provide health care cost-sharing arrangements among persons of similar and sincerely held beliefs.

Additional information on the Web: www.healthcaresharing.org or at:
www.samaritanministries.org

#39: WALPIN-GATE: Investigator General Fired By Obama For Getting Too Close To Former NBA Star?:WALPIN-GATE
Investigator General Fired By Obama For Getting Too Close To Former NBA Star?

Former NBA star Kevin Johnson is not just the mayor of Sacramento. He’s also a staunch supporter of Barack Obama and considered to be a political ally of the president. That alliance may have been strengthened with the possible illegal firing of Investigator General Gerald Walpin by Barack Obama.

Walpin appears to have uncovered the misuse of federal grants by Johnson. It was reported by the Associated Press (link below) that Johnson used Americorps grants to his non-profit organization St. HOPE, for personal and political purposes, to include having his car washed. AmeriCorps received over $800,000 in grants and as a result of Walpin’s findings, Johnson had to pay back $72,836.50 out of his own pocket with $400,000 of the money issued to St. HOPE being returned.

“Yet Walpin is the guy fired?” asks an incredulous Bob Chapman, founder and editor of The International Forecaster. “Not only does it appear the wrong guy got fired but the law may have been broken in order to do it.” Chapman is available for interviews to explain why this firing is so egregious and what it could mean if it is allowed to stand. “By the strongest of indications, what you have here,” says Chapman, “is the Executive Branch of the United States government blatantly thumbing its nose at Congress.”

Although Walpin’s discoveries with respect to Johnson’s misuse of funds were significant by itself, the much bigger issue involves the circumstances under which he was terminated. The Inspector General Reform Act of 2008, a law co-sponsored by Barack Obama, mandates that the IG does NOT serve at the pleasure of the president. Additionally, Congress must be consulted with reasons for any IG firing being clearly defined in writing and a 30 day notice is required.

According to Walpin, the White House contacted him by phone on June 11th and told him he had one hour to resign or be fired. The only reason given was that the president “no longer” had “the fullest confidence” in Walpin. That reason is short on specifics and also suspect since it appears Walpin actually performed his duties exceedingly well. It also has the tone of being the final word before congress is afforded the opportunity to do its job in looking into the matter.

“No matter how you look at this, indications are that IG Gerald Walpin was fired for doing his job and the mayor of Sacramento was protected from the consequences of not doing his as identified by Walpin,” Chapman said.

As Chapman points out, not only does it appear Walpin was protected by President Obama but more disturbing is the fact that Obama allegedly broke a law he co-signed just last year in order to do it. “Congress will have reached a new low in cowardice,” Chapman says, “if this is allowed to stand.”

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLES MAY BE HELPFUL IN SHOW PREP:
http://news.yahoo.com/s/ap/20090612/ap_on_go_pr_wh/us_national_service_inspector_general
http://www.washingtontimes.com/news/2009/jun/15/walpin-gate/

http://www.washingtonexaminer.com/opinion/blogs/beltway-confidential/Whats-behind-Obamas-sudden-firing-of-the-AmeriCorps-inspector-general-47877797.html


ABOUT ROBERT J. CHAPMAN:

Bob Chapman is founder and editor of The International Forecaster, a compendium of information on business, finance, economics and social and political issues worldwide. It directly reaches 10,000 investors and brokers every month, while portions of his publication are picked up by 60 other financial publications, resulting in an aggregate number of weekly readers in the range of 10 million investors. Bob spent three years in U.S. Army Counterintelligence, mostly in Europe. He speaks German and French and is conversant in Spanish. He lived in Europe for six years, off and on, three years in Africa, one year in Canada and another year in the Bahamas. Mr. Chapman became a stockbroker from 1960 to 1988. For 18 of those years he owned his own brokerage firm with over 6,000 clients.

#40: IRAN IN FLAMES OVER STOLEN ELECTION: Ahmadinejad Polled far behind, Finished Doubling Pro-US Reformer! (Bob Rinear resides in Eastern Time.):Iran is in flames and people are protesting in the streets by riot police using batons and tear gas against the pro-democracy demonstrators, chanting, “Death to the dictator!” (see article below.)

The shock and anger of freedom-seeking Iranian citizens stemed from seeing their hopes and dreams dashed after truly belieiving their unprecedented high turnout at the polls would once and for all rid them of their loose cannon leader and replace him with pro-US reformer Mir Hussein Moussavi. They were virtually assured Moussavi would win since he was too far ahead in the polls to lose, yet he crashed and burned, getting trounced by the unbelievable margin of two to one.

Unbelievable is the operative word. Virtual impossibility is more like it. That would be the equivalent of John McCain or Ron Paul DOUBLING Barack Obama, despite polls show that to be a near impossibility.

Commenting on the obvious unethical election returns is Bob Rinear, Editor of Financial Intelligence Report.

ABOUT ROBERT (BOB) RINEAR:

InvestYourself was founded in October 1997 by Robert Rinear, who owned several successful business ventures primarily in the jewelry industry. In fact, his introduction to the financial world began as the result of his experience timing the price of tangible assets, including gemstones, gold and silver, all on a daily basis—a talent critically needed to be successful in the jewelry industry.

As Bob Rinear saw the price of gold soaring in the late 1980s, he needed to find the causes of that move. What he found was intriguing. Political issues, global economics and even something as simple as the industrial output in Japan would move the price of tangible assets. He needed to learn more.

As he became more “in tune” with the global economic process, he noticed that one of his best customers traded stocks and options on a daily basis. With Mr. Rinear’s views on the overall economic situation and “Charley’s” ability in picking stocks, they found a winning combination. But it still wasn't complete.

Once introduced to the intricacies of the equity markets, it didn’t take Mr. Rinear long to realize that he had a knack for predicting the everyday flows of the stock and options markets. He began to attend trading seminars and training camps with the desire to learn how to make profitable trades on a daily basis.

One thing became abundantly clear—none of the classes gave him the total picture about how to accomplish his goal. Something was still missing in regards to how to make a living by trading stocks and options. Likewise, he realized that not all opportunities came in just stocks and options. Sometimes it was a quick move in precious metals or Treasury bonds. Other times it may have been a move in a currency.

Not to be defeated, Mr. Rinear slowly developed his own trading style that began to produce profits. After taking what he learned from the seminars and injecting his own methods of calculating stock movements, options movements, currency, real estate and Treasury movements, a successful concept emerged. He expanded this trading concept into a workable platform that anyone could follow. That was the beginning of his newsletter “Market Insight & Outlook” (now the Financial Intelligence Report). From those first few issues it became clear that the public would benefit from his years of research. He decided to offer it to the masses.

From that humble beginning a company called “InvestYourself” was created. Its main goal is to help investors of every experience level gain the investing knowledge necessary to win in a tough game that includes enabling investors to grow in their knowledge of real estate, stocks, bonds and finances in general.


THE NEW YORK TIMES/ June 14, 2009

Ahmadinejad Re-elected; Protests Flare
By ROBERT F. WORTH and NAZILA FATHI

TEHRAN — The streets of Iran’s capital erupted in the most intense protests in a decade on Saturday, with riot police officers using batons and tear gas against opposition demonstrators who claimed that President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad had stolen the presidential election.

Witnesses reported that at least one person had been shot dead in clashes with the police in Vanak Square in Tehran. Smoke from burning vehicles and tires hung over the city late Saturday.

The Interior Ministry said Saturday afternoon that Mr. Ahmadinejad had won 62.6 percent of the vote, with Mir Hussein Moussavi, the top challenger, taking just under 34 percent. Turnout was a record 85 percent.

Mr. Moussavi, a former prime minister who had promised to reverse Mr. Ahmadinejad’s hard-line policies, declared himself the winner by a wide margin Friday night, charged widespread election irregularities and called on Ayatollah Ali Khamenei, Iran’s supreme leader, to intervene.

The landslide victory for Mr. Ahmadinejad, an intensely divisive figure here and abroad, came as a powerful shock to opposition supporters, who had cited polls showing that Mr. Moussavi had a strong lead in the final days of the campaign.

Interior Minister Sadegh Mahsouli said Saturday that such a lead was a misimpression based on Mr. Moussavi’s higher levels of support in the capital, and that he had less backing elsewhere.

Mr. Moussavi made clear in statements on Saturday that he rejected the results and called on supporters and fellow clerics to fight them. But there were no reports of any public appearances by him through the day, leading to rumors that he might have been arrested.

In a statement posted on his campaign Web site, Mr. Moussavi said: “Today the people’s will has been faced with an amazing incident of lies, hypocrisy and fraud. I call on my Iranian compatriots to remain calm and patient.”

But Ayatollah Khamenei closed the door to any appeals for intervention in a statement issued on state television on Saturday afternoon, congratulating Mr. Ahmadinejad on his victory and pointedly urging the other candidates to support him.

In a televised address to the nation Saturday night, Mr. Ahmadinejad called on the public to respect the results, and he denounced foreign diplomatic and journalistic criticism.

"All political and propaganda machines abroad and sections inside the country have been mobilized against the nation," he said.

Mr. Moussavi’s defiance seemed to fuel street resistance by his supporters — a coalition including women, young people, intellectuals and members of the moderate clerical establishment — who had united in opposition to Mr. Ahmadinejad’s erratic economic stewardship, confrontational foreign policy and crackdown on social freedoms.

“Death to the coup d’état!” chanted a surging crowd of several thousand protesters, many of whom wore Mr. Moussavi’s signature bright green campaign colors, as they marched in central Tehran on Saturday afternoon. “Death to the dictator!”

Farther down the street, clusters of young men hurled rocks at a phalanx of riot police officers, and the police used their batons to beat back protesters. There were reports of demonstrations in other major Iranian cities as well.

The authorities closed universities in Tehran, blocked cellphone transmissions and access to Facebook and some other Web sites, and for a second day shut down text-messaging services.

As night settled in, the streets in northern Tehran that recently had been the scene of pre-election euphoria were lit by the flames of trash fires and blocked by tipped dumpsters and at least one charred bus. Young men ran through the streets throwing paving stones at shop windows, and the police pursued them.

Earlier in the day, hurried meetings were reported among Iran’s leading political figures and clerics; some were said to be trying to influence Ayatollah Khamenei to intervene in a situation that could stain public confidence in the integrity of Iran’s elections.

But Saeed Leylaz, an economist and political analyst, said he believed Ayatollah Khamenei’s statement would bring resolution, even if demonstrations persisted for a few days. “This has put an end to political negotiations from above,” Mr. Leylaz said.

For the moment, Ayatollah Khamenei’s admonition did nothing to calm the opposition’s rage.

“The results of the 10th presidential election are so ridiculous and so unbelievable that one cannot write or talk about it in a statement,” said Mehdi Karroubi, a reformist cleric and candidate. He came in last with 300,000 votes — much fewer than analysts had predicted. “It is amazing that the people’s vote has turned into an instrument for the government to stabilize itself.”

The other candidate, Mohsen Rezai, got 680,000 votes, Interior Ministry officials said.

In 2005, when Mr. Karroubi was also a candidate for president, he accused the government of rigging the vote in Mr. Ahmadinejad’s favor. In that election, the government announced when polls closed that there would probably be a runoff between two of three candidates, a reform candidate and a former police chief. But by 7 a.m. the next day, a spokesman for the Guardian Council, a clerical oversight panel that is not supposed to be involved in vote counting, announced that Mr. Ahmadinejad was in first place. Mr. Karroubi’s charges were never investigated.

The turmoil on Saturday followed an extraordinary night in which the Iranian state news agency announced that Mr. Ahmadinejad had won by a vast margin just two hours after the polls closed. The timing alone provoked deep suspicion here, because the authorities have never before announced election results until the following morning. Mr. Moussavi also announced Friday night that he believed he had won by a wide margin.

Mr. Moussavi also complained about irregularities and unfairness in the election, saying there had been a lack of ballots in many areas and that some of his campaign offices had been attacked and his Web sites shut down.

The official results prompted further skepticism, in part because Mr. Ahmadinejad was said to have won by large margins even in his opponents’ hometowns. Mr. Rezai’s hometown, for example, gave him less than a 10th of Mr. Ahmadinejad’s total there, the Interior Ministry said.

The issue of vote-rigging has often been raised in Iranian elections, but analysts have generally said the authorities can manipulate the results by only a few percentage points, leaving room for genuine democratic movements.

Iran’s clerical leaders often point to past reformist victories as proof of the Islamic Republic’s democratic legitimacy. Many reformists have boycotted votes in the past to avoid giving the clerics that satisfaction. Those reformists voted in large numbers this time, inspired by a vast popular movement that rose up to support Mr. Moussavi.

Their bitterness on Saturday at the unexpected results was correspondingly severe.

“We are not disposable things to be thrown away,” said Mahshid, 20, a student who declined to give her last name because she feared repercussions from the authorities. “From now on, we won’t vote. They have insulted our feelings of patriotism.”

Meanwhile, the working class areas of southern Tehran where Mr. Ahmadinejad is popular were largely quiet, despite rumors of wild victory celebrations.

“There might be some manipulation in what the government has done,” said Maliheh Afrouz, 55, a supporter of Mr. Ahmadinejad clad in a black chador. “But the other side is exaggerating, making it seem worse than it really is.”

Copyright 2009 The New York Times Company

#41: CHRYSLER CONTROVERSY: Unsecured creditors rewarded ahead of secured lenders! (Bob Rinear resides in Eastern Time.):When word broke that the U. S. Supreme Court decided to allow the quick sale of bankrupt Chrysler to a group led by Italy’s Fiat S.p.A., many news sources reported it as a victory for Chrysler and the Obama administration. After all, the “quicker” the better, as the automaker was said to be losing $100 million a day.

But for many astute observers, the decision is shortsighted and dangerous—because what may be a “victory” for Chrysler is a potential torpedo in the port side of America’s fundamental economic structure.

Available for interviews to project a damage assessment of said torpedo is Bob Rinear, a highly experienced economist, founder of InvestYourself and publisher of the Financial Intelligence Report. With General Motors expected to pursue a similar quick-sale scenario that rewards unsecured creditors ahead of secured lenders, Rinear says the likely impact on our way of life in America is troubling and goes deeper than anyone is anticipating.

“This [decision to dismiss the rights of Chrysler’s secured lenders] is an outrage at best, and a gigantic precedent-setting disaster at worst,” says Rinear. “Going forward, how can any lender feel secure that the terms of any new ‘deal’ will be honored?”

And the long-term implication of such a precedent? . . . An implication that is the last thing America needs in a recession this bad? Rinear explains, “As more and more companies search for financing, they will be facing brick walls as lenders have to make value decisions concerning whether Uncle Sam will put his nose in the deal and possibly force out these secured lenders. Once again we see economic policy being created ‘on the fly’ with no true thought to the ramifications.”

For a longer look into the future and the way this case is turning the centuries-old “order and honor of the bond markets” upside down, call Special Guests today and arrange to have Bob Rinear on your show.


ABOUT ROBERT (BOB) RINEAR:

InvestYourself was founded in October 1997 by Robert Rinear, who owned several successful business ventures primarily in the jewelry industry. In fact, his introduction to the financial world began as the result of his experience timing the price of tangible assets, including gemstones, gold and silver, all on a daily basis—a talent critically needed to be successful in the jewelry industry.

As Bob Rinear saw the price of gold soaring in the late 1980s, he needed to find the causes of that move. What he found was intriguing. Political issues, global economics and even something as simple as the industrial output in Japan would move the price of tangible assets. He needed to learn more.

As he became more “in tune” with the global economic process, he noticed that one of his best customers traded stocks and options on a daily basis. With Mr. Rinear’s views on the overall economic situation and “Charley’s” ability in picking stocks, they found a winning combination. But it still wasn't complete.

Once introduced to the intricacies of the equity markets, it didn’t take Mr. Rinear long to realize that he had a knack for predicting the everyday flows of the stock and options markets. He began to attend trading seminars and training camps with the desire to learn how to make profitable trades on a daily basis.

One thing became abundantly clear—none of the classes gave him the total picture about how to accomplish his goal. Something was still missing in regards to how to make a living by trading stocks and options. Likewise, he realized that not all opportunities came in just stocks and options. Sometimes it was a quick move in precious metals or Treasury bonds. Other times it may have been a move in a currency.

Not to be defeated, Mr. Rinear slowly developed his own trading style that began to produce profits. After taking what he learned from the seminars and injecting his own methods of calculating stock movements, options movements, currency, real estate and Treasury movements, a successful concept emerged. He expanded this trading concept into a workable platform that anyone could follow. That was the beginning of his newsletter “Market Insight & Outlook” (now the Financial Intelligence Report). From those first few issues it became clear that the public would benefit from his years of research. He decided to offer it to the masses.

From that humble beginning a company called “InvestYourself” was created. Its main goal is to help investors of every experience level gain the investing knowledge necessary to win in a tough game that includes enabling investors to grow in their knowledge of real estate, stocks, bonds and finances in general.

#42: HOW TO GET OUT FROM UNDER TOXIC ‘UNDERWATER’ MORTGATES! (Mike Rockwood resides in Pacific Time.):CONTACT: To schedule an interview, call: Special Guests/ Lynne Campbell, Shauna Whitlock at: 630-848-0750. Television inquiries: Jerry McGlothlin, 212-699-2518.

HOW TO GET OUT FROM UNDER TOXIC ‘UNDERWATER’ MORTGATES!

Your exciting Talk Show interview expert guest, Mike Rockwood (aka The Loan Modification Mercenary), pulls no punches. His goal is blatantly biased toward rescuing distressed homeowners even at the expense of their Mortgage Lender.

Rockwood has an active distain for the almost all mortgage lending companies. He doesn’t care if ‘fat cat’ bankers keep their jobs. He thinks some of them deserve a prison cell, not a financial bailout.

This guest is solely devoted to helping homeowners in your area save their home by using legal rapid, aggressive Loan Modification strategies that work.

*Note: The Loan Mod Mercenary may offend some of your listeners and overwhelm your switchboard with callers – both positive and negative!

During your interview the Loan Mod Mercenary is able answer your questions or even take calls, if you wish, from listeners and reveal:

• How handwritten hardship letters to his bank saved him $493K in mortgage expenses
• How to figure out if you qualify in 2 minutes flat
• Why, even now, you need to miss at least one mortgage payment—on purpose!
• Why you must answer the phone every time your lender calls about missed payments
• Why banks hate lawyers and loan mod firms
• How to avoid excessive fees and scams by doing your loan mod yourself

ATTENTION PRODUCERS! Mike will give out 5 free copies of his 60-Minute Loan Modification Workbook to callers!


CREDENTIALS: Mike Rockwood is a real estate consultant in Southern California, and the author of The 60-Minute Loan Modification.


The Loan Modification Mercenary’s top 10 questions:

QUESTION #1: What is a loan modification and who qualifies? How important is it to apply now? (Answer = 2 minutes)

QUESTION #2: What hides within all of the confusing information that can cause a problem if we are not aware of what you are signing? (Answer = 30 seconds)

QUESTION #3: After all is said and done …learning what you learned and putting it into action… how much have you yourself actually saved? (Answer = 1 minute)

QUESTION #4: There is so much money being promised to help the homeowner …how much of what is promised can actually be used to save a home? (Answer = 1.5 minutes)

QUESTION #5: Is it true that anyone can do their entire loan mod application in just 60 minutes? (Answer = 1.5 minutes)

QUESTION #6: There has been a lot of advertising lately and everyone is offering protection and the ability to save you home… are they legitimate and if they are… are they costly? (Answer = 2 minute)

QUESTION #7: Is there a painless way to move through the process and are there things that a homeowner can do to speed it up?

QUESTION #8: How badly will a modification hurt credit scores and how long does it take to recover? (Answer = 30 seconds)

QUESTION #9: Are loan modifications just a band-aid for a much deeper wound… is there any long-term benefit to modifications? (Answer = 2 minutes)

QUESTION #10: What do we need to know so the banks have the upper hand?? (Answer = 2 minutes)

5 Great Controversies to Make the Phones Ring

1. Millions of us have been “bullied” into not applying for a mod
2. It will be said of us…“They had unchanging values, the salt of the earth people – you know – morons!”
3. It’s unpatriotic not to apply
4. Lawyers are ripping us off again!
5. This program will fail fast!

#43: SEN. KENNEDY’S SOCIALIZED MEDICINE: Critics Call His New Plan an “Over-Priced Government HMO” (Ron Greiner resides in Eastern Time.):The health insurance headaches and heartaches Americans are experiencing in their own lives these days are cultivating a sense of futility that has many throwing up their hands and reluctantly considering socialized healthcare.

But, as Senator Ted Kennedy (D-MA) tosses a new government healthcare plan on the table, critics are growing increasingly restless, trying harder to talk over the Democrat drum beat that all other possible solutions have been exhausted.

“On the contrary,” says Ron Greiner, founder of www.save101.com. “A far better solution already exists. Most people just don’t know about it, because our ‘leaders’ don’t want them to know about it!”

According to Greiner, this latest bill put forth by Kennedy is even worse than other socialized healthcare plans! Apart from the concept of more government control and the idea of more bureaucratic inefficiency that makes everyone from Joe Six-pack to the American Medical Association shudder, Greiner says Kennedy’s plan isn’t even worthy from a cost standpoint. “It’s an over-priced government HMO nightmare that we now have sitting in the waiting room.”

Call Special Guests today to arrange an interview with Mr. Greiner and prepare your audience for an awakening. Greiner will take the Kennedy bill head on and break it down line item by line item, if necessary, to demonstrate its inferiority in terms of cost, care and coverage when compared to a “completely tax-free” health savings account (HSA).

You and your audience will be so speechless when you hear the disparity between the Democrats’ idea of government-controlled healthcare and HSAs, you’ll wonder why anyone is even looking at the Kennedy proposal.

ABOUT YOUR GUEST SPEAKER…

Ron Greiner started in the insurance industry in 1987 as an agent for a large national insurance agency.

In 1993 he started his own insurance agency in Omaha, Nebraska selling health and life insurance.

His job functions included recruiting and training insurance agents. In 1994 and 1995 Greiner’s agency became the largest in the United States selling health insurance for Time Insurance Company, America’s oldest health insurance company. Consumers know Time Insurance Company as Assurant Health.

Medical Savings Accounts (MSAs) were signed into law in August of 1996 as a federal test for self-employed people. Greiner immediately saw the advantages of America’s first tax-free savings account and he enrolled the first MSA in the USA in October 1996.

Congress renamed MSAs to Health Savings Accounts (HSA) and made them available to all Americans, under the age of 65, in 2004. For the last 12 years Greiner’s agency, Insurance Processing Corporation (IPC) has focused entirely on enrolling consumers into tax-free MSAs and HSAs and the accompanying low cost health insurance.

Greiner also had the first press release in America on Medicare’s new option - tax free MSAs. He has senior clients in Medicare’s MSA program since the first day the program was available, 1/1/2007.

The MSA in Medicare has gotten very little attention from the Nation’s press. With this option Medicare pays for the senior’s health insurance then makes a deposit into the senior’s MSA at the bank, all tax-free.

Before entering the insurance industry Greiner was the Director of six Richard Simmons Anatomy Asylums in Denver, Colorado. These facilities had 300 employees and 30,000 members. He learned about weight loss and exercise as a student. Greiner went to Iowa State University on a wrestling scholarship.

Greiner and his agency are based in Tampa Bay, Florida. IPC services clients nationally with online enrollments at www.save101.com.


Ron Greiner’s Response to the Kennedy Healthcare Plan:

Senator Ted Kennedy’s health reform will cost the consumer 550% more and force them into HMOs. Kennedy’s plan extends Massachusetts state reforms to the remaining 49 states. Massachusetts Connector is the state’s exchange and competition is restricted to Blue Cross of Massachusetts and 5 other small insurance companies.

The state has divided up the health insurance pie. The cheapest price for a 30-year-old male from Blue Cross in Boston is $326.88 a month for an HMO. The same person can get HSA insurance in Lansing, MI for $57.41 a month from America’s oldest health insurance company, TIME Insurance. Both plans have a maximum out-of-pocket of $5,000 annually but the Blue HMO only pays 50% on Rx and the cheaper TIME HSA plan pays 100%.

The TIME Health Savings Account (HSA) plan comes with a free HSA account at UMB Bank called HSA Tools. The expensive Blue Cross HMO does not qualify for an HSA so consumers must pay deductible, vision and dental expenses with after tax dollars. The TIME HSA plan has a 24-month rate guarantee and the Blue HMO doesn’t. The TIME HSA plan is worldwide coverage and the Blue HMO gatekeeper must keep you in cities in Massachusetts. Senator Kennedy wants to eliminate Blue Cross competition then pass a law that citizens must purchase health insurance, exactly like they have done in Massachusetts.

Ron Greiner says HSAs are magical. If the above consumer is in the 28% federal income tax bracket and saves $3,000 in his HSA at UMB Bank he will save $840 in federal income tax. In other words, he saves more in federal tax than the cost of his insurance. Plus, there is no payroll tax on employer HSA contributions. Employers save workers comp and payroll tax and employees save payroll, federal and state income tax. It’s smart when employers and employees band together and cut high taxation out.

HSAs are line 25 on the front page of the IRS 1040. HSAs enjoy tax-free deposits, growth and withdrawals. Total tax freedom. Savings that is never taxed will last longer in retirement.

HSAs are the centerpiece of health care reform at the Republican National Committee (RNC). Ron Greiner enrolled America’s 1st HSA in 1996 and is better at explaining them than any politician. Socialized Medicine is still just a dream of Democratic politicians where the HSA is the law of the land. When the public learns of tax free HSAs they will become an overnight sensation. The HSA is proof that you don’t need government to have a plan. The best tax cut is no taxes and it’s TIME for your HSA.

For more information on the Kennedy plan, visit:

http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/content/article/2009/06/05/AR2009060504036.html

#44: GET A JOB! Tips of How to STAND OUT in a Crowd of Applicants (Tony Jeary resides in Central Time.):Get a job!

Easier said than done. The Labor Department reports a record 6.66 million people are now collecting unemployment benefits. This marks nearly 20 straight weeks or record unemployment and a sign companies are still not doing much hiring.

As the economy continues to falter and unemployment pushes well over 12% in Michigan and nationally near the ‘depression’ level of 10%, people need a plan to overcome grave financial obstacles and the emotional costs of economic despair.

So, just how do you get hired when 200 people are all applying for a single job opening?

PRESENTATION expert Tony Jeary’s advice? Simply, “STAND OUT” in the crowd of applicants!

During your interview with ‘Mr. Presentation™,’ Tony will give practical tips for making a positive unforgettable presentation of yourself to your perspective new boss. Here’s a single sample tip from each of Tony’s ‘Nine Fine’ categories to finesse that big job interview:

1) MENTAL ARSONEL:

Research the company’s website and specially note the priorities building your own "Mental Arsenal" and speak to those priorities during your interview presentation (a.k.a. interview).

2) TARGET POLLING:

"Target Poll" the receptionists and get insight you can use during your interview. You will likely be the only person who took the time to get the ‘inside skinny’ from the person who knows the ins and outs of the company better than anyone else.

3) PLANNED SPONENATIETY:

Leverage "Planned Spontaneity". - be so prepared that you can be spontaneous and natural.

4) LEVERAGE YOUR 3 D OUTLINE™:
Maximize your what, your why and your how to insure your interview presentations results in a high quality employment offer.

5) POWERFUL PAUSES:

There is magic that comes from using the "powerful pause" after certain questions during a presentation / job interview. Remember that one ‘strategic pause’ can land that big job!

6) 3 Ps:

When working the phone to gain an in person interview, use what we teach top CEOs to use in their speeches: Open with the 3 Ps - purpose, process and payoff- these 3 keys can open the door to a whole new world of yes responses

7) BUSINESS ENETERTAINMENT:

Get people smiling and they will follow your lead. "Business Entertainment" is the special category of ideas on how to get people smiling and the job offers will follow- You will ‘Be the Job’ when you Present with ‘B.E’!

8) KNOW YOUR TRUMPS:

Remember "Objectives trump the Agenda" - so keep your purpose clear if you really want the job offer- presenting effectively matters - present with purpose.

9) PERFECTION LOSES:

Today interviewers want people to be real. Want to be your best in an interview? Then "Go for Excellence, not perfection.” Remember not to make the perfect the enemy of the good (job). It’s a mindset that matters. Make up your mind to be yourself. Afterall, it’s your they are hiring! Be real. Be natural. Be chosen.

During your interview with Tony, he will not only give great job tips but he will also give practical, achievable presentation advise that can positively impact virtually every area in the lives of your audience.

Bottom line: Is it possible to get a job during down times? YES. If you properly prepare your presentation—and that presentation is YOU!

About Tony’s book…

Purpose-filled Presentations (Standard Publishing, 2009) is a dynamic new book that helps people overcome fear and present themselves in the most positive way possible whether applying for a job, meeting with friends over coffee or giving a speech to thousands of people in an arena.

We've all heard the statistics. The number one fear of most people is the fear of public speaking. It even comes in ahead of death itself. No matter how strong the desire to communicate a message to others, the proper technique is critical to achieving desired results.

Tony - Mr. Presentation™-- has personally coached the presidents of the largest companies in the world like Wal-Mart, Ford, Shell, New York Life, Samsung and Firestone. Now he brings those same presentation techniques and strategies to the church world.

Tony shares proven principles to help unlock dramatic personal and professional success every time you speak, whether from behind a podium, on the phone, or on a street corner. Whether you're a pastor, teacher, or candlestick maker Tony's easy-to-follow tips will help you gain confidence, improve self-esteem, enhance credibility, and maximize response.

Master presenter Tony Jeary uses his expertise of coaching CEOs around the world to provide a unique, practical handbook for you to gain confidence, enhance your credibility, maximize your response and prepare with purpose!

ABOUT YOUR SPEAKER, TONY JEARY…

Tony Jeary (known as Mr. Presentation™) is recognized as a leading authority on both strategy and presentation effectiveness. Tony impacts organizations from all over the globe via his private Strategic Acceleration Studio.

He is the personal coach of many top CEOs from companies including Wal-Mart, Ford, Shell, Sam's Club and other Fortune 500 companies. A devoted husband and the father of two daughters, Tony is available to be one of the best interview guests you’ve ever experienced.

More info: www.PurposeFilledPresentations.com

#45: W.H.O: “FLU PANDEMIC!” THE ANTIDOTE? ‘OBAMACARE’!:The W.H.O. has just announced that there is a worldwide Flu Pandemics! It is being called the first global flu epidemic in 41 years. And the antidote? ObamaCare!

Of course, what other solution could there possibly be?

NOT! The Obama socialized, nationalized, homogenized health steamroller is up and running and set to crush anything or anyone in the way of attempting its attempt to socialize 17% of the national economy by.

Now with the WHO ‘scare tactics’--Boo! Flu! Ooooh, perhaps a political panic more than a pandemic)--it should be much easier for national healthcare to annihilate private sector ‘competition’ by the U. S. government offering federal cradle to grave healthcare. (See Steve Forbes’ editorial in Forbes Magazine below.)

“Without private insurance and caregivers, the quality of health care in America will decline. Medicare and Medicaid work adequately only because people subsidize those programs with $90 billion a year from private insurance plans. Take that money away and both programs will collapse under the waste, fraud and abuse that abound in both,” states Forbes.

But the ‘fine print’ of this political pandemic is that virtually all the flu cases are mild and no more deadly now that it had been prior to the so-called pandemic. Try as they may and try as they might, all they can come up with is 141 deaths. And for this they want us to socialize nearly one third of our nation?

The last real pandemic was 41 years ago — the Hong Kong flu of 1968 — that killed about 1 million people. But even ‘normal’ flu kills about 250,000 to 500,000 people each year. And, of course, abortionists kill around 3,000,000 U.S. citizens in the US alone each year, but the government doesn’t count them—too young to vote.

But is national healthcare the only workable option to protecting America from swine and bird flu and any other ailment that may rear its ugly head? “YES!” That’s the collective answer from three expert guest panelists on this topic. Interview one, two or all three:

Panelist #1: James Lansberry resides in Central Time.

Panelist #2: Ron Greiner resides in Eastern Time.

Panelist #3: Craig R. Smith resides in Pacific Time.

PANELIST #1: JAMES LANSBERRY:

Yes, there is a better way and James Lansberry, president of the Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, would be delighted to share with your audience a healthcare concept called “Shared Care,” that has been working successfully in the private sector for decades.

Shared Care is not health insurance but it provides medical care for thousands at a mere fraction of the cost of traditional health insurance and for pennies on the dollar compared to the grossly inefficient government healthcare plans.

Essentially the way Shared Care works is that people of Faith and embracing traditional values, agree to live their lives in ‘low risk’ fashion, meaning not engaging in dangerous lifestyles of sexual promiscuity, etc., and to attend church at least twice a month. Remarkably when this criterion is met, the vector of healthcare expense plummets, allowing each member to help meet the needs of others, thus the phrase: Shared Care.

Stated Lansberry, “Health care and bioethical issues may be the most important public policy issues facing governments on both the federal and state levels. The decisions that are made in these arenas will have a profound effect on every family in the country. Often the politicians talk of the importance of issues like portability and affordability in health care. Health care sharing ministries offer a viable, vital, faith based health care solution that is both affordable and completely untied to employment. And how much more caring can health care get than real people helping one another?”

In addition to being the president of Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, James Lansberry is vice president of Samaritan Ministries International, a health care sharing ministry representing more than 13,400 households in all 50 states.

Health care sharing ministries provide a unique way for followers of Jesus Christ to meet one another’s health care needs without using health insurance.

Other people with affinity groups might consider grouping together in similar shared care concepts. Of course, groups widely known for actively engaging in ‘progressive’ lifestyles proven to be far more dangerous than in mainstream communities, would likely have larger ‘per person’ medical needs to share within their alternative community.

ABOUT JAMES LANSBERRY AND SAMARITAN MINISTRIES…

James Lansberry, president of the Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, is a Peoria-based expert available to comment on a variety of issues related to health care, including alternatives to traditional health insurance, the economics of health care, health care public policy, health care and tax policy, and the health care industry in general.

Lansberry also is vice president of Peoria-based Samaritan Ministries International. He is a frequent radio guest and an occasional preacher/speaker at churches and conferences. His articles have been published in Heritage Forum, the Journal of Modern Ministry, and Every Thought Captive. He has been interviewed by the CBS Evening News, U.S. News and World Report and the Washington Post.

The Alliance, with offices at 2400 W. Altorfer Drive, Peoria, was formed in 2007 to track and address public policy developments that could affect member ministries, which include Samaritan and Medi-Share. The two ministries provide health care cost-sharing arrangements among persons of similar and sincerely held beliefs.

Additional information on the Web: www.healthcaresharing.org or at:
www.samaritanministries.org


PANELIST #2: RON GREINER: Founder of Insurance Processing Corporation

Discusses the Republican antidote to ObamaCare: Health Savings Accounts (HSA)

Consumer health insurance expert Ron Greiner of www.save101.com suggests a win–win for US citizens, big corporations and big government: “Health Savings Accounts” (HSAs).

“At the core of the newly proposed (AHIP) mandate is that all Americans must buy health insurance. Unfortunately, the government will be doing the selling so there will be no managed competition among agents. And we all know how the consumer fares when there’s no competition. Worse yet, the ‘community rating’ concept means there will be no medical underwriting. So, the young and healthy will pay a lot more to spread the risk,” said Greiner.

ABOUT RON GREINER…

Ron Greiner started in the insurance industry in 1987 as an agent for a large national insurance agency. In 1993 he started his own insurance agency in Omaha, Nebraska selling health and life insurance. His job functions included recruiting and training insurance agents. In 1994 and 1995 Greiner’s agency became the largest in the United States selling health insurance for Time Insurance Company, America’s oldest health insurance company. Consumers know Time Insurance Company as Assurant Health.

Medical Savings Accounts (MSAs) were signed into law in August of 1996 as a federal test for self-employed people. Greiner immediately saw the advantages of America’s first tax-free savings account and he enrolled the first MSA in the USA in October 1996. Congress renamed MSAs to Health Savings Accounts (HSA) and made them available to all Americans, under the age of 65, in 2004. For the last 12 years Greiner’s agency, Insurance Processing Corporation (IPC) has focused entirely on enrolling consumers into tax-free MSAs and HSAs and the accompanying low cost health insurance.

Greiner also had the first press release in America on Medicare’s new option - tax free MSAs. He has senior clients in Medicare’s MSA program since the first day the program was available, 1/1/2007. The MSA in Medicare has gotten very little attention from the Nation’s press. With this option Medicare pays for the senior’s health insurance then makes a deposit into the senior’s MSA at the bank, all tax-free.

Before entering the insurance industry Greiner was the Director of six Richard Simmons Anatomy Asylums in Denver, Colorado. These facilities had 300 employees and 30,000 members. He learned about weight loss and exercise as a student. Greiner went to Iowa State University on a wrestling scholarship.

Greiner and his agency are based in Tampa Bay, Florida. IPC services clients nationally with online enrollments at www.save101.com.


PANELIST #3: CRAIG SMITH: CEO Swiss America Corporation

“We cannot afford Obama Healthcare Reform. If we truly want to reform healthcare we need to start with tort reform. We need to stop lawyers from frivolous lawsuits that employ junk science to sue doctors, hospitals and pharmaceutical companies for billions. If you get the lawyers out of medicine, you'll get medical costs down dramatically." –Craig Smith

“Now is the defusing this $100 Trillion Healthcare Time Bomb. We need to explore serious, alternative free market solutions to fix our broken Medicare and Social Security system, instead of asking Americans and their employers to embark on a grandiose experiment in socialized medicine. Such an experiment could drive federal taxes up by 80%.”

“It sounds to me like the government is about to mandate participation in the biggest Ponzi scheme since The Social Security Act of 1935!”

“The prospect of government mandating employers to provide coverage to all full- time workers should terrify business owners. The idea of forcing employers to pay for a government run health care system or pay the equivalent to the Treasury. What is the difference? This is going to cost jobs at a time when can least afford to lose them.”

“What we are facing is not just a health care crisis, but a looming government revenue crisis. It’s a double whammy. As the Social Security surplus disappears, it forces us to confront the true size of our deficits. Unless we can find a workable fix in the next decade, all those IOUs will have to be paid back by the next generation.”

“The Medicare and Social Security crisis requires a substantial overhaul of the system. It's time to get the government's hands out of our pockets and instead allow the free market privatization of our retirement options. Great Britain and Australia have both proven privatization of Social Security to be successful. Privatization produces; more income, boosts private savings, triggers economic growth and minimizes tax burdens.”

ABOUT CRAIG SMITH…

Craig R. Smith is the CEO of Swiss America Corporation and author of many articles and books including Black Gold Stranglehold and Rediscovering Gold in the 21st Century.

As an economic analyst, Craig instantly engages audiences with his common-sense perspective on national and global economic trends.

Over the past three decades he has been interviewed on over 1,500 radio and TV programs including: FOX News, CNN, CNBC, ABC, NBC, CBS, PBS, CBN, TBN, Time, The Wall Street Journal, The New York Times, and Newsweek.


THE FOLLOWING ARTICLES MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

THE NEW YORK TIMES/ June 12, 2009

W.H.O. Raises Alert Level as Flu Spreads to 74 Countries
By NICK CUMMING-BRUCE and ANDREW JACOBS

GENEVA — The World Health Organization has told its member nations it is declaring a swine flu pandemic — the first global flu epidemic in 41 years, news services reported.

The move came after an emergency meeting with flu experts here that was convened after a sharp rise in cases in Australia, which reported 1,224 cases on Wednesday, and rising numbers in Britain, Japan, and elsewhere in Asia.

In a statement sent to member countries, the W.H.O. said it decided to raise the pandemic alert level from phase 5 to 6, indicating a global pandemic outbreak, The Associated Press said, attributing the information to health officials from Scotland, Indonesia and Thailand. An official announcement of the change was due at 6 p.m. Geneva time Thursday (12 p.m. in New York).

In an effort to avoid triggering panic with such an announcement, W.H.O. officials are expected to include a caveat that the flu, which has resulted in mostly mild cases, is not more deadly now that it has been declared a pandemic. Rather, the announcement reflects the global spread of the disease, not an increase in its severity.

According to W.H.O rules, the organization should declare a pandemic once it finds evidence of widespread “community transmission” — meaning beyond travelers, schools and immediate contacts — on two continents.

In its latest report, the W.H.O. said Wednesday that 74 countries had reported 27,737 cases of the disease, and 141 deaths. Since the outbreak started in April, the number of cases and deaths had been heavily concentrated in the Americas, but the rise in cases in Australia and elsewhere appears to indicate community-wide spread in other world regions.

The declaration of a pandemic will trigger drug makers to speed up production of a swine flu vaccine and prompt governments to devote more money to containing the virus. While international health officials have said the flu appears to be less deadly than the annual bouts of seasonal flu that sweep the globe each year, they have warned that the virus could mutate into a more lethal strain during the southern hemisphere’s upcoming winter flu season. They are also worried that poorer countries could be overwhelmed with cases they do not have the capacity to treat.

The experts gathered at the request of the W.H.O. director-general, Margaret Chan, who held a teleconference Wednesday with worst affected countries to try to determine if “indisputable” evidence that the spread of the disease met the organization’s criteria for declaring a pandemic.

The last pandemic — the Hong Kong flu of 1968 — killed about 1 million people, news services reported. Ordinary flu kills about 250,000 to 500,000 people each year.

Meanwhile, efforts to limit the spread of the flu around the world continue. In Hong Kong, which is especially skittish about the flu after its experience with a lethal SARS outbreak in 2003, authorities have ordered all kindergartens, primary schools and day care centers to close after an outbreak of swine flu was reported at a local secondary school. The order, effective Friday, will last at least two weeks and affect about a half million students.

There have been 50 reported cases of H1N1 flu in Hong Kong but health officials said the 12 infected students at St. Paul’s Convent School marked the first cluster of cases. The students are being held in quarantine at a hospital while officials try to determine the source of the infections.

On Wednesday, a 55-year-old man became the first person to contract the case locally in Hong Kong, according to health officials. So far, the city has had no fatalities from the disease.

Hong Kong’s health department says it will order 5 million doses of flu vaccine and open eight flu clinics. “The government is well prepared,” Donald Tsang, the city’s chief executive, said at a news conference on Thursday announcing the school closures. “There’s no need to panic.”

China confirmed 10 new flu cases on Thursday, bringing the total number of infections on the mainland to 111. Health officials say all of the country’s flu cases have involved people returning from abroad. According to the Health Ministry, the 10 new cases included a Canadian-Chinese teenager who had just been in Toronto and two children in Shanghai who had been in the United States. There have been no deaths, and more than half those infected have been discharged from the hospital, the ministry said.

A Health Ministry official on Thursday boasted that the government’s stringent prevention measures have kept swine flu from spreading in China. Every passenger arriving from overseas is checked for fever and those suspected of having had contact with an infected person are placed in quarantine for a week.

“We think the method we are using has been pretty successful,” said Mao Qun’an, a ministry spokesman.

Chinese officials released Mayor Ray Nagin of New Orleans from three days of quarantine in Shanghai on Wednesday. Mr. Nagin and his wife had been placed in isolation after a passenger who sat one row ahead of them on a flight from the United States came down with a fever.

Mr. Nagin, who had been set to attend a series of economic development meetings, described the experience as “surreal” and said he and his wife had their temperatures taken every three to four hours. “When you see people coming toward you with full hazmat gear on, it’s pretty interesting,” he told The Associated Press after his release, referring to hazardous material protection.

Nick Cumming-Bruce reported from Geneva and Andrew Jacobs from Beijing. Sharon Otterman contributed reporting from New York. Copyright 2009 The New York Times


Intelligent Investing With Steve Forbes
Real Health Care
By Steve Forbes May 19, 2009

Get ready for a summer flu of unprecedented severity. Sometime in June the Obama administration will introduce its plan to deal with the problem of 46 million Americans who, either by choice or lack of means, don't have health insurance. To deal with the problem, he'll socialize 17% of the national economy. And once the government has that control, it will never give it up.

"Medicare for everyone!" will be the rallying cry of the health care socialists. They'll demonize private insurers as heartless profiteers and the government will offer coverage through its own health care company. They'll call the public option a choice, but it's really just a way to crowd private insurers out of the market.

Without private insurance and caregivers, the quality of health care in America will decline. Medicare and Medicaid work adequately only because people subsidize those programs with $90 billion a year from private insurance plans. Take that money away and both programs will collapse under the waste, fraud and abuse that abound in both.

We can help the uninsured get access to coverage, but we have to be smart about it. Let’s stop trying to offer dollar for dollar coverage. Catastrophic insurance is what most people need and it's quite affordable. Let people buy insurance across state lines so we have a truly competitive national market. Before we turn to socialism, we need to give the free market a chance--it's worked in every other part of our economy.

© 2009 Forbes Magazine

#46: AMA OBJECTS TO ‘OBAMACARE’: Big Government Healthcare is NOT the only solution (James Lansberry resides in Central Time.):The American Medical Association (AMA), America’s largest physician organization with 250,000 members, has just voiced its opposition to the ObamaCare health steamroller that is on on its way through Congress, poised to crush anything or anyone in the way of its ‘mission’ to socialize 17% of the national economy by eliminating private sector ‘competition’ to the huge proposed federal cradle-to-grave healthcare program. (See New York Times article below.)

Echoing AMA concerns is Steve Forbes, who said, “Without private insurance and caregivers, the quality of health care in America will decline. Medicare and Medicaid work adequately only because people subsidize those programs with $90 billion a year from private insurance plans. Take that money away and both programs will collapse under the waste, fraud and abuse that abound in both.”

But is national healthcare the only workable option to protecting America from swine and bird flu and any other ailment that may rear its ugly head?

Yes, there is a better way and James Lansberry, president of the Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, would be delighted to share with your audience a healthcare concept called “Shared Care,” that has been working successfully in the private sector for decades.

Shared Care is not health insurance but it provides medical care for thousands at a mere fraction of the cost of traditional health insurance and for pennies on the dollar compared to the grossly inefficient government healthcare plans.

Essentially the way Shared Care works is that people of Faith and embracing traditional values, agree to live their lives in ‘low risk’ fashion, meaning not engaging in dangerous lifestyles of sexual promiscuity, etc., and to attend church at least twice a month. Remarkably when the criterion is met, the vector of healthcare expense plummets, allowing each member to help meet the needs of others, thus the phrase: Shared Care.

Stated Lansberry, “Health care and bioethical issues may be the most important public policy issues facing governments on both the federal and state levels. The decisions that are made in these arenas will have a profound effect on every family in the country. Often the politicians talk of the importance of issues like portability and affordability in health care. Health care sharing ministries offer a viable, vital, faith based health care solution that is both affordable and completely untied to employment. And how much more caring can health care get than real people helping one another?”

In addition to being the president of Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, James Lansberry is vice president of Samaritan Ministries International, a health care sharing ministry representing more than 13,400 households in all 50 states.

Health care sharing ministries provide a unique way for followers of Jesus Christ to meet one another’s health care needs without using health insurance.

Other people with affinity groups might consider grouping together in similar shared care concepts. Of course, groups widely known for actively engaging in ‘progressive’ lifestyles proven to be far more dangerous than in mainstream communities, would likely have larger ‘per person’ medical needs to share within their alternative community.

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

THE NEW YORK TIMES/ June 11, 2009

Doctors’ Group Opposes Public Insurance Plan
By ROBERT PEAR

WASHINGTON — As the health care debate heats up, the American Medical Association is letting Congress know that it will oppose creation of a government-sponsored insurance plan, which President Obama and many other Democrats see as an essential element of legislation to remake the health care system.

The opposition, which comes as Mr. Obama prepares to address the powerful doctors’ group on Monday in Chicago, could be a major hurdle for advocates of a public insurance plan. The A.M.A., with about 250,000 members, is America’s largest physician organization.

While committed to the goal of affordable health insurance for all, the association had said in a general statement of principles that health services should be “provided through private markets, as they are currently.” It is now reacting, for the first time, to specific legislative proposals being drafted by Congress.

In the presidential campaign last year and in a letter to Congress last week, Mr. Obama called for a new “public health insurance option,” which he said would compete with private insurers and keep them honest.

Speaker Nancy Pelosi of California said Wednesday that she supported that goal. “A bill will not come out of the House without a public option,” she said Wednesday on MSNBC.

But in comments submitted to the Senate Finance Committee, the American Medical Association said: “The A.M.A. does not believe that creating a public health insurance option for non-disabled individuals under age 65 is the best way to expand health insurance coverage and lower costs. The introduction of a new public plan threatens to restrict patient choice by driving out private insurers, which currently provide coverage for nearly 70 percent of Americans.”

If private insurers are pushed out of the market, the group said, “the corresponding surge in public plan participation would likely lead to an explosion of costs that would need to be absorbed by taxpayers.”

While not the political behemoth it once was, the association probably has more influence than any other group in the health care industry. Lawmakers seek its opinion and support whenever possible. It has repeatedly persuaded Congress to cancel or postpone cuts in Medicare payments to doctors, though it has not secured a “permanent fix.”

If the doctors are too aggressive in fighting the public plan, they risk alienating Democrats whose support they need for legislation to increase their Medicare fees.

The group has historically had a strong lobbying operation, supplemented by generous campaign donations. Since the 2000 election cycle, its political action committee has contributed $9.8 million to Congressional candidates, according to data from the Federal Election Commission and the Center for Responsive Politics. Republicans got more than Democrats in the four election cycles before 2008, when 56 percent went to Democrats.

Robert Gibbs, the White House press secretary, said that in his address to the group next week, Mr. Obama would “outline the case for health care reform and make clear why we can’t afford to wait another year, or another administration, to bring down costs that are crushing families, businesses and government.”

Mr. Gibbs did not say whether Mr. Obama would discuss a public insurance plan, the most contentious issue in the debate.

The A.M.A., an umbrella group for 180 medical societies, does not speak for all doctors. One group, Physicians for a National Health Program, supports a single-payer system of insurance, in which a single public agency would pay for health services, but most care would still be delivered by private doctors and hospitals. In recent years, some doctors have become so fed up with the administrative hassles of private insurance that they are looking for alternatives.

Until now, stakeholders in the health care industry have generally muted their criticism of Democratic proposals. But as details of the legislation have emerged, the criticism has become more pointed.

America’s Health Insurance Plans, a lobby for insurers, said Tuesday that the government plan proposed by some Senate Democrats could “dismantle employer-based coverage and significantly increase costs for those who remain in private coverage.”

Under a proposal favored by many Democrats, doctors who take Medicare patients would also have to participate in the new public plan. Democrats say that requirement is needed to make sure the public plan can go into business right away with a large network of doctors.

The medical association said it “cannot support any plan design that mandates physician participation.” For one thing, it said, “many physicians and providers may not have the capability to accept the influx of new patients that could result from such a mandate.”

“In addition,” the A.M.A. said, “federal programs traditionally have never required physician or other provider participation, but rather such participation has been on a voluntary basis.”

In an interview, Dr. Nancy H. Nielsen, president of the American Medical Association, said she was delighted by Mr. Obama’s plan to address the doctors.

“Health care reform is as important to us as it is to him,” Dr. Nielsen said. “We will be engaged in discussions in a constructive way. But we absolutely oppose government control of health care decisions or mandatory physician participation in any insurance plan.”

Mr. Obama’s trip recalls a speech to the A.M.A. in Chicago on June 13, 1993, by Hillary Rodham Clinton. She proposed “a new bargain” in which the White House would limit malpractice lawsuits and free doctors from onerous rules if doctors supported her effort to overhaul the health care system.

The association agrees with Mr. Obama on some points. It says that individuals and families who can afford coverage should be required to obtain it.

Like Mr. Obama, the association wants Congress to cut payments to private Medicare Advantage plans. The White House says Medicare pays the private plans 14 percent more than it would cost the government to care for the same people in traditional Medicare.

Ron Nixon contributed reporting.


Copyright 2009 The New York Times Company
ABOUT JAMES LANSBERRY AND SAMARITAN MINISTRIES…

James Lansberry, president of the Alliance of Health Care Sharing Ministries, is a Peoria-based expert available to comment on a variety of issues related to health care, including alternatives to traditional health insurance, the economics of health care, health care public policy, health care and tax policy, and the health care industry in general.

Lansberry also is vice president of Peoria-based Samaritan Ministries International. He is a frequent radio guest and an occasional preacher/speaker at churches and conferences. His articles have been published in Heritage Forum, the Journal of Modern Ministry, and Every Thought Captive. He has been interviewed by the CBS Evening News, U.S. News and World Report and the Washington Post.

The Alliance, with offices at 2400 W. Altorfer Drive, Peoria, was formed in 2007 to track and address public policy developments that could affect member ministries, which include Samaritan and Medi-Share. The two ministries provide health care cost-sharing arrangements among persons of similar and sincerely held beliefs.

Additional information on the Web: www.healthcaresharing.org or at:
www.samaritanministries.org

#47: $250 OIL! $6/GALLON GAS? Can Projection by Russian Energy Group Gazprom Be Right? (Guest resides in Eastern Time.):Russian Energy Group Gazprom reiterated their last year’s estimates of $250 a barrel oil! (See Guardian UK article below.)

How can this be? Hasn’t anyone told Russia or the Mid East that we’re in the middle of a recession and maybe a depression? How dare they? Don’t’ they care about US?

In a word: No.

The price of oil shattered the $71 a barrel mark today for two reasons, 1) Alleged revelations that proven oil reserves had fallen for the first time in 10 years, and 2) The freshly repeated prediction of $250 oil.

How is this possible? Is this really happening again? This is more than double the $30 oil of just four months ago!

Sorting out this crazy oil mess is your Talk Show interview guest, the author of blockbuster book on oil, “Black Gold Stranglehold,” that debunks the theory of scarce oil.

During your interview, Craig will address the predictions of $250 by Alexei Miller, chairman of the Russian energy group Gazprom, who defended his infamous estimates of $250 a barrel, saying, "This forecast has not become reality yet, given that the [credit] crisis gained momentum and exerted a powerful impact on the global energy market. But does this mean that our forecast was unrealistic? Not at all."

Craig explains that the price of oil is relative to the value of the dollar that is plummeting due more dollars being printed at a break neck pace, and the expected continued accelerated dilution of the dollar expected in the near and mid future. But there is hope in sight. According to Craig, if the world really knew the truth about the myth of scarce oil, the price of oil could drop dramatically, despite a weak dollar.

What most people don’t understand about oil, according to Craig, is that oil is NOT made from decayed dinosaurs. It’s not even organic. It’s produced deep in the earth in vast amounts and that the Russian oil company executives know this and that is why they are drilling such deep oil wells, to tap into the deep reaches of non-organic oil! Don’t believe Craig? Then continue to believe in The Tooth Fairy, ‘scarce’ oil and other myths.

ABOUT CRAIG SMITH…

Craig R. Smith is the CEO of Swiss America Corporation and author of many articles and books including Black Gold Stranglehold and Rediscovering Gold in the 21st Century. As an economic analyst, Craig instantly engages audiences with his common-sense perspective on national and global economic trends. Over the past two decades he has been interviewed on over 1,500 radio and TV programs including: FOX News, CNN, CNBC, ABC, NBC, CBS, PBS, CBN, TBN, Time, The Wall Street Journal, The New York Times, and Newsweek.


THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

guardian.co.uk/ Wednesday 10 June 2009

Oil price leaps to year's high
Predictions of $250 a barrel on fears for oil reserves, hopes of economic recovery and hedging against weak dollar
By Terry Macalister

The price of oil burst through the $71 a barrel mark today amid revelations that proven reserves had fallen for the first time in 10 years and predictions that the price could eventually hit $250.

The latest high – from lows of $30 only four months ago – came on the New York Mercantile Exchange, where the cost of July deliveries rose by $1.35 to $71.36.

This comes on top of a $2 rise the day before as investors rushed into the market on the back of lower stockpile figures, higher demand estimates and speculation against further falls in the dollar.

"I wouldn't be surprised if we're testing $80 in a week or two," said one analyst, while BP's chief executive, Tony Hayward, questioned whether $90 could be the "right" value.

Kuwait's oil minister, Sheikh Ahmad al-Abdullah al-Sabah, put some of the rise down to signs of recovery in Asia but warned that overall demand was still weaker than last year. Opec would not raise supply at current oil prices but did not rule it out "if it reached $100", he said.

Alexei Miller, chairman of the Russian energy group Gazprom, raised the stakes further when he reiterated last year's estimates of $250 a barrel. "This forecast has not become reality yet, given that the [credit] crisis gained momentum and exerted a powerful impact on the global energy market. But does this mean that our forecast was unrealistic? Not at all."

The latest surge has also raised fears that higher energy costs could snuff out the nascent economic recovery. Shares on Wall Street's Nasdaq index fell 1%.

The febrile atmosphere in oil markets was fed by the publication of BP's Statistical Review of World Energy, which showed that the world's proven crude reserves had fallen by 3bn barrels to 1.258tn by 2008 from a revised 1.261tn in 2007.

Declines in important producers such as Russia and Norway offset rises in new areas such as Vietnam, India and Egypt. The figures did not include Canada's tar sands, which are put at 150bn barrels.

The drop is partly attributed to a drop in exploration drilling due to the precipitous fall in oil prices last year but also to the end of "easy" oil. Conflict this week in the Amazon and speculation about Arctic drilling underlined how oil companies are pushing into environmentally sensitive places to find new reserves.

Tony Hayward, BP's chief executive, insisted there was enough crude to last 42 years at current consumption levels, roughly the same as last year. Adherents of "peak oil" – the theory that the maximum rate of oil production has been reached – believe supplies will run out much sooner because of growing demand.

The BP boss said: "Our data confirms that the world has enough proved reserves of oil, natural gas and coal to meet the world's energy needs for decades to come." Higher prices allowed companies to invest in finding further reserves while not choking off demand, he said.

"There is a rational argument to say that somewhere between $60 to $90 a barrel is the right sort of level," he said.

Global oil consumption fell 0.6% to 81.8m barrels a day in 2008, the first decline since 1993 and the largest drop for 27 years. North Sea output dropped 6.3% to its lowest level for three decades.

By contrast, gas use rose by 2.5% globally and 16% in China. The use of coal, the heaviest emitter of climate-changing carbon, rose 3.1%, with Chinese demand up 6.8%, leaving it with a market share of 43% despite more high-profile announcements about its commitment to renewables.

BP says it is difficult to compare "primary" carbon fuels with renewable sources of electricity. BP notes that globally solar capacity rose nearly 70% and wind by 30% year on year but says renewables only generated 1.5% of global electricity and therefore began at a low base.But it notes these sources are playing an increasingly important role in some countries with wind power providing 20% of total electricity generation in Denmark, 11% in Spain and 7% in Germany.

Despite the 2008 rise in coal consumption, the BP data showed growth in the use of the fuel continued to decline compared with 2007 when it rose 5% and five years ago when it went up by 8%.

But the coal figures will alarm environmentalists and increase the calls for companies and governments to speed up trials on "clean coal" technology and the use of carbon capture and storage.

China has promised to increase its use of renewables: Zhang Xiaoqiang, vice-chairman of the China's national development and reform commission, says the country may produce as much as 20% of its energy from wind and solar by 2020.

© Guardian News and Media Limited 2009

#48: BIG BAILOUT BLUNDER: Why Obama’s “Stimulus” Attempt Has Failed :Sadly, getting after the roots of America’s current economic affliction can be crystallized, in part, by a quote from the movie Dumb and Dumber—in particular, the moment when Harry confesses to Lloyd that he’s “sick and tired of running from creditors.”

With the feds under the Obama administration once again failing in their attempt to solve all our problems simply by printing more money, it’s apparent that the time has come for the United States to likewise face the music.

Like silly men in their flying machines riding a brief gust of wind for an instant before the flaws of their designs become glaringly apparent, the Obama administration has seen its half-baked plan to “stimulate” the economy with massive spending bills and bailouts quickly go from a gasp of success to an inevitable failure in just a few months.

For an expert view on the astoundingly obvious reasons why, an astute reprimand of the government’s naïve effort to spend our way out of debt, and a boot-strap-reality projection on America’s financial road ahead, look no further.

Special Guests brings you CEO of Swiss America, Craig R. Smith and publisher of The International Forecaster, economist Bob Chapman. They’re available individually or as a guest panel to shoot your audience straight when the banks and the feds won’t.

Smith is a no-nonsense businessman and investor who is a master at communicating the complexities of economics in a manner that resonates with people who want the simple truth about the issues that affect them. In this case, he breaks it down quite simply:

“Bailouts don't work. Never have. Never will. Any student of basic Austrian economics understands this, and knows the lingering effects will be disastrous for the U.S. dollar. Unfortunately, every American for generations to come will be penalized—not rewarded—by the actions of our government.”

Chapman is a seasoned economist with a background in U.S. military intelligence and, therefore, augments his finance expertise with a keen eye for the everyday deceptions and manipulations that exist within the inner workings of the global economy.

“The Federal Reserve—that privately-owned entity—is printing money out of thin air to carry out its failed policies on behalf of the Treasury . . . which, incidentally, by September, will have a fiscal budget deficit of $2 to $2.5 trillion. Meanwhile, the revenues are half of that. The monetization at $2.2 trillion net is preposterous. How can any thinking person have trust and confidence in such policies that have perpetually brought us financial instability?”

Needless to say, these observations by Smith and Chapman are just the beginning. Get the straight talk on precisely why the President’s stimulus plan is like throwing water on a grease fire. Call Special Guests today.


ABOUT CRAIG R. SMITH:

Craig R. Smith is an author, commentator and popular media guest because he instantly engages audiences with his common-sense analyses of local, national and global trends. Serving as CEO of Swiss America for over 25 years, Craig understands that Americans want solid answers to the tough questions and that real leadership begins with servanthood. Craig's most recent book is Black Gold Stranglehold: The Myth of Scarcity and the Politics of Oil, which he co-authored with WND columnist Jerome R. Corsi.


ABOUT ROBERT J. CHAPMAN:

Bob Chapman is founder and editor of The International Forecaster, a compendium of information on business, finance, economics and social and political issues worldwide. It directly reaches 10,000 investors and brokers every month, while portions of his publication are picked up by 60 other financial publications, resulting in an aggregate number of weekly readers in the range of 10 million investors. Bob spent three years in U.S. Army Counterintelligence, mostly in Europe. He speaks German and French and is conversant in Spanish. He lived in Europe for six years, off and on, three years in Africa, one year in Canada and another year in the Bahamas. Mr. Chapman became a stockbroker from 1960 to 1988. For 18 of those years he owned his own brokerage firm with over 6,000 clients.

#49: MODERN ENVIRONMENTALISM: Merger of Junk Science and Occultism (Rob Roselli resides in Eastern Time.):Today’s global ‘warming’ scare originated as a crusade against global ‘cooling’ but as a spell of warm weather set in, the ‘scientists’ and ‘environmentalists’ changed their catch phrase to ‘global warming.’

But after a few cold winters, including the one that snowed in Al Gore’s infamous Global Warming conference, the ‘enlightened’ ones were in quite a fix. The fear mongers couldn’t seem to make up their mind on whether our planted is being toasted of freeze dried. So, what was their solution? They now just call the problem: “Climate Change.” Apparently they are ‘recycling’ the word ‘change’ since it worked so well in the last election cycle.

But as humorous and harmless as this may sound, there is a much more insidious and dangerous side to these kooky sounding ‘Climateers’.

Rob Roselli is available to be your Talk show interview guest to discuss this dark side of the modern environmental movement, that according to Rob, has much more to do with Ancient pagan religions than sound science and that its effects on the environment are usually negative.

Bob’s unabashed premise is that most of the modern environmentalism movement is a merger of junk science and outright occultism. If Rob’s premise sounds startling to some in your audience, they need to be made aware that wholesale sacrifices to save ‘Mother Earth are already occurring on a global scale.

As “kooky” as these opening statements sound to the uninformed, they are easily verifiable. Rob is not speaking in a vacuum; his sources are as diverse as the King James Bible and Helena Blavatsky, the ‘mother’ of the so-called New Age and founder of American occultism. If fact, in a sworn statement before the United States Senate Public Works Committee in a March 21, 2007 meeting, global warming was described as a ‘spiritual issue’.

Rob stated, “The problem, as with the pre-meditated economic crisis about to befall us all, is not in stating the obvious or even verifying the facts as it is getting people to believe it. The key is to ‘de-program’ ourselves from ‘both’ sides of the political spectrum in this country and look at the facts without any of those same pre-programmed prejudices.”

Rob Roselli dares to blame some Republicans in the same breath with Democrats for foisting phony New Age Environmentalism Religion upon the American people. ‘Conservative’ and liberal pundits might laugh off Roselli’s position as being wholly ridiculous or even ‘conspiratorial’ but he has the documentation to back up his assertions.

“What’s truly ironic is that ‘both’ sides are being manipulated by what ‘conspiracy theorist’ Anthony Sutton calls ‘The Order’. That is The Order of Skull and Bones, the American version of the German Illuminated ones or ‘Illuminati’. Essentially, ‘The Order’ works under the Hegelian dialect named after the German philosopher Hegel. His basic premise was that it was okay to have ‘competing’ sides of thought as long as everyone ultimately serves the state. The Georgia Guidestones establish a direct link between ‘The Order’ and the genocide happening under the guise of ‘environmentalism’.

Want specifics? Rob will give them to your audience. He cites as a specific example: corn based ethanol that Rob calls a scam being used to solve a conglomeration of junk science known as ‘global warming’ (or now ‘climate change’). The problem is people are starving to death as cropland is diverted to the growth of corn not to mention multiple real negative effects on the environment. Another example is our so-called President. We now have a self professed ‘Christian’ who voted against something called ‘The Born Alive Infant Abortion Protection Act’. Abortion was the tool of Planned Parenthood founder and American eugenics, ‘big wig’ Margret Sanger in the 1920s. American eugenics in turn served as the model for Adolf Hitler’s ‘race hygiene’ program.

“One must first simply realize that unspeakable evil has existed in this world in the form of an Adolf Hitler or Joseph Stalin,” said Roselli, adding, “It is of the utmost arrogance to brush off the possibility of such evil emanating from this country just because ‘it can never happen here’. Ultimately that’s the only defense ‘both’ sides of the political spectrum have when the facts are laid bare without any pre-programmed prejudices.

ABOUT ROB ROSELLI…

Rob earned a BS in Civil Engineering from Vanderbilt University, and an MS in Civil Engineering from New Jersey Institute of Technology. Rob is currently licensed as a professional engineer in three states and employed in the State of New York.

As a writer and speaker, Rob is on a mission to apply light to darkness in its many forms.

#50: NORTH KOREA: Lethal Bully Pulls the Hammer Back on Its Nuclear Gun (General Curry resides in DC/Eastern Time.):Not satisfied with its dismissal of the 56-year-old armistice agreement two weeks ago, North Korea has further puffed up its chest to say it will launch a “merciless offensive” of nuclear proportions should any nation breach its “dignity and sovereignty.”

Like a pouting toddler with a Louisville Slugger, the ornery Kim Jong Il and the starved and reclusive North Koreans have always been accounted for by the international community, but never quite been perceived as the highest code-red threat . . . unless you’re U.S. Major General Jerry Curry.

Available to be your Talk Show guest, Maj. General Curry’s decorated military and political background began in the Korean War and ascended through Viet Nam to the position of Special Assistant to President Reagan’s Defense Secretary Caspar Weinberger, whose final book, “The Next War,” predicted a scenario in which North Korea would eventually resume aggression against South Korea, providing a diversion inviting China to move against U.S. ally, Taiwan.

Now, with these latest developments in the Pacific Rim approaching something like the Cuban Missile Crisis, General Curry reveals the likelihood of Weinberger’s foretelling and the deep-seeded contentions of the “Forgotten War” that never really went away. As an expert on terrorism, the General can also speak to the inevitable questions that will be on the collective mind of your audience: Just how far could a North Korean “offensive” reach? Seoul? Taipei? Alaska? California? And what can we honestly expect from Barack Obama in the face of this escalating situation including a possible missile launch?

The five permanent members of the UN Security Council have approved a draft resolution imposing financial restrictions on North Korea, stopping their arms exports and seeking full UN Council approval to search North Korean vessel, which North Korean views as an act of war. (See New York Times article below.)

How does North Korea’s recent posturing influence that of China, Iran, Venezuela and other nations? How does a power transition from crazy Kim Jong Il to his alleged alcoholic son change the game? Schedule an interview with one of the few guests who can match the depth of this topic. Call Special Guests today!

ABOUT MAJOR GENERAL JERRY CURRY…

Major Gen. Jerry R. Curry (US Army Ret.) Ph.D. is a decorated combat veteran, Army Aviator, Paratrooper and Ranger who has served his country both in the military and as a Presidential appointee in three administrations. He served as Deputy Assistant Secretary of Defense in the Carter Administration, as Press Secretary to Secretary of Defense Caspar Weinberger in the Reagan Administration, and as Administrator of NHTSA for President George H. W. Bush.

A munitions expert, General Curry was the top ranking officer overseeing all equipment at the Military Proving Ground at Aberdeen, Maryland.

But Jerry Curry was not born with a silver spoon in his mouth. Far from it, Jerry was a steel mill worker from the small town of Liberty, Pennsylvania who enlisted in the Army as a young private and rose to the rank of major general, a feat almost unheard of.

His recent book, From Private to General – An African American Soldier Rises Through the Ranks (Believe Books, 2007), is a gritty true-life story of an African American soldier determined to succeed in a white-dominated military culture, facing the barriers of racism and elitism without compromising his values or becoming a victim. He rose through the ranks by distinguishing himself in intense challenges of combat and in military command assignments and by surviving the political infighting that is endemic in the military.

Curry shares fresh insights on America’s role in Vietnam, achieving racial harmony, challenges in the military, leadership principles and America’s role in the world today. His insights into politics and military strategy are particularly relevant to the current situation in Iraq and the lessons in leadership that he presents are of timeless benefit. His descriptions of combat in Vietnam are particularly fascinating.

Gen. Curry on CNN:
http://www.special-guests.com/guests/data/video/Curry Jerry CNN inteview 07-25-08.mov

AREAS OF EXPERTISE:
Military issues
National Security
Terrorism – the very real threat to America
The role of America in the world today
Role of America in Vietnam and parallels between Vietnam and Iraq
Racism in politics and the military
Leadership in the military and political arenas

SUGGESTED INTERVIEW QUESTIONS:

1) How serious is the nuclear threat from Iran, North Korea & Pakistan to America?

2) What did President Reagan’s Defense Secretary Caspar Weinberger predict in his book that China would do regarding the then impending resurgence of North Korea as a threat?

3) What do we know about the new 26-year-old No. Korean dictator, Kim Jong-un?

4) Is it true the North Korean nuclear missiles can reach Alaska, and soon California and what is the likelihood that North Korean could launch them and what is our ability to stop those missiles if launched?

5) Since we haven’t had a serious terror attack on American soil since 2001, just how serious is the terrorist threat to American today? (General Curry has experienced terrorism firsthand as a target for assassination during his distinguished military career.)

6) What should we expect from our leadership on Capitol Hill and the White House in protecting America from terrorism?

7) How ready are we to deal with a massive terror attack on US soil or on the soil of our allies?

8) How much like Vietnam is the current Afghanistan/Pakistan conflict? Will America ever be able to ‘win’ this current perceived quagmire? And what is the role of politicians and the role of the military leadership in bringing the Iraq, Afghanistan and Korean wars to a conclusion?

9) What other looming threats do we face as a nation?

10) Tell us a little bit about your book, “From Private to General”?

11) How may our listeners get a copy of your book?

12) Is there anything else I missed that you would like to address?

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

THE NEW YORK TIMES/ June 11, 2009

Security Council Set to Tighten Sanctions on North Korea
By NEIL MacFARQUHAR

UNITED NATIONS — The five permanent members of the Security Council have approved a draft resolution that would significantly expand export limits and financial restrictions on North Korea, diplomats said Wednesday, and it leaves open the possibility of widening inspections of North Korean cargo vessels.

The draft resolution, which will be presented to the full council on Wednesday morning, would expand the powers of member states to stop and search North Korean vessels. It also seeks to cut off their arms exports and expands financial measures against the North Korean government. North Korea has said that any attempt to stop its vessels would be considered an act of war.

The permanent members — the United States, Russia, China, Britain and France — negotiated the wording, along with South Korea and Japan. Once presented to the full Council, the resolution could be voted on as early as Friday.

The draft resolution has taken more than two weeks to negotiate, largely because China and Russia, although supporting a tough message to North Korea, did not want to make it so harsh as to provoke or destabilize the North’s government.

One Western diplomat called it a “significant” expansion of the measures that were first proposed but never enacted against North Korea after the North tested a nuclear device in 2006. At the time, the Council backed off putting the sanctions into effect because North Korea agreed to take part in the six-nation talks on dismantling its nuclear program.

Copyright 2009 The New York Times Company

#51: BITTER IRONY IN THE PRO-LIFE FIGHT: Abortion opponents complain that Diller clinic closed! (David Armstrong resides in Eastern Time.):And then the abortion debate became even more complex, if not completely surreal.

A little more than a week after abortionist Dr. George Tiller was shot and killed at his church in Witchita, Kansas, his family announced that his clinic—one of the few in the country that specialized in performing late-term abortions—would remain permanently closed.

The response from some in the Pro-Life community? “Don’t close it.”

First, the response may seem confusing. Then ironic. The argument might make some sort of dark sense when one considers that, under the circumstances, the closing of this clinic sends a dangerous message to extremists, reaffirming that, perhaps, killing doctors is the only way to achieve the ultimate objective.

According to LifeSiteNews.com, Operation Rescue leader Troy Newman said that closing the clinic now would send a worrisome message. “Good God, do not close this abortion clinic for this reason.” (See article below.) But then, yet another twist…

David Armstrong, CEO of Armstrong International, is available for interviews to discuss how the fine line of the pro-life argument is becoming even finer . . . how pro-life advocates must denounce such lethal retaliation, but do so without relinquishing the ardent fight for truth about the inherent evil of abortion . . . and how, just when the issue appears to become more cloudy than ever, the simple fact of right and wrong is never truly obscured.

Leader of a company that has been successful by following the Golden Rule, Armstrong advocates that success in any leadership role, even in the abortion debate, can only follow the same mantra—whether the question is the morality of terminating an abortionist or a pre-born baby, or the double-standard exercised by the President when he deployed U.S. Marshalls to protect abortion clinics, while offering no special protection for the Army recruiting office where a Muslim killed two military recruiters.

Call today to schedule an interview, and prepare for an insightful and impassioned, yet benevolent, discussion on one the most delicate, troubling and, and for many, ambiguous issues of our time.

ABOUT DAVID ARMSTRONG…

David M. Armstrong is a storyteller. More importantly, he has evolved corporate storytelling into a whole new style of management—a style praised by Tom Peters as the leadership answer for tormented managers who need their people to champion initiative.

David Armstrong’s stock in trade is anecdotes—stories about urgency, bravery, wisdom, core values, change management, innovation and having fun in the workplace. Where does he find stories? In the same places he suggests you look for yours—in the eyes and on the faces of the customers, partners and employees who come through your doors every day.

“Every company has a rich heritage of stories,” says David. “I’m just putting my company’s treasure to work.” While it may be true that every company has stories, not every CEO has the vision to search them out and retell them with powerful and memorable morals. That’s what this site is all about—helping you to dig into, discover and use the stories that surround you.

Today Armstrong International is a safe haven in a business world grown confusing and complex. Doing business with Armstrong International is refreshingly simple and pleasant. In fact, today’s dream has become the vision of business as a series of enjoyable experiences.

ABOUT DAVID ARMSTRONG’S BOOK, “HANGING BY A THREAD”

Can you be successful at business or even running a country without losing your soul? David Armstrong thinks you can! In his new book, Hanging By A Thread, David shares real life examples of people and companies that are successful by simply following “The Golden Rule” of: “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.”

In Hanging By A Thread, you will learn about Armstrong International, which is a successful, profitable company that follows the golden rule in all of its decisions for over a century, and in the process, is flourishing in an otherwise turbulent economy.



LifeSiteNews.com/ June 10, 2009

Murdered Doctor’s Abortion Clinic Shuttered
By MONICA DAVEY

The Wichita abortion clinic run by a doctor who was shot and killed will remain closed permanently, his family said on Tuesday. Dr. George R. Tiller’s clinic was one of the few in the country to provide abortions to women late in their pregnancies, and for decades, women had traveled there from all over the nation and from overseas. It was also the only remaining abortion clinic, even for first trimester abortions, in the Wichita region.

“The family of Dr. George Tiller announces that effective immediately, Women’s Health Care Services, Inc., will be permanently closed,” according to a statement issued on Tuesday morning by the family’s lawyers. “Notice is being given today to all concerned that the Tiller family is ceasing operation of the clinic and any involvement by family members in any other similar clinic.”

After Dr. Tiller was shot and killed on May 31 as he served as an usher at his Wichita church, abortion rights advocates – including at least one abortion provider in Nebraska – had said they hoped others might step in and keep Dr. Tiller’s clinic open to provide late-term abortions. Abortion rights advocates had the loss of such a clinic would be devastating to families of women who learned late in pregnancy of catastrophic health issues.

Even some abortion opponents, who had long devoted their efforts to closing down Dr. Tiller’s clinic, said they did not wish to see it happen under these circumstances. Last week, Troy Newman, the leader of Operation Rescue, had said that closing the clinic now would send a worrisome message. “Good God, do not close this abortion clinic for this reason,” he said in an interview with The New York Times. “Every kook in the world will get some notion.”

Scott P. Roeder, an outspoken opponent of abortion, is in a Wichita jail, charged with murder in Dr. Tiller’s death. Immediately after the shooting, the Tiller family had announced that the clinic was closed for the moment, but provided no long term plan until Tuesday. In the statement, the Tiller family said it wished to assure his previous patients that it would work to keep their medical histories and patient records “as fiercely protected now and in the future as they were during Dr. Tiller’s lifetime.”

The family also said Dr. Tiller’s work would be honored through private charitable work. “We are proud of the service and courage shown by our husband and father and know that women’s health care needs have been met because of his dedication and service,” the statement said. “That is a legacy that will never die.”

Abortion rights advocates said they believed the nearest abortion provider to Wichita may now be about three hours away, near Kansas City. ©2009 LifeSiteNews.com

#52: HISPANIC DEFECTIONS SWING MAJORITY OF NY SENATE TO GOP! (Mario Lopez resides in DC/Eastern Time.):Thanks to defections of two Hispanic Democrat Senators, the GOP has taken back control of the New York State Senate after briefly losing their 40-year-long majority last January. (See NY Times below.)

The new President of the Senate is Pedro Espada of the Bronx, who along with fellow Hispanic Senator Hiram Monserrate of Queens made the strategic switch June 8. Democratic leaders were so caught off guard that they actually tried to turn off the lights in the Senate chamber prevent Republicans from installing the new leaders, according to the New York Times.

Discussing this historic power play is Mario H. Lopez, President of the Hispanic Leadership Fund, who shares with your listeners who most Hispanic Americans are pro-family and far more conservative than Democrat leaders who take their votes for granted.

According to Lopez, the political platform of the GOP is far more closely aligned with traditional Hispanic American family values. Said Lopez, “It’s telling that at a time when New York was facing a budget crisis and several other economic challenges that Democrats in Albany chose instead to forcibly refine marriage. Upholding the values of his constituents appears to have been a factor in Senator Espada’s decision.”

Hispanic mothers and fathers do not appreciate how liberals hijacked the New York Democrat Party and their obsession with legalizing same-sex marriage and other issues that are anathema to the pro-family Hispanic community.

Gov. David A. Paterson called the move “an outrage,” at a news conference Monday evening and said Albany had become a “dysfunctional wreck.” The governor also said “I will not allow this,” but then conceded that there was nothing he could do to stop it. Ironically, there is one other thing he can’t stop: Under the new leadership structure, Mr. Espada would become governor of New York if Gov. David Paterson were incapacitated.

Mario Lopez, who served in coalitions and outreach at the House Republican Conference under then Chairman J.C. Watts, shares with your audience that in this unusual power sharing agreement, both Mr. Espada and Mr. Monserrate can actually remain Democrats even as they work with Republicans to run the New York State Senate.

ABOUT MARIO H. LOPEZ...

Mario H. Lopez is founder and president of the Hispanic Leadership Fund, Inc., a 501(c)(4) organization dedicated to advancing conservative public policy principles in Hispanic communities nationally, and helping to elect conservative Hispanic candidates for Congress through its Political Action Committee, the Hispanic Leadership PAC.

For more than 20 years, Mario has worked for conservative causes, candidates, elected officials, and organizations. His political experience started when he founded a chapter of Young Americans for Freedom in High School and began volunteering for several state and local campaigns. His introduction to DC began as a graduate of The Fund for American Studies Institute on Political Journalism program. Recently he has been a guest lecturer for Morton Blackwell's Leadership Institute's Campaign Manager School.

Under his direction as Executive Director of the Congressional Hispanic Conference, Mario's leadership helped nearly double the caucus membership. At the Conference, Mario championed conservative legislation to foster Hispanic prosperity in the U. S. on issues ranging from tax reform to health care to fostering an environment conducive to successfully starting and running small businesses.

Mario has served as a liaison to the White House, the private sector and non-profit advocacy communities and currently serves on the Board of Directors for the Republican National Hispanic Assembly and on the Board of Governors of the Edmund Burke Institute for American Renewal. He previously served on the Hispanic Advisory Board for the Republican National Committee under former Chairman Ken Mehlman.

Born and raised in San Diego, Mario attended the University of San Diego where he earned a bachelor's degree in Political Science. He did graduate work at the University of Southern California in Los Angeles in both Political Science and in the highly-regarded Master of Professional Writing program.

In his first post on Capitol Hill, Mario served as Deputy Director of Coalitions and Outreach at the House Republican Conference under then Chairman J.C. Watts. Prior to his current position, he served as an appointee in the George W. Bush Administration at the Dept. of the Interior, in Secretary Gale Norton's Communications office.

Mario served as Press Secretary for the Congressional Census Monitoring Board, an oversight agency chaired by then Ohio Secretary of State Ken Blackwell. Charged with overseeing all controversial aspects of the Census Bureau's work on the 200 census, Mario was charged with the responsibility in the famous Florida Recount, in his position of an official Recount Observer.

THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:

THE NEW YORK TIMES/ June 9, 2009

Republicans Regain Control of New York State Senate
By DANNY HAKIM and JEREMY W. PETERS

ALBANY — The Democrats’ tenuous control of the New York State Senate abruptly collapsed on Monday, throwing the Legislature into chaos with just two weeks remaining in its session.

Two dissident Democrats, who had been secretly strategizing with Republicans for weeks, bucked their party’s leaders and joined with 30 Republican senators to form what they said would be a bipartisan power-sharing deal. But the arrangement effectively re-establishes Republican control.

The change upends the agenda in Albany, where Democrats had assumed power in the Senate in January after more than 40 years in the minority, and were pushing bills to give tenants more rights, strengthen abortion rights and legalize same-sex marriage this session. And it underscores the continuing tumult of New York politics, where there have been three governors in less than three years and four different Senate presidents since last summer.

Democratic leaders were caught off guard by the move to topple them, and became so flustered as it unfolded they attempted to turn off the lights in the Senate chamber to try to prevent Republicans from installing the new leaders. Asked by a reporter what was occurring, Senator Malcolm A. Smith, leader of the Senate Democrats who was huddled in the hall with his staff, responded, “I’m trying to find out right now.” A spokesman for Mr. Smith, who lost the title of majority leader and Senate president in the shakeup, issued a statement later saying that Democrats would challenge the vote, but it was not clear that they had grounds to do so.

Gov. David A. Paterson called the move “an outrage,” at a news conference Monday evening and said Albany had become a “dysfunctional wreck.” The governor also said “I will not allow this,” but then conceded that there was nothing he could do to stop it.

The toppling of Democratic control unfolded in swift and dramatic fashion shortly after 3 p.m. as senators gathered in the lofty oaken chamber for what seemed like small-bore legislative action on an uneventful afternoon. Then, Senator Tom Libous, a Binghamton Republican, offered a resolution to reorganize the Senate leadership, a parliamentary maneuver that captured the entire capitol’s attention. Within minutes, reporters, staff members and Assembly members rushed to the Senate, crowding the chamber floor.

Democrats tried to stall the move, storming from the chamber and turning out the lights, but the Republicans continued the session, as two Democrats, Pedro Espada of the Bronx and Hiram Monserrate of Queens, joined with them to elect new leaders. Quickly, Dean G. Skelos, a Long Island Republican reclaimed the title of Senate majority leader and Mr. Espada was made Senate president.

Both Mr. Espada and Mr. Monserrate said they will remain Democrats even as they work with Republicans to run the Senate. Both men have legal troubles. Highlighting the often elastic nature of ethical stands and alliances in Albany, Republicans who earlier this year were calling on Mr. Monserrate to resign after his indictment on felony charges that he stabbed his girlfriend with a broken glass are now welcoming him as part of their power-sharing coalition.

Asked about the reversal, Mr. Skelos said, “He’s an elected member, and the reforms are more important.”

Mr. Espada has been fined tens of thousands of dollars over several years for flouting state law by not disclosing political contributions. The state attorney general’s office is also investigating Soundview HealthCare Network, a nonprofit that Mr. Espada ran until recently.

The new leadership structure means that Mr. Espada would become governor if Gov. David Paterson were incapacitated.

Mr. Espada, who is the first Latino Senate president, called his ascension “a sobering moment.” He predicted other Democrats will decide to join the coalition, saying there is broad frustration with Mr. Smith’s leadership.

“Frustration was obviously building,” he said later, in an interview. “There was little prospect for change on a number of fronts. We experienced five months of the budget process and the absolute lack of transparency and the hypocrisy, and the rhetoric grew too much for me.” But money also played a part. Mr. Espada said he was angered that a top aide to Mr. Smith had threatened to hold up his legislative earmarks, known as member items.

Mr. Smith, at a news conference Monday night, argued that the Senate had adjourned when the Republicans took power and insisted that “the Senate majority is still in Democratic hands.”

“I’m not going to have this institution, which is a very proud institution, be demanded in a manner like this,” Mr. Smith said. But Mr. Smith’s support appeared shaky; at least half a dozen Democrats did not attend his news conference.

After installing their leaders, Republicans enacted a series of rules reforms, including six-year term limits for the president and majority leader, steps to equalize the budgets of the majority and minority parties and mandating that pork barrel projects would be distributed equally among members of both parties.

The changes were pushed by Tom Golisano, the Rochester billionaire who spent heavily in the 2008 Senate election to elect members he believed were committed to a more open Albany. But he felt betrayed that Senate Democrats didn’t act more boldly when they took over in January.

Mr. Skelos said his legislative priorities would include resolving whether Mayor Michael R. Bloomberg could retain control over the city school system, reforming property taxes and reissuing property tax rebate checks that had eliminated in budget negotiations earlier this year.

He said he had not discussed with Mr. Espada whether they would bring the same-sex marriage bill to a vote.

Mr. Skelos has said he opposes same-sex marriage, but Mr. Espada is one of the co-sponsors of the legislation.

Republicans almost kept control of the Senate after the November election by courting Mr. Espada and two other dissident Democrats, Carl Kruger of Brooklyn and Ruben Diaz Sr., of the Bronx. Neither man left the chamber with the other Democrats on Monday while Republicans took power.

Mr. Kruger was noncommittal when he was asked if he would consider joining Mr. Espada.

“It’s very early to talk about that right now,” he said.

Mr. Golisano, who played a central role in brokering the deal, recently announced that he was moving his legal residence to Florida out of anger about the budget deal crafted in April by Democratic leaders in Albany, which included an increase in taxes on high earners.

The shakeup most likely means that Republicans will take over the chairmanships of most of the Senate’s committees. Staff members, whose jobs often depend on which party is in power, were trying to assess of the switch last night.

Nicholas Confessore contributed reporting.

Copyright 2009 The New York Times Company

#53: PLAN B IN OBAMA’S ANTI-GUN STRATEGY: Sotomayor Legislating from the Bench? (Alan Gottlieb resides in Pacific Time.):What does a gun prohibitionist President do when the latest gun-control bill loses steam in Congress? Alan Gottlieb can answer that. Choose a Supreme Court nominee who can “legislate from the bench,” and circumvent the branch of government that is still beholden to voters.

Gottlieb is the Chairman of the Citizens Committee for the Right to Keep and Bear Arms, and he’s available for interviews to discuss the threat that a Sonia Sotomayor confirmation to the Supreme Court poses to the gun rights movement.

In Gottlieb’s observation, after the assault weapons ban and a bill to close the “gun show loophole” began giving off too much political heat for the White House, the opportunity to nominate a fellow anti-gun ACORN icon to the Supreme Court was a logical plan B in Obama’s thirst for gun control.

And why not? Not only has Sotomayor gone on record as saying “the court of appeals is where policy is made,” she is also clearly no champion of the Second Amendment. As recently as a few months ago, while sitting on a panel of three judges with the U.S. 2nd Circuit Court of Appeals, Sotomayor stated that “the Second Amendment applies only to limitations the federal government seeks to impose on this right.” In other words, if your state or local government wants to ban your guns, you’re out of luck.

Schedule an interview with Gottlieb today to dig deeper into this ongoing chess match, including the odds of a Sotomayor confirmation, the likely next more by his group and others and the “Mexican” and “Virginia Tech gun lies” that Washington is using to push its anti-gun agenda.

ABOUT ALAN GOTTLIEB:

Dynamic and articulate are two accurate descriptions of Alan Gottlieb.

Alan is a Nuclear Engineering graduate of the University of Tennessee and has attended the Institute on Comparative Political & Economic Systems at Georgetown University.

He is recognized as a member of the working press, maintaining active membership in the Outdoor Writers Association of America. His articles have appeared in periodicals including USA Today, Seattle Times, Washington Post, Atlanta Journal-Constitution, San Francisco Examiner, Cincinnati Inquirer, Orlando Sentinel, and Chicago Tribune.

Alan is the Publisher of Gun Week and The Gottlieb-Tartaro Report. He is the Chairman of the Citizens Committee for the Right to Keep and Bear Arms, Founder of the Second Amendment Foundation, serves on the Board of Directors of the American Conservative Union, President of the Center for the Defense of Free Enterprise, President of the American Political Action Committee and President of NoInternetTax.org.

His handiwork has received notice in the New York Times, Washington Post, Cleveland Plain Dealer, Time, People, Rolling Stone, National Review and Outside magazine.
Alan has received the prestigious Golden Eagle Award from the American Federation of Police, and was commended by the Kentucky House of Representatives for his “outstanding leadership in preserving our American heritage of freedom.” He is listed in Who’s Who in America, Who’s Who in the World and Who’s Who in American Politics.

Alan has appeared on over 3,700 TV and radio talk shows, including the McNeil-Lehrer News Hour, ABC’s 20/20, The Michael Reagan Show, PBS All Things Considered, CNN Crossfire, Fox TV’s Crier Report, NBC Today Show, The O’Reilly Factor, ESPN, Larry King Live, CNN Special Reports, Hannity & Combs, CNN All Politics, Fox News Channel and Good Morning America.

Alan is President of Merril Associates, a noted direct-response advertising agency specializing in direct mail, fund raising and public relations. He is also President of Merril Press, a non-fiction book publishing company.
Alan is also President of radio stations KBNP in Portland, Oregon, KITZ in Seattle, Washington, KGTK in Olympia, Washington, and KSBN in Spokane, Washington and former Chairman of the Talk America Radio Network and former President of the Universal Talk Network.

In addition, Alan is the author of seventeen books including Politically Correct Guns, Trashing the Economy and She Took a Village: The Unauthorized Biography of Hillary Clinton, Alan Gottlieb's Celebrity Address Book, Double Trouble: Daschle and Gephart Capitol Hill Bullies, and Gun Rights Affirmed, America Fights Back: Armed Self-defense in a Violent Age and These Dogs Don’t Hunt: The Democrats’ War on Guns.

Alan currently resides in Bellevue, Washington with his wife Julianne, his daughters Amy Jean, Sarah Merril, and Alexis Hope and son Andrew Michael.

SEE LIST OF MORE SPECIAL GUESTS: www.specialguests.com

#54: HISPANIC DEFECTIONS SWING MAJORITY OF NY SENATE TO GOP! (Mario H. Lopez resides in DC/Eastern Time. :Thanks to defections of two Hispanic Democrat Senators, the GOP has taken back control of the New York State Senate after briefly losing their 40-year-long majority last January. (See NY Times below)

The new President of the Senate is Pedro Espada of the Bronx, who along with fellow Hispanic Senator Hiram Monserrate of Queens made the strategic switch June 8.

Democratic leaders were so caught off guard that they actually tried to turn off the lights in the Senate chamber prevent Republicans from installing the new leaders, according to the New York Times.

Discussing this historic power play is Mario H. Lopez, President of the Hispanic Leadership Fund, who shares with your listeners who most Hispanic Americans are pro-family and far more conservative than Democrat leaders who take their votes for granted.

According to Lopez, the political platform of the GOP is far more closely aligned with traditional Hispanic American family values.

Hispanic mothers and fathers do not appreciate how liberals hijacked the New York Democrat Party and their obsession with legalizing same-sex marriage and other issues that are anathema to the pro-family Hispanic community.

Gov. David A. Paterson called the move “an outrage,” at a news conference Monday evening and said Albany had become a “dysfunctional wreck.” The governor also said “I will not allow this,” but then conceded that there was nothing he could do to stop it. Ironically, there is one other thing he can’t stop: Under the new leadership structure, Mr. Espada would become governor of New York if Gov. David Paterson were incapacitated.

Mario Lopez, who served in coalitions and outreach at the House Republican Conference under then Chairman J.C. Watts, shares with your audience that in this unusual power sharing agreement, both Mr. Espada and Mr. Monserrate can actually remain Democrats even as they work with Republicans to run the New York State Senate.


ABOUT MARIO H. LOPEZ...

Mario Lopes is founder and president of the Hispanic Leadership Fund, Inc., a 501(c)(4) organization dedicated to advancing conservative public policy principles in Hispanic communities nationally, and helping to elect conservative Hispanic candidates for Congress through its Political Action Committee, the Hispanic Leadership PAC.

For more than 20 years, Mari has worked for conservative causes, candidates, elected officials, and organizations. His political experience started when he founded a chapter of Young Americans for Freedom in High School and began volunteering for several state and local campaigns. His introduction to DC began as a graduate of The Fund for American Studies Institute on Political Journalism program. Recently he has been a guest lecturer for Morton Blackwell's Leadership Institute's Campaign Manager School.

Under his direction as Executive Director of the Congressional Hispanic Conference, Mario's leadership helped nearly double the caucus membership. at the Caucus, Mario championed conservative legislation to foster Hispanic prosperity in the U. S. on issues ranging from tax reform to health care to fostering an environment condusive to successfully starting and running small businesses.


Mario has served as a liaison to the White House, the private sector and non-profit advocacy communities.

Mario currently serves on the Board of Directors for the Republican National Hispanic Assembly and on the Board of Governors of the Edmund Burke Institute for American Renewal. He previously served on the Hispanic Advisory Board for the Republican Naitonal Committee under former Chairman Ken Mehlman.

Born and raised in San Diego, Mario attended the University of San Diego where he earned a bachelor's degree in Polital Science. He did graduate work at the University of Southern California in Los Angeles in both Political Science and in the highly-regarded Master of Professional Writing program.

IN his first post on Capitol Hill, Mario served as Deputy Director of Coalitions and Outreach at the House Repubican Conference under then Chairman J.C. Watts. Prior to his current position, he served as an appointee in the George W. Bush Administration at the Dept. of the Interior, in Secretary Gale Norton's Communications office.

Mario served as Press Secretary for the Congressional Census Monitoring Board, an oversight agency chaired by then Ohio Secretary of State Ken Blackwell. Charged with overseeing all controversial aspects of the Census Bureau's work on the 200 census, Mario was charged with the responsibility in the famous Florida Recount, in his position of an official Recount Observer.


THE FOLLOWING ARTICLE MAY BE HELPFUL WITH SHOW PREP:


THE NEW YORK TIMES/ June 9, 2009

Republicans Regain Control of New York State Senate
By DANNY HAKIM and JEREMY W. PETERS

ALBANY — The Democrats’ tenuous control of the New York State Senate abruptly collapsed on Monday, throwing the Legislature into chaos with just two weeks remaining in its session.

Two dissident Democrats, who had been secretly strategizing with Republicans for weeks, bucked their party’s leaders and joined with 30 Republican senators to form what they said would be a bipartisan power-sharing deal. But the arrangement effectively re-establishes Republican control.

The change upends the agenda in Albany, where Democrats had assumed power in the Senate in January after more than 40 years in the minority, and were pushing bills to give tenants more rights, strengthen abortion rights and legalize same-sex marriage this session. And it underscores the continuing tumult of New York politics, where there have been three governors in less than three years and four different Senate presidents since last summer.

Democratic leaders were caught off guard by the move to topple them, and became so flustered as it unfolded they attempted to turn off the lights in the Senate chamber to try to prevent Republicans from installing the new leaders. Asked by a reporter what was occurring, Senator Malcolm A. Smith, leader of the Senate Democrats who was huddled in the hall with his staff, responded, “I’m trying to find out right now.” A spokesman for Mr. Smith, who lost the title of majority leader and Senate president in the shakeup, issued a statement later saying that Democrats would challenge the vote, but it was not clear that they had grounds to do so.

Gov. David A. Paterson called the move “an outrage,” at a news conference Monday evening and said Albany had become a “dysfunctional wreck.” The governor also said “I will not allow this,” but then conceded that there was nothing he could do to stop it.

The toppling of Democratic control unfolded in swift and dramatic fashion shortly after 3 p.m. as senators gathered in the lofty oaken chamber for what seemed like small-bore legislative action on an uneventful afternoon. Then, Senator Tom Libous, a Binghamton Republican, offered a resolution to reorganize the Senate leadership, a parliamentary maneuver that captured the entire capitol’s attention. Within minutes, reporters, staff members and Assembly members rushed to the Senate, crowding the chamber floor.

Democrats tried to stall the move, storming from the chamber and turning out the lights, but the Republicans continued the session, as two Democrats, Pedro Espada of the Bronx and Hiram Monserrate of Queens, joined with them to elect new leaders. Quickly, Dean G. Skelos, a Long Island Republican reclaimed the title of Senate majority leader and Mr. Espada was made Senate president.

Both Mr. Espada and Mr. Monserrate said they will remain Democrats even as they work with Republicans to run the Senate. Both men have legal troubles. Highlighting the often elastic nature of ethical stands and alliances in Albany, Republicans who earlier this year were calling on Mr. Monserrate to resign after his indictment on felony charges that he stabbed his girlfriend with a broken glass are now welcoming him as part of their power-sharing coalition.

Asked about the reversal, Mr. Skelos said, “He’s an elected member, and the reforms are more important.”

Mr. Espada has been fined tens of thousands of dollars over several years for flouting state law by not disclosing political contributions. The state attorney general’s office is also investigating Soundview HealthCare Network, a nonprofit that Mr. Espada ran until recently.

The new leadership structure means that Mr. Espada would become governor if Gov. David Paterson were incapacitated.

Mr. Espada, who is the first Latino Senate president, called his ascension “a sobering moment.” He predicted other Democrats will decide to join the coalition, saying there is broad frustration with Mr. Smith’s leadership.

“Frustration was obviously building,” he said later, in an interview. “There was little prospect for change on a number of fronts. We experienced five months of the budget process and the absolute lack of transparency and the hypocrisy, and the rhetoric grew too much for me.” But money also played a part. Mr. Espada said he was angered that a top aide to Mr. Smith had threatened to hold up his legislative earmarks, known as member items.

Mr. Smith, at a news conference Monday night, argued that the Senate had adjourned when the Republicans took power and insisted that “the Senate majority is still in Democratic hands.”

“I’m not going to have this institution, which is a very proud institution, be demanded in a manner like this,” Mr. Smith said. But Mr. Smith’s support appeared shaky; at least half a dozen Democrats did not attend his news conference.

After installing their leaders, Republicans enacted a series of rules reforms, including six-year term limits for the president and majority leader, steps to equalize the budgets of the majority and minority parties and mandating that pork barrel projects would be distributed equally among members of both parties.

The changes were pushed by Tom Golisano, the Rochester billionaire who spent heavily in the 2008 Senate election to elect members he believed were committed to a more open Albany. But he felt betrayed that Senate Democrats didn’t act more boldly when they took over in January.

Mr. Skelos said his legislative priorities would include resolving whether Mayor Michael R. Bloomberg could retain control over the city school system, reforming property taxes and reissuing property tax rebate checks that had eliminated in budget negotiations earlier this year.

He said he had not discussed with Mr. Espada whether they would bring the same-sex marriage bill to a vote.

Mr. Skelos has said he opposes same-sex marriage, but Mr. Espada is one of the co-sponsors of the legislation.

Republicans almost kept control of the Senate after the November election by courting Mr. Espada and two other dissident Democrats, Carl Kruger of Brooklyn and Ruben Diaz Sr., of the Bronx. Neither man left the chamber with the other Democrats on Monday while Republicans took power.

Mr. Kruger was noncommittal when he was asked if he would consider joining Mr. Espada.

“It’s very early to talk about that right now,” he said.

Mr. Golisano, who played a central role in brokering the deal, recently announced that he was moving his legal residence to Florida out of anger about the budget deal crafted in April by Democratic leaders in Albany, which included an increase in taxes on high earners.

The shakeup most likely means that Republicans will take over the chairmanships of most of the Senate’s committees. Staff members, whose jobs often depend on which party is in power, were trying to assess of the switch last night.

Nicholas Confessore contributed reporting.

Copyright 2009 The New York Times Company

#55: PUBLICS SCHOOLS: GOD OUT, GAY IN: Has Separation of Church and State Gone Too Far? (Guests reside in Central Time.):From coast to coast, parents of public school children are being pushed to the limit on the age-old separation-of-church-and-state argument. While one school district in Philadelphia has won a court case that prohibits a kindergartner’s mother from reading the Bible during show and tell, another school district in California is imposing a mandatory “gay” curriculum on its elementary students.

As senior staff member of Christian Liberty Academy, Mike McHugh, and Christian Liberty Pastor Calvin Lindstrom can attest, it’s no wonder the number of homeschool families has doubled in less than ten years. Among the reasons parents give for pulling their children’s education in house, infusing Christian values into the lessons is number one.

For some intriguing commentary on homeschooling, particularly in light of recent events in Philly and California, McHugh and Lindstrom are available for interviews.

Even if Americans are willing to accept the ruling that prevents scripture reading in kindergarten, they say, most won’t sit still for what the Unified School District of Alameda is trying to do. Its school board wants to introduce to its elementary students lessons about acceptance and respect with regard to the lesbian, gay, bisexual and transgender movement.

Parents have objected, but have also been told they cannot opt out of the course for religious reasons. Such a double standard is what observers like McHugh and Lindstrom say has moved the issue beyond the argument of church and state to that of liberal ideologues pushing an agenda.

Call Special Guests today to get the homeschooling point of view on this public school world turned upside-down.


ABOUT MIKE MCHUGH…

Michael McHugh has worked in the field of Christian home education for nearly thirty years with the Christian Liberty Academy home school program based in Arlington Heights, Illinois. During his time on staff, Mr. McHugh has written several textbooks, as well as articles that seek to encourage families who are home schooling. Over the years, Mike has also had the honor to speak frequently before home school groups throughout the U.S. and abroad.

As a home school father, Mike lives in the Chicago area with his wife and seven children. His family began its home school journey in 1988.


ABOUT PASTOR CALVIN LINDSTROM…

Calvin Lindstrom has been on staff with the Church of Christian Liberty and Academy, located in Arlington Heights, IL, for over ten years. During this period of time, Mr. Lindstrom has served as a teacher and guidance counselor.

As an ordained minister and graduate of the University of Illinois, Calvin has recently taken on a new calling as pastor of the Church of Christian Liberty. One of his chief passions is to encourage parents to provide their children with a comprehensive Christian education.

Rev. Lindstrom lives in the Chicago area with his wife and young son. Both Calvin and his wife attended Christian schools, or were home schooled, prior to college.

#56: SAN DIEGO 'DECRIMINALIZES' HOME BIBLE STUDIES (Guests reside in Pacific and Eastern Times):When San Diego County officials tried to fine a couple tens of thousands of dollars for lack of a permit to hold a Bible study in their home, Talk Show hosts and listeners took action.

They said enough is enough and they fought back against the flagrant breach of First Amendment rights.

Alan Reinach, President of the North American Religious Liberty Association–West, and Jim Jacobson, President of Christian Freedom International (CFI), are available for interviews to applaud the talk show programs and audiences like yours that put the pressure on the perpetrators. But, more importantly, they’re also prepared to use this victory for the sake of increasing awareness and inspiring more action.

In that Reinach earns a living as an attorney serving clients suffering from religious discrimination and Jacobson travels the world as the director of a leading religious humanitarian organization, both have witnessed time and again the growing trend of Christian persecution, often an exercise of violent oppression, coercion and murder—like when Muslim or Hindu factions throughout Asia and the Middle East bully and kill Christian “non believers” who won’t convert.

Both of your guests have stories that must be told and a truth that must be realized. Don’t let the outrage stop in San Diego. Schedule an interview with Alan Reinach and Jim Jacobson right now.


ABOUT YOUR SPEAKERS:

ALAN J. REINACH, ESQ.

Alan serves as the Director of the Church State Council and President of the North American Religious Liberty Association–West. He is an attorney and a Seventh-day Adventist minister. A graduate of the State University of New York, in New Paltz, with special honors in history, in 1984, and the University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill School of Law, in 1987.

Reinach represents employees who have suffered religious discrimination, and has filed briefs in religious liberty cases in state and Federal courts, and in the California and United States Supreme Court.

When he’s not in court, Alan maintains an extensive speaking schedule, hosts the weekly radio program, Freedom’s Ring, and appears regularly on radio interviews throughout the nation. He also regularly publishes articles on religious freedom. Alan is a passionate advocate of liberty of conscience.

As a young man coming of age in the 70s, he struggled to know God, examining the religious teachings of various traditions. He saw friends taken captive to religious cults, and was wary of getting into something that he couldn’t get out of. God’s gracious commitment to respecting human freedom made it possible for him to experience Christian conversion without fear of being trapped or conned. He has dedicated his life to serving God, and to championing an understanding of God’s character – i.e., that a loving God gives freedom, and does not coerce the conscience.


JIM JACOBSON

Before CFI, Mr. Jacobson served as a policy analyst in the Reagan White House, served as political appointee in the administration of George Herbert Walker Bush, and was a senior legislative assistant in the U.S. Senate. He was elected for a four-year term to the Warren County, Virginia, Board of Supervisors.

In his career he has testified before Congress, conducted briefings at the White House, State Department, and the United Nations. Jim has personally brought aid, smuggled Bibles, and provided advocacy to Christians in many countries in the past 10 years. He frequently travels into restricted countries—overtly and covertly—where Christians are severely persecuted for their faith, including active war zones.

Mr. Jacobson is a graduate of the University of Michigan. He and his wife Karen have four children and have been married for more than 20 years.

#57: OBAMA PLAN TO RAISE TAXES TO KEEP U.S. JOBS WILL BACKFIRE, SAY BIZ EXECS (Bob Rinerar resides in Eastern Time.):With the economy reaching critical mass, President Obama’s latest plan to move U.S. companies toward more domestic investment isn’t sitting well with prominent business groups, such as the National Foreign Trade Council and the U.S. Chamber of Commerce.

Find out precisely why and give everyone in your audience who is anxious about their job the ammunition to let their voice be heard in Washington. Schedule an interview with Bob Rinear, CEO and founder of InvestYourself and the Financial Intelligence Report.

Rinear is a successful entrepreneur, a career-long student in global economics and a no-nonsense communicator who can bring even the most complex business issues into focus—and, in his expert opinion, the flaw in Obama’s latest plan for the economy is quite clear.

Just ask the CEO of Microsoft, a company that currently employs 56,552 Americans. He says he’ll be forced to move many of those jobs overseas if Obama gets his way and imposes higher taxes on U.S. companies’ foreign profits.

While Obama thinks such a move will incentivize those companies to invest at home, Microsoft and Bob Rinear know better.

“When are Obama and the other big-government, big-spend politicians going to get the picture?” Rinear asks rhetorically. “In today’s highly competitive global economy, raising corporate taxes is the last thing we need to do. They’d like us to believe that when a U.S. company keeps its foreign profits tax-deferred, it’s like cheating. But a business does what it has to do to stay competitive. Otherwise, over time, it goes out of business and everyone loses his job anyway. If our corporate taxes were more in line with where they should be, the Microsofts wouldn’t be so inclined to conduct operations overseas to begin with. And now Obama wants to repeal even more tax breaks?”

Get the problematic details and a glimpse at more real solutions. Call Special Guests to inquire about Bob Rinear today.

For more information on this topic, visit:
http://www.bloomberg.com/apps/news?pid=newsarchive&sid=amBiYGyHOkZ8
ABOUT ROBERT (BOB) RINEAR:

Bob Rinear (pronounced reh-NEAR) founded InvestYourself in October 1997, after having owned several successful business ventures, primarily in the jewelry industry. His introduction to the financial world began as the result of his experience timing the price of tangible assets, including gemstones, gold and silver on a daily basis—a talent that is critically necessary to be successful in the jewelry industry.

As Bob Rinear saw the price of gold soaring in the late 1980s, he needed to find the causes of that move. What he found was intriguing. Political issues, global economics and even something as simple as the industrial output in Japan would move the price of tangible assets. He needed to learn more.

As he became more "in tune" with the global economic process, he noticed that one of his best customers traded stocks and options on a daily basis. With Mr. Rinear's views on the overall economic situation and "Charley's" ability in picking stocks, they found a winning combination. But it still wasn't complete.

Once introduced to the intricacies of the equity markets, it didn't take Mr. Rinear long to realize that he had a knack for predicting the everyday flows of the stock and options markets. He began to attend trading seminars and training camps with the desire to learn how to make profitable trades on a daily basis.

One thing became abundantly clear -- none of the classes gave him the total picture about how to accomplish his goal. Something was still missing in regards to how to make a living by trading stocks and options. Likewise, he realized that not all opportunities came in just stocks and options. Sometimes it was a quick move in precious metals or Treasury bonds. Other times it may have been a move in a currency.

Not to be defeated, Mr. Rinear slowly developed his own trading style that began to produce profits. After taking what he learned from the seminars and injecting his own methods of calculating stock movements, options movements, currency, real estate and Treasury movements, a successful concept emerged. He expanded this trading concept into a workable platform that anyone could follow. That was the beginning of his newsletter "Market Insight & Outlook" (now the "Financial Intelligence Report). From those first few issues it became clear that the public would benefit from his years of research. He decided to offer it to the masses.

From that humble beginning a company called "InvestYourself" was created. Its main goal is to help investors of every experience level gain the investing knowledge necessary to win in a tough game that includes enabling investors to grow in their knowledge of real estate, stocks, bonds, and finances in general.

#58: OBAMA POPULARITY INDEX PLUNGES TO ZERO! (David Armstrong resides in Eastern Time.):Shocking numbers on Obama’s plunging popularity have just been released by Rasmussen Polls. As of June 5, 2009, Obama was at a statistical tie with 34% of Americans expressing strong approval and 34% expressing strong disapproval, according to the official Rasmussen ‘Obama Approval Index’ (strong approvals minus strong disapprovals).

This is particularly significant since Obama has plummeted from 30% to 0%. On January 22, 2009, two days after Obama was sworn in, the ‘Obama Approval Index’ approval rate was a whopping 30%. On June 5, 2009 it dropped to the lowest number yet: ZERO percent!

According to Rasmussen, “The President’s ratings have slipped since General Motors filed for bankruptcy to initiate a new government bailout and takeover. Just 26% of Americans believe the GM bailout was a good idea and nearly as many support a boycott of GM products.”

While Obama’s middle of the road general approval still exceeds disapprovals by a margin of 8% (54% to 46%), those middle numbers are a far cry from Jan. 22 when they were 64% to 29%, more than a two to one margin. Should his number shift a token 4% from approval to disapproval, even his overall approval numbers will be even.

President and CEO David Armstrong of Armstrong International, a century old family-owned company, offers clear reasons for the significant drop in popularity. According to Armstrong the public listens to promises and monitors how they perceive those promises being delivered, after giving a reasonable ‘honeymoon’ period wherein they give the benefit of the doubt.

During your interview with David he discusses that with an unprecedented number of Obama’s cabinet choices being surrounded by impossible-to-ignore ethics challenges, an ‘Obama fatigue factor’ began to set in. And now with all the Obama bailouts tapping taxpayer’s wallets, it has passed fatigue and entered into the realm of Obama burnout.

But perhaps the straw that broke Obama’s populist back was when Obama spouted off in Cairo, Egypt his vows to defend and protect the ‘good’ name of Islam and Muslim Despots with nations devoid of basic human rights, while poking his thumb in the eye of American citizens. The general public had to collectively ask themselves if Obama was President of the United States or some self-styled King of the World.

David Armstrong discusses how when virtually all of the promises of ‘change’ Obama made turned out to be changes toward big centralized, socialist government. He adds that when people are more than just a little bit let down when the see him flip-flopping on so many campaign promises, such as his solemn vow to post important bills on the Internet prior to voting on them—such as the trillion dollar taxpayer-funded bailout of rich bankers--even moderate and some liberal voters are left scratching their heads in puzzlement and/or disenchantment.

David Armstrong’s suggestion to Obama: “Speak only the truth and practice the Golden Rule: Do unto taxpayers as you would have taxpayers do unto you.”

Yet amidst Obama’s current popularity ‘freefall,’ many in the mainstream news media continue to be Obama groupies by singing the praises of his alleged ‘popularity.’ At what point do his numbers have to fall before the major news organizations have to admit that Obama is no longer popular? If he does one more anti-American stunt like he did in Cairo, he could easily drop into the clear statistical territory of Disapproval. One can only imagine how low his numbers might be if there wasn’t the 24/7 media reporting dribble about ‘The great one.’

The following is the Rasmussen Poll:

Date Presidential Approval Index Strongly Approve Strongly Disapprove Total Approve Total Disapprove
06/05/2009 0 34% 34% 54% 46%
06/04/2009 2 33% 31% 55% 45%
06/03/2009 3 34% 31% 55% 44%
06/02/2009 5 33% 28% 58% 41%
06/01/2009 7 35% 28% 58% 41%
05/31/2009 10 36% 26% 58% 41%
05/30/2009 9 37% 28% 58% 41%
05/29/2009 10 37% 27% 59% 40%
05/28/2009 6 35% 29% 56% 43%
05/27/2009 5 34% 29% 56% 43%
05/26/2009 1 31% 30% 55% 44%
05/25/2009 3 33% 30% 56% 43%
05/24/2009 5 34% 29% 57% 42%
05/23/2009 6 36% 30% 57% 41%
05/22/2009 6 35% 29% 57% 41%
05/21/2009 7 36% 29% 56% 42%
05/20/2009 7 36% 29% 58% 41%
05/19/2009 8 36% 28% 58% 41%
05/18/2009 5 35% 30% 57% 42%
05/17/2009 4 34% 30% 56% 43%
05/16/2009 4 34% 30% 55% 44%
05/15/2009 7 36% 29% 57% 43%
05/14/2009 8 37% 29% 57% 42%
05/13/2009 7 36% 29% 57% 42%
05/12/2009 5 35% 30% 56% 43%
05/11/2009 No Polling--Mother's Day
05/10/2009 7 34% 27% 58% 41%
05/09/2009 7 34% 27% 58% 41%
05/08/2009 9 36% 27% 58% 41%
05/07/2009 8 38% 30% 57% 43%
05/06/2009 7 37% 30% 57% 43%
05/05/2009 6 36% 30% 56% 43%
05/04/2009 5 35% 30% 57% 43%
05/03/2009 3 35% 32% 56% 43%
05/02/2009 1 33% 32% 54% 45%
05/01/2009 2 34% 32% 54% 45%
04/30/2009 2 34% 32% 54% 45%
04/29/2009 4 35% 31% 55% 43%
04/28/2009 5 36% 31% 56% 43%
04/27/2009 5 35% 30% 55% 44%
04/26/2009 3 35% 32% 54% 45%
04/25/2009 5 36% 31% 56% 43%
04/24/2009 5 36% 31% 55% 44%
04/23/2009 6 37% 31% 55% 44%
04/22/2009 2 34% 32% 54% 46%
04/21/2009 2 34% 32% 54% 45%
04/20/2009 3 33% 30% 55% 45%
04/19/2009 6 35% 29% 55% 44%
04/18/2009 7 36% 29% 55% 44%
04/17/2009 3 35% 32% 55% 43%
04/16/2009 4 36% 32% 55% 43%
04/15/2009 2 35% 33% 55% 44%
04/14/2009 3 35% 32% 55% 44%
04/13/2009 2 34% 32% 55% 44%
04/12/2009 2 34% 32% 55% 44%
04/11/2009 5 34% 29% 55% 43%
04/10/2009 5 34% 29% 55% 44%
04/09/2009 5 34% 29% 55% 44%
04/08/2009 6 35% 29% 57% 42%
04/07/2009 8 37% 29% 58% 41%
04/06/2009 8 36% 28% 58% 41%
04/05/2009 6 36% 30% 56% 43%
04/04/2009 3 34% 31% 56% 43%
04/03/2009 3 35% 32% 56% 44%
04/02/2009 5 35% 30% 56% 44%
04/01/2009 8 37% 29% 57% 41%
03/31/2009 11 38% 27% 59% 39%
03/30/2009 8 38% 30% 58% 40%
03/29/2009 7 37% 30% 58% 41%
03/28/2009 4 35% 31% 56% 43%
03/27/2009 5 35% 30% 56% 43%
03/26/2009 5 35% 30% 56% 43%
03/25/2009 5 36% 31% 56% 43%
03/24/2009 4 36% 32% 56% 43%
03/23/2009 5 36% 31% 56% 42%
03/22/2009 4 35% 31% 56% 43%
03/21/2009 4 36% 32% 55% 44%
03/20/2009 4 35% 31% 55% 43%
03/19/2009 7 37% 30% 56% 43%
03/18/2009 7 37% 30% 57% 42%
03/17/2009 5 37% 32% 56% 43%
03/16/2009 4 36% 32% 56% 43%
03/15/2009 6 37% 31% 56% 43%
03/14/2009 8 37% 29% 57% 41%
03/13/2009 9 38% 29% 57% 42%
03/12/2009 9 37% 28% 58% 41%
03/11/2009 6 37% 31% 56% 43%
03/10/2009 6 38% 32% 56% 43%
03/09/2009 6 38% 32% 56% 43%
03/08/2009 8 39% 31% 56% 43%
03/07/2009 8 39% 31% 56% 43%
03/06/2009 15 42% 27% 58% 40%
03/05/2009 14 41% 27% 59% 40%
03/04/2009 16 42% 26% 60% 38%
03/03/2009 13 40% 27% 60% 39%
03/02/2009 10 39% 29% 58% 41%
03/01/2009 8 38% 30% 58% 40%
02/28/2009 10 39% 29% 59% 39%
02/27/2009 15 41% 26% 60% 40%
02/26/2009 16 41% 25% 60% 40%
02/25/2009 14 39% 25% 59% 40%
02/24/2009 14 39% 25% 60% 39%
02/23/2009 11 38% 27% 58% 40%
02/22/2009 11 38% 27% 58% 41%
02/21/2009 10 38% 28% 57% 41%
02/20/2009 12 38% 26% 59% 40%
02/19/2009 13 38% 25% 60% 39%
02/18/2009 14 38% 24% 61% 38%
02/17/2009 15 38% 23% 61% 37%
02/16/2009 10 36% 26% 60% 39%
02/15/2009 11 37% 26% 60% 39%
02/14/2009 13 39% 26% 60% 39%
02/13/2009 17 41% 24% 60% 38%
02/12/2009 19 43% 24% 61% 37%
02/11/2009 19 42% 23% 60% 38%
02/10/2009 15 39% 24% 60% 38%
02/09/2009 14 38% 24% 60% 38%
02/08/2009 11 36% 25% 59% 39%
02/07/2009 14 37% 23% 60% 38%
02/06/2009 17 38% 21% 61% 36%
02/05/2009 19 39% 20% 62% 36%
02/04/2009 18 39% 21% 62% 36%
02/03/2009 15 37% 22% 61% 36%
02/02/2009 17 41% 24% 60% 38%
02/01/2009 21 44% 23% 63% 34%
01/31/2009 23 45% 22% 63% 34%
01/30/2009 21 43% 22% 63% 36%
01/29/2009 22 42% 20% 62% 36%
01/28/2009 22 42% 20% 62% 36%
01/27/2009 23 42% 19% 62% 36%
01/26/2009 21 41% 20% 60% 37%
01/25/2009 22 42% 20% 60% 36%
01/24/2009 26 44% 18% 61% 33%
01/23/2009 29 45% 16% 62% 29%
01/22/2009 30 44% 14% 64% 29%
01/21/2009 28 44% 16% 65% 30%

ABOUT DAVID ARMSTRONG…

David M. Armstrong heads up Armstrong International, a family company that is over one century old, specializing in providing industrial heating and air conditioning equipment to companies. But more than being a businessman, David is a storyteller.

Mr. Armstrong has evolved corporate storytelling into a whole new style of management—a style praised by Tom Peters as the leadership answer for tormented managers who need their people to champion initiative.

David Armstrong’s stock in trade is anecdotes—stories about urgency, bravery, wisdom, core values, change management, innovation and having fun in the workplace. Where does he find stories? In the same places he suggests you look for yours—in the eyes and on the faces of the customers, partners and employees who come through your doors every day.

“Every company has a rich heritage of stories,” says David. “I’m just putting my company’s treasure to work.” While it may be true that every company has stories, not every CEO has the vision to search them out and retell them with powerful and memorable morals. That’s what this site is all about—helping you to dig into, discover and use the stories that surround you.

Today Armstrong International is a safe haven in a business world grown confusing and complex. Doing business with Armstrong International is refreshingly simple and pleasant. In fact, today’s dream has become the vision of business as a series of enjoyable experiences.

David’s is the author of the new business ethics book, “Hanging by a Thread.”


ABOUT HANGING BY A THREAD

Can you be successful at business or even running a country without losing your soul? David Armstrong thinks you can! In his new book, Hanging By A Thread, David shares real life examples of people and companies that are successful by simply following “The Golden Rule” of: “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.”

In Hanging By A Thread, you will learn about Armstrong International, which is a successful, profitable company that follows the golden rule in all of its decisions for over a century, and in the process, is flourishing in an otherwise turbulent economy.

#59: INTRODUCING THE ’09 CHEVY CORRUPTION: Obama Appointee Trying to Carjack GM’s Pension Fund :Make no mistake, if it wasn’t for the complexities of economics and the lack of transparency that facilitates the incestuous relationship between the Treasury and the big corporate banks, your audience—along with the rest of America—would be screaming about the latest stunt being pulled by the Obama administration.

Well, start promoting bullhorns on your station, because seasoned economist Bob Chapman is available for interviews to break it all down and expose the simple truth—that what Obama’s newly appointed “Car Czar,” Steven Rattner, is demanding in the General Motors bankruptcy court case is not only unfair . . . it’s illegal!

As Chapman can explain, when a company files bankruptcy, every vested party has to swallow its own bitter pill. But after essentially ordering GM into bankruptcy in the first place, Rattner wants to change the rules and tap the legally off-limits employee pension fund to pay off his big banking friends at JP Morgan Chase and Citibank—two of GM’s largest lenders.

The problem is, the Employee Pension Fund was built on employee payroll deductions, and it doesn’t belong to the corporation! So, taking it under any bankruptcy circumstances is a clearly stated crime!!! Furthermore, you can’t disperse funds preferentially to creditors! That’s also against the law! It’s favoritism! Bankruptcy judges appoint ‘trustees’ that can be ‘trusted’ to even-handedly disperse assets at such rates as 30 cents on the dollar or 8 cents on the dollar—not 100 cents on the dollar! And especially not to your sweetheart fellow elitist banking buddies!!! That’s patently illegal--is anybody listening???

“The Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, better known as ERISA, states that you cannot seize the pension funds of workers any more than you can seize their private bank accounts, and that law is very explicit,” stated Chapman.

For a deeper look into the bogus scam Rattner and the Obama administration is trying to run, and a frightening projection on how Rattner’s success in this case will further embolden fiscally irresponsible corporations sniffing for working-class-funded welfare, schedule an interview with Chapman today.

In the meantime, for the complete story, visit: http://www.gregpalast.com/grand-theft-auto-how-stevie-the-rat-bankrupted-gm/

 
ABOUT ROBERT J. CHAPMAN:

Bob Chapman is founder and editor of The International Forecaster, a compendium of information on business, finance, economics and social and political issues worldwide. It directly reaches 10,000 investors and brokers every month, while portions of his publication are picked up by 60 other financial publications, resulting in an aggregate number of weekly readers in the range of 10 million investors. Bob spent three years in U.S. Army Counterintelligence, mostly in Europe. He speaks German and French and is conversant in Spanish. He lived in Europe for six years, off and on, three years in Africa, one year in Canada and another year in the Bahamas. Mr. Chapman became a stockbroker from 1960 to 1988. For 18 of those years he owned his own brokerage firm with over 6,000 clients.

#60: OBAMA IN CAIRO: Sounded More Like Chic Sheik than US President! (panelists residingn in Eastern to Pacific Time.):UPDATED: Expert Panelists Weigh-in on 6000 word speech

No doubt about it: Barack Hussein Obama wowed the Islamic world in Cairo, Egypt this week by quoting from the Quran and proclaiming, “(I consider) it part of my responsibility as president of the United States to fight against negative stereotypes of Islam wherever they appear."

Hey, why stop there? Why not just turn over the title deed to The United States?...Oh, I forgot, they don’t want it because it is already mortgaged to the hilt! “Under water,” as they say.

Barack Hussein also thanked the progressive and advanced Middle
Eastern Muslims for everything from algebra to the pen, though he curiously failed to mention that Muslim nations so often throw people in prison for daring to use a pen of free speech.

After hearing Obama’s remarks, even Charles Hurt of New York Post felt compelled to ask, “And anyway, where exactly is that in the oath of office he (Obama) took?”

A panel of four experts are available on this topic as your interview guests: Former Muslim terrorist Walid Shoebat, JihadWatch.org founder Robert Spencer, Floyd Brown, founder of ExposeObama.com, and Christian Freedom International President Jim Jacobson (Interview one, two, three or all four, together or separately).

ABOUT FLOYD BROWN…

Floyd Brown is president of the National Campaign Fund, which launched www.exposeobama.com and as a media commentator, he has appeared on many network and cable TV shows including the CBS Evening News, ABC’s Primetime, NBC’s Today Show, FOX News, CNN, MSNBC and more. Brown authored three books, including the first bestselling Clinton expose “Slick Willie: Why America Cannot Trust Bill Clinton” in 1992. Floyd later launched the impeachment movement against President Clinton as president of Citizens United Inc. Brown organized national campaigns, including one securing the confirmation of Judge Clarence Thomas.

FLOYD BROWN’S ARTICLE ON OBAMA:

Obama White House Extols His Muslim Background
By Floyd and Mary Beth Brown

One year ago in June 2008, Floyd produced a television ad which asked the simple question, “Was Barack Obama ever a Muslim?” The Obama campaign came unglued. It earned Floyd prominent placement on a special Obama website called “Fight the Smears.”

The news media jumped on the band wagon. Newsweek reported: “Barack Obama has never been Muslim and never practiced Islam. But rumors about his religion intended to frighten some voters persist, and they mostly return to one point of fact: his name.” The Boston Globe wrote: “Obama is a member of the United Church of Christ. His Kenyan paternal grandfather and Indonesian stepfather were Muslim, but he attended secular and Catholic schools and was never a practicing Muslim.”

The attacks on Floyd grew personal; Chris Matthews on MSNBC, all but called Floyd a racist saying, “This guy hides under a rock every couple generations, shows up again with another ad against a black candidate”. (There never was a black nominee to do ads against before Obama, but facts are not important to Matthews). Obama even blamed Floyd for breaking his pledge to use public financing for his campaign saying, “527s pop up pretty quickly and have enormous influence and we’ve seen them – there was an ad, one in South Dakota by Floyd Brown I think where it took a speech that I had made extolling faith and made it seem as if I had said that America was a Muslim nation.”

Now all has changed with Barack Obama’s coming out to the Muslim world. Jake Taper of ABC News reports, “The other day we heard a comment from a White House aide that never would have been uttered during the primaries or general election campaign. During a conference call in preparation for President Obama’s trip to Cairo, Egypt, where he will address the Muslim world, deputy National Security Adviser for Strategic Communications Denis McDonough said ‘the President himself experienced Islam on three continents before he was able to — or before he’s been able to visit, really, the heart of the Islamic world — you know, growing up in Indonesia, having a Muslim father — obviously Muslim Americans (are) a key part of Illinois and Chicago.’”

Tapper also reported, “In his April 6 address to the Turkish Parliament, President Obama referenced how many ‘Americans have Muslims in their families or have lived in a Muslim majority country. I know, because I am one of them.’”

It is time for the Obama team to apologize for their attacks of last year. Obama’s official website said, “But shameful, shadowy attackers have been lying about Barack’s religion, claiming he is a Muslim instead of a committed Christian. When people fabricate stories about someone’s faith to denigrate them politically, that’s an attack on people of all faiths.”

Media reporting on these issues were inaccurate and biased. The best reporting disclosed that Obama regularly attended Friday prayers at the mosque with his adopted Muslim stepfather in Indonesia. He attended both Roman Catholic and public schools in Indonesia, but by Indonesian law the religious training he received in both schools was Islamic. Despite this information, Newsweek’s Richard Wolffe disingenuously wrote the following sentence, “In five years there, Obama attended a Roman Catholic school, then a public elementary school, where he sat through a class each week of religious studies.” The only religion Wolffe mentioned is not the religion Obama studied, giving the reader an inaccurate impression.

A few moments of candor did appear in 2008, like when Nicholas Kristof, columnist for the New York Times reported, “he told me last year, on the record, that the Muslim call to prayer is ‘one of the prettiest sounds on earth at sunset.’” This is the same call to prayer which denounces all other religions with this sentence, “I bear witness that there is none worthy of worship except Allah”. Inside the Islamic world, the “call to prayer” frightens minority groups, and is a symbol of oppression because these nations have strictly limited religious freedom.

So when Obama bows to King Abdullah of Saudi Arabia, says Iran has a right to Nuclear reactors, tells Hamas and the PLO that Israel should give up large portions of Jerusalem, nobody should be surprised. However, many Americans seemed shocked by the dramatic policy shifts.

We wonder what Donna Caskey thinks now? Caskey, a 62-year-old retired school teacher in South Carolina told the Boston Globe she researched the issue of Obama’s Muslim roots, saying, "I did a lot of research, and that is such bunk.” She emailed around findings. "We do have a lot of people in our state, bless their darling hearts, they're gullible." Sorry, Donna, you’re the gullible one. Obama’s now changed his story.

ABOUT FORMER MUSLIM TERRORIST WALID SHOEBAT…

Walid’s editorial on Oama Cairo speech:
http://www.ffmuorg.com/index.php?option=com_content&view=article&id=58&Itemid=101

Born Born in Bethlehem, Walid's grandfather was the Muslim Mukhtar (chieftain) of Beit Sahour-Bethlehem (The Shepherd's Fields) and a friend of Haj-Ameen Al-Husseni, the Grand Mufti of Jerusalem and notorious friend of Adolf Hitler.

As a young man, he became a member of the Palestinian Liberation Organization, and participated in acts of terror and violence against Israel, and was later imprisoned in the Russian Compound, Jerusalem's central prison for incitement and violence against Israel.

After his release, he continued his life of violence and rioting in Bethlehem and the Temple Mount. After entering the U.S, he worked as a counselor for the Arab Student Organization at Loop College in Chicago and continued his anti-Israel activities.

In 1993, Walid studied the Bible in a challenge to convert his wife to Islam. Six months later, after intense study, Walid realized that everything he had been taught about Jews was a lie. Convinced he was on the side of evil, he became an advocate for his former enemy.

Driven by a deep passion to heal his own soul, and to bring the truth about the Jews, Israel and the threat of fundamentalist Islam to the world, Walid shed his former life and his work as a software engineer and set out to tirelessly bring the cause against the evil of Islamic Fundamentalist to tens of millions of people throughout the world: churches, synagogues, civic groups, government leaders and media.

Walid is the author of several best selling books including “Why I Left Jihad,” “Why We Want To Kill You” and “God’s War on Terror.”

Walid is an American citizen and lives in the USA with his wife and children, under this assumed name. Walid has spoken all over America and the world including Chile, Mexico, Canada, UK, and South Africa. He has appeared on national television also all over the world including CNN, CNN International, FOX News, ITN, RTE, NBC, CBS, and ABC and ABC Australia. He has also been featured on BBC radio 4, 5 and the largest radio audience on the BBC World Service reaching 180 million people.

Walid has the unique insight so as people can now fully understand the issue of terrorism from the perspective of someone who was once a terrorist. He has given lectures at Harvard Law School, Columbia University, Oxford University UK, National Constitution Center, UCLA, USC, University of Georgia, Washington University, Penn State, San Diego State and many others, as well as speaking on Capitol Hill.

ABOUT ROBERT SPENCER…

NOTE: Please read Robert Spencer’s eye-opening article, “Platitudes and naivete: Obama's Cairo speech” at: http://www.jihadwatch.org/

Here is the beginning 20% of that article:

NOTE: Here is the text as prepared for delivery, provided by the White House, via USA Today, June 4, 2009 -- with my comments interspersed. –Robert Spencer

I am honored to be in the timeless city of Cairo, and to be hosted by two remarkable institutions. For over a thousand years, Al-Azhar has stood as a beacon of Islamic learning,
...whose Grand Sheikh, Muhammad Sayyid Tantawi, has given his approval — on Islamic grounds — to suicide bombing.

and for over a century, Cairo University has been a source of Egypt's advancement. Together, you represent the harmony between tradition and progress. I am grateful for your hospitality, and the hospitality of the people of Egypt. I am also proud to carry with me the goodwill of the American people, and a greeting of peace from Muslim communities in my country: assalaamu alaykum.
According to Islamic law, a Muslim may only extend this greeting -- Peace be upon you -- to a fellow Muslim. To a non-Muslim he is to say, "Peace be upon those who are rightly guided," i.e., Peace be upon the Muslims. Islamic law is silent about what Muslims must do when naive non-Muslim Islamophilic Presidents offer the greeting to Muslims.

We meet at a time of tension between the United States and Muslims around the world – tension rooted in historical forces that go beyond any current policy debate. The relationship between Islam and the West includes centuries of co-existence and cooperation, but also conflict and religious wars. More recently, tension has been fed by colonialism that denied rights and opportunities to many Muslims, and a Cold War in which Muslim-majority countries were too often treated as proxies without regard to their own aspirations. Moreover, the sweeping change brought by modernity and globalization led many Muslims to view the West as hostile to the traditions of Islam.
"Co-existence and cooperation"? When and where, exactly?

Note that Obama lists only ways in which the West has, in his view, mistreated the Islamic world. Not a word about the jihad doctrine, not a word about Islamic supremacism and the imperative to make war against and subjugate non-Muslims as dhimmis. Not a word about the culture of hatred and contempt for non-Muslims that existed long before the spread of American culture ("modernity and globalization") around the world, which Obama D'Souzaishly suggests is responsible for the hostility Muslims have for the West.

Violent extremists have exploited these tensions in a small but potent minority of Muslims. The attacks of September 11th, 2001 and the continued efforts of these extremists to engage in violence against civilians has led some in my country to view Islam as inevitably hostile not only to America and Western countries, but also to human rights. This has bred more fear and mistrust.
The idea that the jihadists are a "small but potent minority of Muslims" is universally accepted dogma, but has no evidence to back it up. The evidence that appears to back it up is highly tendentious -- check out here how Dalia Mogahed (now an Obama adviser) and John Esposito cooked survey data from the Islamic world to increase the number of "moderates."

ROBERT SPENCER is the director of Jihad Watch, a program of the David Horowitz Freedom Center, and the author of eight books on Islam and jihad, including the New York Times bestsellers The Truth About Muhammad and The Politically Incorrect Guide to Islam (and the Crusades). Spencer is a weekly columnist for Human Events and FrontPage Magazine, and has led seminars on Islam and jihad for the United States Central Command, United States Army Command and General Staff College, the U.S. Army's Asymmetric Warfare Group, the FBI, the Joint Terrorism Task Force, and the U.S. intelligence